f281-ah-pln-10013 rev. 2 - home | · pdf fileappendix g piling and marine fauna observation...

Construction Environmental Management Plan Ichthys Project - Gas Export Pipeline EPCI Contract

F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

REVISION STATUS LOG

Rev. Date Pages Description

0 11-Oct-13 303 Issued for Approval

1 16-Oct-13 323 Incorporation of comments from the Northern Territory Environmental Protection Authority

1A 14-Mar-14 327 Additions of treated wastewater discharge for the Semac-1

1B 21-Mar-14 324 Additions of treated wastewater discharge for the Semac-1

1C 12-May-14 320 Incorporated company comments.

1D 25-May-14 All Updated for revised trench design

2 26 May 14 All Updated for revised trench design

HOLD STATUS LOG

Number Description

1

2

3


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 9

1.1 ICHTHYS PROJECT OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 9 1.2 PURPOSE OF DOCUMENT ............................................................................................................... 10 1.3 SCOPE OF DOCUMENT .................................................................................................................... 10 1.4 STRUCTURE OF DOCUMENT ........................................................................................................... 14 1.5 REVIEW, UPDATES AND APPROVAL .............................................................................................. 15 1.6 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 16 1.7 ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................................................... 18

2 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................... 23

2.1 COMPANY DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................................. 23 2.2 CONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 23 2.3 SUBCONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................... 24 2.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS .................................................................................... 24 2.5 APPROVAL DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................. 25 2.6 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................. 26

3 SCOPE OF WORK ..................................................................................................................................... 27

3.1 OVERVIEW OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ................................................................................. 27 3.2 SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................................................... 32 3.3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES ................................................................................................................. 33 3.4 ONSHORE TRENCHING METHODOLOGIES .................................................................................... 35 3.5 CABLE CROSSING CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................... 41

4 OBLIGATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 42

4.1 ICHTHYS PROJECT APPROVALS .................................................................................................... 42 4.1.1 Commonwealth Environmental Approval ...................................................................................... 42 4.1.2 Northern Territory Environmental Assessment Decision ............................................................... 42 4.1.3 Aboriginal Areas Protection Authority Certificates ........................................................................ 42 4.1.4 Commonwealth ............................................................................................................................ 43 4.1.5 Northern Territory ......................................................................................................................... 43

4.2 LEGISLATIVE REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 43 4.2.1 Commonwealth ............................................................................................................................ 43 4.2.2 Northern Territory ......................................................................................................................... 44

4.3 INTERNATIONAL ............................................................................................................................... 46 4.4 STANDARDS, CODES AND GUIDELINES ........................................................................................ 46

5 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 48

5.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 48 5.2 EMS DOCUMENT STRUCTURE ........................................................................................................ 48

5.2.1 Environmental Policy .................................................................................................................... 48 5.2.2 Environmental Compliance Register ............................................................................................. 48 5.2.3 Project Environmental Plan .......................................................................................................... 48 5.2.4 Discipline-specific Environmental Management Plans .................................................................. 49 5.2.5 Activity specific procedures .......................................................................................................... 49

5.3 OBJECTIVES AND TARGETS ........................................................................................................... 49 5.4 CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT ......................................................................................................... 51

6 EXISTING ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................................................ 54

6.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 54 6.2 METEOROLOGICAL CONDITIONS ................................................................................................... 54 6.3 ONSHORE ENVIRONMENT (MIDDLE ARM PENINSULA) ................................................................ 54

6.3.1 Onshore vegetation ...................................................................................................................... 54 6.3.2 Onshore fauna .............................................................................................................................. 55 6.3.3 Surface water ............................................................................................................................... 58 6.3.4 Soil erodibility ............................................................................................................................... 58 6.3.5 Groundwater ................................................................................................................................. 62


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

6.3.6 Acid sulfate soils ........................................................................................................................... 62 6.4 MARINE ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................... 66

6.4.1 Coastal geomorphology and bathymetry ...................................................................................... 66 6.4.2 Metocean conditions ..................................................................................................................... 66 6.4.3 Marine water quality ..................................................................................................................... 66 6.4.4 Marine biota .................................................................................................................................. 66 6.4.5 Protected marine fauna ................................................................................................................ 67 6.4.6 Reserves and Protected Areas ..................................................................................................... 74

6.5 EXISTING SITES OF HISTORIC AND CULTURAL SIGNIFICANCE ................................................. 75 6.5.1 Onshore ........................................................................................................................................ 75 6.5.2 Nearshore ..................................................................................................................................... 75

6.6 CURRENT LAND ................................................................................................................................ 77 6.7 CURRENT SEA USE .......................................................................................................................... 77

6.7.1 Existing sources of underwater noise ........................................................................................... 77

7 ENVIRONMENTAL RISK ASSESSMENT ................................................................................................. 78

7.1 OVERVIEW OF ICHTHYS PROJECT RISK ASSESSMENT .............................................................. 78 7.2 GEP PROJECT RISK ASSESSMENT ................................................................................................ 78

8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORKS .............................................................................. 85

8.1 ONSHORE .......................................................................................................................................... 85 8.1.1 Cultural heritage management ..................................................................................................... 85 8.1.2 Flora management ....................................................................................................................... 90 8.1.3 Fauna management ..................................................................................................................... 95 8.1.4 Erosion and sediment control ....................................................................................................... 99 8.1.5 Acid sulfate soil management ..................................................................................................... 112 8.1.6 Vegetation clearance .................................................................................................................. 112 8.1.7 Acidification of soils adjacent to the trench ................................................................................. 112 8.1.8 Acidification of the trench sides .................................................................................................. 113 8.1.9 Excavated material ..................................................................................................................... 113 8.1.10 Environmental management framework ..................................................................................... 116 8.1.11 Dust management ...................................................................................................................... 129 8.1.12 Bushfire Prevention .................................................................................................................... 133 8.1.13 Rehabilitation management ........................................................................................................ 138 8.1.14 Airborne noise management ....................................................................................................... 143 8.1.15 Quarantine and pest management ............................................................................................. 148 8.1.16 Weed management .................................................................................................................... 148 8.1.17 Waste management ................................................................................................................... 156 8.1.18 Hazardous materials management ............................................................................................. 163 8.1.19 Onshore hydrocarbon spill response .......................................................................................... 171

8.2 NEARSHORE .................................................................................................................................... 178 8.2.1 Heritage management ................................................................................................................ 178 8.2.2 Anchoring management ............................................................................................................. 182 8.2.3 Protected marine species management ..................................................................................... 190 8.2.4 Underwater noise ....................................................................................................................... 197 8.2.5 Quarantine management ............................................................................................................ 206 8.2.6 Nearshore waste management ................................................................................................... 214 8.2.7 Vessel liquid discharge management ......................................................................................... 221 8.2.8 Hazardous material management ............................................................................................... 227 8.2.9 Hydrocarbon spill response ........................................................................................................ 233 8.2.10 Wet buckle response management (contingency only) ............................................................... 240

9 MONITORING .......................................................................................................................................... 244

9.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................... 244 9.2 DATA QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES ................................................................................... 244 9.3 MONITORING DATA COLLECTION AND ANALYSIS ..................................................................... 244 9.4 WATER QUALITY OBJECTIVES ..................................................................................................... 255 9.5 SEDIMENT QUALITY AND BIOINDICATOR QUALITY (TIER 3) ..................................................... 256

10 MANAGEMENT OF SOCIAL ISSUES ..................................................................................................... 257


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

10.1 SOCIAL IMPACT MANAGEMENT PLAN ......................................................................................... 257 10.2 COMMUNITY ENGAGEMENT .......................................................................................................... 257

11 AUDITING, REPORTING AND COMMUNICATION ................................................................................ 258

11.1 INSPECTIONS .................................................................................................................................. 258 11.2 AUDITING ......................................................................................................................................... 258 11.3 REPORTING ..................................................................................................................................... 259 11.4 AWARENESS AND COMMUNICATION ........................................................................................... 260 11.5 DOCUMENT CONTROL AND RECORD MANAGEMENT ............................................................... 260

11.5.1 Document control ....................................................................................................................... 260 11.5.2 Control of records ....................................................................................................................... 260

12 CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTATIVE ACTION ....................................................................................... 261

12.1 ADAPTIVE MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................. 261 12.2 NON-CONFORMANCE CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTATIVE ACTION ......................................... 261 12.3 INCIDENT MANAGEMENT AND REPORTING ................................................................................ 262 12.4 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS AND RESPONSE ........................................................................ 262

12.4.1 Incident Management System .................................................................................................... 262 12.4.2 Marine vessels ........................................................................................................................... 263 12.4.3 Worksite Emergency Response Plan ......................................................................................... 263 12.4.4 Emergency reporting to authorities ............................................................................................. 263 12.4.5 Critical weather event ................................................................................................................. 263 12.4.6 Emergency response training and drills ...................................................................................... 264

13 RESPONSIBILITIES, TRAINING AND AWARENESS ............................................................................. 265

13.1 CONTRACTOR ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES ......................................................................... 265 13.2 SHORE APPROACH SUBCONTRACTOR ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES ............................... 269 13.3 COMPANY ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................ 270 13.4 COMPETENCY, TRAINING AND AWARENESS ............................................................................. 272

13.4.1 Inductions ................................................................................................................................... 272 13.4.2 Training and competency ........................................................................................................... 272

APPENDIX A CONSTRUCTION VESSEL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 273

APPENDIX B ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY ............................................................................................. 280

APPENDIX C EPBC ACT PROTECTED MATTERS REPORT ............................................................... 282

APPENDIX D EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN CERTIFICATE ........................................ 299

APPENDIX E EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DESIGN CRITERIA AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS ....................................................................................................................... 301

APPENDIX F LIMING RATE CALCULATIONS ...................................................................................... 304

APPENDIX G PILING AND MARINE FAUNA OBSERVATION LOG EXAMPLE .................................... 305

APPENDIX H PROPOSED ANCHORING PROCEDURES AND METHODS .......................................... 306

APPENDIX I NEARSHORE OIL SPILL EQUIPMENT ............................................................................ 312

APPENDIX J WET BUCKLE CONTIGENCY .......................................................................................... 314


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

LIST OT TABLES

Table 1-1 Contractor activities outside the scope of the CEMP .................................................................... 11 Table 1-2 CEMP revision and approval types ............................................................................................... 15 Table 3-1 Onshore construction activities at Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach site .......................... 27 Table 3-2 Nearshore construction activities .................................................................................................. 31 Table 3-3 Equipment list for the construction activities ................................................................................. 32 Table 3-4 Summary of tidal inundation expected within the trench ............................................................... 39 Table 4-1 Commonwealth legislation relevant to GEP construction .............................................................. 43 Table 4-2 Northern Territory legislation relevant to GEP construction .......................................................... 44 Table 4-3 International conventions and guidelines relevant to GEP construction ........................................ 46 Table 5-1 Requirements of ISO 14001 – Environmental Management Systems .......................................... 50 Table 5-2 Contractor overarching environmental objectives and targets ...................................................... 51 Table 6-1 Erosion potential for soil types at Middle Arm - shore crossing site .............................................. 59 Table 6-2 Overview of biological and manmade sound source levels at 1 m [Ref F8] .................................. 77 Table 7-1 ENVID risk matrix ......................................................................................................................... 80 Table 7-2 Summary of key risks identified for the onshore scope of work .................................................... 81 Table 7-3 Summary of key risks identified for nearshore scope of work ....................................................... 83 Table 8-1 Cultural heritage objectives, targets and indicators ...................................................................... 86 Table 8-2 Cultural heritage environmental management measures .............................................................. 87 Table 8-3 Cultural heritage TARP ................................................................................................................. 89 Table 8-4 Flora management objectives, targets and indicators ................................................................... 90 Table 8-5 Flora impacts management framework ......................................................................................... 91 Table 8-6 Flora management TARP ............................................................................................................. 94 Table 8-7 Fauna management objectives, targets and indicators ................................................................. 95 Table 8-8 Fauna management measures ..................................................................................................... 96 Table 8-9 Fauna management TARP ........................................................................................................... 98 Table 8-10 Erosion hazard based on monthly rainfall erosivity (Darwin) ........................................................ 99 Table 8-11 Objectives, targets and indicators for erosion and sediment control ........................................... 102 Table 8-12 Erosion and sediment control management................................................................................ 103 Table 8-13 Retention basin sediment control TARP ..................................................................................... 110 Table 8-14 Rock filter sediment control TARP .............................................................................................. 111 Table 8-15 ASS trench work management objectives, targets and indicators .............................................. 117 Table 8-16 General ASS management measures ........................................................................................ 118 Table 8-17 Vegetation clearing and trench excavation ASS management measures ................................... 118 Table 8-18 Onshore treatment and storage PASS management measures ................................................. 121 Table 8-19 Retention basin water quality TARP ........................................................................................... 123 Table 8-20 Trench seawater discharge TARP .............................................................................................. 124 Table 8-21 ASS treatment and storage TARP .............................................................................................. 126 Table 8-22 Groundwater adjacent to the trench TARP ................................................................................. 127 Table 8-23 Mangrove health monitoring TARP ............................................................................................. 128 Table 8-24 Dust management objectives, targets and indicators .................................................................. 129 Table 8-25 Dust management measures ...................................................................................................... 130 Table 8-26 Dust management TARP ............................................................................................................ 132 Table 8-27 Bushfire Prevention Objectives, Targets and Indicators ............................................................. 133 Table 8-28 Bushfire prevention management measures .............................................................................. 134 Table 8-29 Bushfire management TARP ...................................................................................................... 137 Table 8-30 Rehabilitation Management Objectives, Targets and Indicators ................................................. 138 Table 8-31 Rehabilitation management measures ....................................................................................... 139 Table 8-32 Rehabilitation management TARP.............................................................................................. 142 Table 8-33 Noise generating activities at the Middle Arm Peninsula site ...................................................... 144 Table 8-34 Airborne noise management objectives, targets and indicators .................................................. 145 Table 8-35 Airborne noise management measures ...................................................................................... 146 Table 8-36 Noise management TARP .......................................................................................................... 147 Table 8-37 Weed management objectives, targets and indicators ................................................................ 148 Table 8-38 Weed management measures .................................................................................................... 149 Table 8-39 Weed management TARP .......................................................................................................... 151 Table 8-40 Pest management objectives, targets and indicators .................................................................. 152 Table 8-41 Pest management measures ...................................................................................................... 153 Table 8-42 Pest management TARP ............................................................................................................ 155


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-43 Anticipated types of waste .......................................................................................................... 157 Table 8-44 Onshore waste objectives, targets and indicators ....................................................................... 158 Table 8-45 Onshore waste management measures ..................................................................................... 159 Table 8-46 Waste management TARP ......................................................................................................... 162 Table 8-47 Diesel storage capacity and transfer at the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site ........... 164 Table 8-48 Hazardous material control approach risk assessment ............................................................... 164 Table 8-49 Hazardous materials management objectives, targets and indicators ........................................ 165 Table 8-50 Hazardous materials management measures ............................................................................ 166 Table 8-51 Hydrocarbon spill response objectives, targets and indicators .................................................... 172 Table 8-52 Hydrocarbon spill prevention and response management measures ......................................... 173 Table 8-53 Onshore spill response TARP .................................................................................................... 176 Table 8-54 Spill response measures and actions relating to spill type .......................................................... 177 Table 8-55 Nearshore heritage management objectives, targets and indicators .......................................... 178 Table 8-56 Nearshore cultural heritage environmental management measures ........................................... 179 Table 8-57 Nearshore heritage TARP .......................................................................................................... 180 Table 8-58 Anchoring management objectives, targets and indicators ......................................................... 185 Table 8-59 Anchoring management measures ............................................................................................. 186 Table 8-60 Anchoring management TARP ................................................................................................... 189 Table 8-61 Protected species (physical interaction) objectives, targets and indicators ................................. 190 Table 8-62 Protected species vessel interaction management measures .................................................... 191 Table 8-63 Marine megafauna interaction restrictions .................................................................................. 193 Table 8-64 Protected species (physical interaction) management TARP ..................................................... 195 Table 8-65 Examples of the range of noises produced by vessel types ....................................................... 197 Table 8-66 Cofferdam installation noise management objectives, targets and indicators ............................. 201 Table 8-67 Underwater noise – cofferdam installation management measures ............................................ 202 Table 8-68 Underwater noise - cofferdam installation TARP ........................................................................ 205 Table 8-69 Nearshore quarantine objective, targets and indicators .............................................................. 208 Table 8-70 Nearshore quarantine management measures ........................................................................... 209 Table 8-71 Nearshore quarantine TARP ...................................................................................................... 213 Table 8-72 Anticipated types of waste produced on marine vessels ............................................................. 215 Table 8-73 Nearshore waste objectives, targets and indicators .................................................................... 216 Table 8-74 Nearshore waste management measures .................................................................................. 217 Table 8-75 Nearshore waste targets, action and response plan ................................................................... 220 Table 8-76 Vessel liquid discharge objectives, targets and indicators .......................................................... 222 Table 8-77 Vessel liquid discharges management measures ....................................................................... 223 Table 8-78 Deck containment system TARP ................................................................................................ 225 Table 8-79 Deck runoff TARP ....................................................................................................................... 226 Table 8-80 Hazardous material control approach risk assessment ............................................................... 227 Table 8-81 Dangerous goods and hazardous materials objectives, targets and indicators ........................... 228 Table 8-82 Dangerous goods and hazardous materials management measures ......................................... 229 Table 8-83 Hydrocarbon spill response objectives, targets and indicators .................................................... 234 Table 8-84 Hydrocarbon spill response management measures .................................................................. 235 Table 8-85 Hydrocarbon spill response TARP .............................................................................................. 237 Table 8-86 Wet buckle discharge characteristics .......................................................................................... 240 Table 8-87 Wet buckle discharge objective, targets and indicators .............................................................. 242 Table 8-88 Wet buckle discharge management measures ........................................................................... 243 Table 9-1 Monitoring programme ............................................................................................................... 245 Table 9-2 Water quality criteria for controlled discharges from the retention basin ..................................... 255 Table 9-3 Trench discharge –water quality criteria for heavy metals .......................................................... 256 Table 9-4 Sediment quality parameters and trigger criteria ........................................................................ 256 Table 9-5 Bio-indicator quality parameters and trigger criteria .................................................................... 256 Table 11-1 Summary of reporting requirements ........................................................................................... 259


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1-1 The GEP Project offshore development area and pipeline route ................................................... 9 Figure 1-2 Overview of the Nearshore GEP Project Area (i.e. Northern Territory coastal waters) ................ 12 Figure 1-3 Locations of the onshore GEP Project areas within Darwin Harbour ........................................... 13 Figure 3-1 Indicative schedule for onshore construction activities ................................................................ 33 Figure 3-2 Indicative schedule for nearshore construction activities ............................................................. 33 Figure 3-3 Middle Arm Peninsula – Indicative shore approach site layout .................................................... 34 Figure 3-4 Overview of onshore trenching methodology .............................................................................. 35 Figure 3-5 Cross section of the trench profile in the salt flat area ................................................................. 36 Figure 3-6 Cofferdam structure overview with two sheet-piles (left side) and with a two additional sheet-piles

to provide stability to the temporary work road (right side) .................................................................. 37 Figure 3-7 General arrangement of GEP cofferdam at the seaward end ...................................................... 37 Figure 3-8 Predicted tidal heights within the trench. The bedrock, trench profile and seabed levels are

indicative only. The black box (KP 879.7 to 880.2) indicates where the cofferdam will be installed. ... 38 Figure 3-9 Location of KP reference points along the trench ........................................................................ 38 Figure 3-10 Water level assessment along the shore approach trench based on predicted tidal levels at

Darwin Harbour. The blue dots indicate the percentage of time per day this location is in the water. The red dots indicate the maximum water levels per day. .................................................................. 40

Figure 3-11 Schematic of GEP cable crossing ............................................................................................... 41 Figure 3-12 Schematic view of two layers of concrete mattress ..................................................................... 41 Figure 5-1 Environmental management system document hierarchy ........................................................... 52 Figure 5-2 Ongoing risk assessment process ............................................................................................... 53 Figure 6-1 Monthly rainfall probabilities for Darwin (mm) .............................................................................. 54 Figure 6-2 Vegetation communities of the Middle Arm Peninsula development area ................................... 56 Figure 6-3 Mangrove zonation in Darwin Harbour [Ref F3] .......................................................................... 57 Figure 6-4 Natural drainage pathway of surface water runoff at the Middle Arm site .................................... 58 Figure 6-5 Soil family types on Middle Arm - shore crossing site .................................................................. 60 Figure 6-6 Cross-section of soil profile along the pipeline alignment ............................................................ 61 Figure 6-7 Distribution of potential acid sulfate soils profile along proposed trench area .............................. 65 Figure 6-8 Location of the closest turtle nesting beach to the development area ......................................... 69 Figure 6-9 Potential green turtle foraging habitats in Darwin Harbour .......................................................... 70 Figure 6-10 Potential flatback turtle foraging habitats in Darwin Harbour ....................................................... 71 Figure 6-11 Potential hawksbill turtle foraging habitats in Darwin Harbour ..................................................... 72 Figure 6-12 Potential dugong foraging habitats in Darwin Harbour ................................................................ 73 Figure 6-13 Location of Channel Island in relation to development area for GEP pipelay .............................. 74 Figure 6-14 Location of controlled zones and wrecks ..................................................................................... 76 Figure 7-1 Overview of ENVID process ........................................................................................................ 79 Figure 8-1 Site drainage plan ..................................................................................................................... 101 Figure 8-2 PASS management flowchart ................................................................................................... 114 Figure 8-3 Cross-section of the treatment pad ........................................................................................... 116 Figure 8-4 Response to accidental disturbance of heritage sites of significance ........................................ 181 Figure 8-5 Pipelay corridor including anchor exclusion zone ...................................................................... 184 Figure 8-6 Guidelines on approach distances for dolphins, dugongs and whales ....................................... 194 Figure 8-7 Marine megafauna interaction management pre-commencement flow chart............................. 196 Figure 8-8 Transfer of Combat Agency role ................................................................................................ 239 Figure 9-1 Baseline groundwater monitoring locations along trench .......................................................... 252 Figure 9-2 Groundwater monitoring locations at the ASS treatment pad .................................................... 253 Figure 9-3 Mangrove Monitoring Locations ................................................................................................ 254 Figure 13-1 Contractor’s HSE Organisation Chart ........................................................................................ 268


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

1 GENERAL

1.1 ICHTHYS PROJECT OVERVIEW

The Ichthys liquefied natural gas (LNG) Project is a Joint Venture between INPEX group companies (the Operator), major partner TOTAL group companies and the Australian subsidiaries of Tokyo Gas, Osaka Gas, Chibu Electric Power and Toho Gas. The Ichthys LNG Project will develop the Ichthys gas and condensate field (the Ichthys Field) in the Browse Basin, around 450 km north-north-east of Broome and 820 km west-south-west of Darwin, Northern Territory (NT), Australia (Figure 1-1).

Saipem (Portugal) Comércio Maritimo (Australian Branch) (Contractor) has been awarded the engineering and installation contract by INPEX Operations Australia Pty Ltd (Company) for the Gas Export Pipeline (GEP) Project (the GEP Project) associated with the Ichthys Gas Field Development Project (the Project). The pipeline will measure approximately 885 km and will involve onshore, nearshore and offshore phases of work [Ref A1].

Once complete, the Ichthys Project, will allow for the extraction and transmission of natural gas to be directed from the Ichthys Field through the GEP to the onshore processing facilities at Blaydin Point in Darwin Harbour for processing into LNG and liquefied petroleum gas. Export of condensate directly from the offshore floating facilities to market, via off-take tankers, will also occur [Ref A1].

Figure 1-1 The GEP Project offshore development area and pipeline route


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

1.2 PURPOSE OF DOCUMENT

Contractor has prepared this Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) to detail the environmental protection management measures and controls necessary to avoid, reduce or mitigate the environmental impacts during the installation of the pipeline in the nearshore (i.e. within NT coastal waters, including Darwin Harbour) and onshore area (Figure 1-2).

It describes the systems and tools that will be used by Contractor to manage subcontractors and the environmental management responsibilities of Company, Contractor and subcontractors during construction. This CEMP will inform the development of future, more detailed environmental documentation, such as procedures and Safe Work Method Statements (SWMSs).

This CEMP meets the requirements of:

Ichthys Gas Field Development Project: Draft Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) [Ref A1] and Supplement to the Draft EIS [Ref A2] prepared by Company.

Approval conditions associated with the Draft EIS and Supplement to the Draft EIS:

- Approval Decision EPBC 2008/4208. Department of Environment (DoE), formerly Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities (DSEWPaC) in accordance with the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 (the EPBC Act) [Ref E1].

- Assessment Report 65. Natural Resources, Environment, The Arts and Sport (NRETAS) in accordance with the NT Environmental Assessment Act 1994 (the NT EA Act) [Ref E2].

Contractor Project Environmental Plan [Ref B1].

Support and application to the NT Environment Protection Authority (NT EPA) for an Environmental Protection Approval under the Waste Management and Pollution Control Act 1998.

Following its review and approval by the NT EPA, this CEMP will support applications for further approvals and licences to be issued under the relevant legislation, e.g.:

- Consent to Construct (NT Department of Mines and Energy). - Development Consent (NT Department of Lands Planning and the Environment) (DLPE). - Fisheries Permit – Rock Armouring (NT Department of Primary Industry and Fisheries).

1.3 SCOPE OF DOCUMENT

The CEMP covers Contractor activities occurring onshore and nearshore (excluding dredging activities which are covered in the GEP Dredging Spoil and Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) [Ref C1]).

The nearshore pipelay area extends to the NT coastal waters 3 nautical miles limit and includes Darwin Harbour (Figure 1-2).

Onshore activities will take place at the Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach site, which is a corridor section from the shore crossing to Wickham Point Road (Figure 1-3). The corridor section has a total length of approximately 1.5 km and a width of approximately 0.1 km. Approximately 1000 m of this corridor is located within the intertidal zone.

All personnel employed by Contractor and its subcontractors to complete construction activities within these areas are required to comply with this CEMP. Subcontractor plans and procedures will be aligned with this CEMP, and together with Subcontractor environmental systems and procedures will form the basis of the implementation of this CEMP. A detailed explanation of the construction activities relevant to this CEMP is provided in Chapter 3.

Table 1-1 outlines the activities that fall outside of the scope of this CEMP, but which are covered by other environmental management plans.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 1-1 Contractor activities outside the scope of the CEMP

Activity Relevant environmental management plan

Approved By

Offshore pipelay activities Offshore Environment Plan [Ref B2] National Offshore Petroleum Safety and Environmental Management Authority (NOPSEMA)

Nearshore dredging and sand sweeping

DSDMP [Ref C] NT EPA and DoE

Sourcing and transport of rock materials

Rock stockpile management

Quarry Environmental Management Plan

Transport Management Plan

Erosion and Sediment Control Plan

DLPE

Department of Transport (DOT)

Department of Land Resource Management (DLRM)

Offshore mechanical completion Offshore Environment Plan [Ref B2] NOPSEMA

Discharge of treated wastewater into Darwin Harbour

Waste Discharge Licence NT EPA


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 1-2 Overview of the Nearshore GEP Project Area (i.e. Northern Territory coastal waters)


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 1-3 Locations of the onshore GEP Project areas within Darwin Harbour


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

1.4 STRUCTURE OF DOCUMENT

This CEMP is divided into 12 chapters structured as follows:

Chapter 1 General: is an introductory chapter providing an overview of the Ichthys Project and the purpose and scope of this document.

Chapter 2 References: provides a list of the references cited in this document.

Chapter 3 Scope of Work: provides an overview of the Contractor scope of work (SOW) and the specific construction activities relevant to this CEMP.

Chapter 4 GEP Project Obligations and Requirements: outlines the legal requirements relevant to this CEMP, including the approvals required prior to the commencement of construction activities. It also details any relevant Codes of Practice or standards, as well as any relevant regulatory guidance that has been published.

Chapter 5 Environmental Management System: summarises the Environmental Management System (EMS) implemented by Contractor, including relevant Contractor policies, standards and requirements that Contractor EMS meets.

Chapter 6 Existing Environment and Relevant Studies: provides an overview of the physical and biological environments, key environmental receptors, and social, cultural and economic environment of the development area. This information provides the context for definition of the risks and management strategies detailed in Chapter 7 and Chapter 8.

Chapter 7 Environmental Risk Identification and Assessment: outlines the risk assessment process that has been adopted by Contractor for the GEP Project.

Chapter 8 Environmental Management Frameworks (EMFs): describes the objective, targets and indicators for each environmental risk identified, and environmental mitigation measures required to achieve these. This chapter is divided into sub-sections, each one addressing a specific environmental aspect.

Chapter 9 Monitoring: outlines the environmental monitoring activities to be conducted during the installation of the GEP, including details on monitoring location, parameters, frequency and performance criteria.

Chapter 10 Management of Social Issues: summarises the social impacts and management strategies relevant to the construction activities.

Chapter 11 Auditing, Reporting and Communication: outlines the environmental inspections and audits to be carried out, the internal and external reporting requirements, and the communication process between relevant personnel.

Chapter 12 Corrective and Preventative Action: describes the principles of adaptive management and gives an overview of the response to non-conformances and how corrective and preventative actions are implemented.

Chapter 13 Responsibilities, Training and Awareness: specifies the roles and responsibilities of personnel in relation to this CEMP, noting that responsibilities for specific management measures and tasks are outlined in the relevant EMFs in Chapter 8. It outlines Contractor environmental training program.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

1.5 REVIEW, UPDATES AND APPROVAL

The CEMP will be reviewed, and updated if required, as described in Table 1-2. Review of the CEMP will be undertaken as part of the implementation of the Contractor EMS (Chapter 5).

Major revisions of the CEMP will be prepared prior to the commencement of key packages of works and where additional GEP Project approvals are required. Table 1-2 describes under which circumstances revisions of the CEMP will be submitted to NT EPA for approval. This table will be reviewed as part of each CEMP revision. The first planned major revision is incorporation of mechanical completion activities into the scope of the CEMP, for which the indicative date for submission is September 2014.

Table 1-2 CEMP revision and approval types

Revision Contractor Company NT EPA

Initial revision Prepare CEMP addressing all requirements

Review CEMP and submit to NT EPA

Review and approve CEMP

Routine revision (i.e. typographical changes or revisions to formatting or referencing)

Prepare revision of CEMP

Approval by Project Environmental Specialist or Project Health, Safety, Environment (HSE) Manager

Send notification to Company

Issue notification to NT EPA

None

Minor revision (i.e. incorporating changes consistent with project approvals and EIS commitments)

Prepare revision and document changes


Issue notification to NT EPA

None

Major revision (i.e. incorporating a new or substantially modified management strategy, a scope change with potentially significant additional environmental impacts, after the first year of construction, or incorporating changes to comply with an additional approval)

Prepare revision of CEMP

Review CEMP and submit to NT EPA



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

1.6 DEFINITIONS

Commonwealth Marine Environment

Is any part of the sea, including the waters, seabed, and airspace, within Australia's exclusive economic zone and/or over the continental shelf of Australia, that is not State or Northern Territory waters.

Commonwealth Offshore Waters

Means the waters of the sea that comprise the Commonwealth Marine Environment.

Company The entity appointed to act as delegate on behalf of Downstream Operator and as agent for IJV, being at the date of this Contract, INPEX Operations Australia Pty Ltd (ACN 150 217 262).

Contract The contract number 800168 between the Parties created by the execution of the Contract Documents.

Contractor SAIPEM PORTUGAL COMÉRCIO MARITIMO SOCIEDADE UNIPESSOAL, Lda of 44a Kings Park Road, West Perth WA 6005.

Declared Area An area surrounding a site of heritage significance such as a wreck site that is declared under the Heritage Act 2011 (NT). Restrictions on what vessels may traverse the area and what vessels are permitted to do in the area apply.

Exclusion Zone An area surrounding a site of heritage significance such as a wreck site that is declared under the Darwin Port Corporation Act (NT). No vessels may anchor within or traverse through these zones without permit.

GEP DSDMP The Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan prepared for the GEP Project.

GEP Project Means the installation of the GEP as part of the Ichthys Project.

Good International Industry Practice

The International Finance Corporation (2007) defines Good International Industry Practice as the exercise of professional skill, diligence, prudence and foresight that would be reasonably expected from skilled and experienced professionals engaged in the same type of undertaking under the same or similar circumstances globally.

Heritage Protection Zone

A protection zone applied around a site of Aboriginal or non-Aboriginal heritage significance. These include Declared Areas and Exclusion Zones around wrecks, Project Controlled Zones and Restricted Work Areas.

Ichthys Project The development and production of hydrocarbons from the Ichthys Field offshore.

Australia and the processing of such hydrocarbons via associated facilities.

Job Safety Analysis Means one of the tools that will be used identify and control environmental hazards on site. A Job Safety Analysis (JHA) is a second tier risk assessment with the aim of preventing personal injury to a person, or their colleagues, or harm to the environment.

Kilometre Point Means the distance along the GEP measured in km from the offshore end in the Ichthys field (KP 0) to the onshore beach valve location at the shore crossing in Darwin Harbour (KP 881).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Nearshore Waters Means the marine waters designated as NT Coastal waters (refer to definition for ‘NT Coastal Waters’).

NT Coastal Waters Waters where NT Government has responsibility for management as defined in the Petroleum (Submerged Lands) Act 1967. This includes waters to the three nautical mile limit and those waters between a straight baseline and the mainland.

Permanent Threshold Shift

Is a permanent reduction in hearing sensitivity caused by irreversible damage to the sensory hair cells of the ear.

Pipeline Buckle An event that is deemed to occur when circular cross sectional profile of the pipe is distorted by means other than being struck by an external force. Can be a dry buckle (pipe wall is not punctured and the interior of the pipe remains dry) or wet buckle (pipe wall is punctured and interior of pipe is flooded).

Pre-lay intervention Intervention deemed essential to smooth sections of seabed profile where critical free span has been identified along the GEP route before laying the pipe. These will be performed by hydro-jetting or mass flow excavation.

Project Area The area within which all construction works specific to the GEP Project will occur.

Project Controlled Area

An area surrounding an object of heritage significance (such as a wreck site) which is not protected through legislative means but has been afforded protection by Company through the control of which vessels may traverse over or undertake certain activities within a certain distance.

Reduced Levels Distance recorded as a Height Above or Below the datum (this height is in metres).

Residual Soils Are soils that develop from their underlying parent rocks and have the same general chemistry as those rocks.

Restricted Work Areas

Areas identified as Aboriginal Sacred Sites that have been protected where site access and / or the type of work that may be carried out within the area are restricted and subject to conditions relating to an Aboriginal Areas Protection Authority (AAPA) certificate.

Shore approach site The area in which all onshore works for the GEP construction SOW will occur. It is a corridor section on Middle Arm Peninsula, from the shore crossing to Wickham Point Road. The corridor section has a total length of approximately 1.5 km and a width of approximately 0.1 km.

Site Means a location designated as an area where GEP Project related activities will occur

Site Custodian (Contractor or Subcontractor)

For the shore crossing site, this means Contractor or subcontractor with responsibility for managing the site for a particular phase of work.

Subcontractor Any Company or person to whom Contractor has subcontracted directly or indirectly at any level the performance of any part of the Work. Subcontractors include vendors and novated works contractors.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Temporary Threshold Shift

Is a temporary reduction in hearing sensitivity as a result of exposure to sound.

Wetsides Vessel surfaces, including internal systems subject to immersion in seawater.

1.7 ABBREVIATIONS

AAPA Aboriginal Areas Protection Authority

AASS Actual acid sulfate soils

AHT Anchor handling tug

ALARP As Low As Reasonably Practicable

AMOSC Australian Marine Oil Spill Centre Pty Ltd

ANC Acid Neutralising Capacity

ANZECC Australia and New Zealand Environment Conservation Council

APPEA Australian Petroleum Production & Exploration Association Ltd

AQIS Australian Quarantine and Inspection Service

ARI Average Recurrence Interval

ARMCANZ Agriculture and Resource Management Council of Australia and New Zealand

ASS Acid sulfate soils

BOM Bureau of Meteorology

CDDL Contractor Document and Drawing List

CDR Contractor Darwin Representative

CEMP Construction Environmental Management Plan

CHARM Chemical Hazards And Risk Management

CMT Crisis Management Team

CPESC Certified Professional Erosion and Sediment Control

DAFF Department of Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry

dB Decibel

DGPS Differential Global Positioning System


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

DLPE Department of Lands Planning and the Environment

DLRM Department of Land Resource Management

DME Department of Mines and Energy

DoE Department of the Environment (formerly Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities)

DOT Department of Transport

DPC Darwin Port Corporation

DPIF Department of Primary Industries and Fisheries [NT]

DSDMP Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan

DSEWPaC Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities

EHS Environmental, Health and Safety

EIS Environmental Impact Statement

EMF Environmental Management Framework

EMS Environmental Management System

EMT Emergency Management Team

ENVID Environmental Hazard Identification

EPBC Act Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999

EPCI Engineering, Procurement, Construction and Installation

ERC Emergency Response Centre

ERT Emergency Response Team

ESC Erosion and Sediment Control

ESCP Erosion and Sediment Control Plan

GEP Gas Export Pipeline

GHS Globally Harmonized System (of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals)

GIIP Good International Industry Practice

HDPU HD Polyurethane


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

HSE Health, Safety, Environment

IECA International Erosion Control Association

IFC International Finance Corporation

IMDG International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code

IMO International Maritime Organization

IMS Invasive Marine Species

IPDEP Ichthys Project Dredging Expert Panel

ISO International Organization for Standardization

ISPS International Ship and Port Facility Security

JSA Job Safety Analysis

KP Kilometre Point

KPIs Key performance indicators

LAC Larrakia Advisory Committee

LAT Lowest astronomical tide

MARPOL International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution From Ships, 1973 as modified by the Protocol of 1978

MBO Monosulfidic Black Oozes

MDR Master Documentation Register

MFO Marine Fauna Observer

MIC Microbial Induced Corrosion

MMPE Monterey Miami Parabolic Equation

MQGs [Company] Marine Quarantine Guidelines

MSL Mean Sea Level

NAHMP Heritage Management Plan: Heritage Sites (Aboriginal and WWII) in the onshore development area and sacred sites in Darwin Harbour

NEPC National Environment Protection Council

NEPM National Environment Protection Measure


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

NMP Noise Management Plan

NOPSEMA National Offshore Petroleum Safety and Environmental Management Authority

NRETAS Department of Natural Resources, Environment, The Arts and Sport

NSR Noise Sensitive Receptor

NT Northern Territory

NT EPA NT Environment Protection Authority

OCNS Offshore Chemical Notification Scheme

OHS Occupational Health and Safety

OSCP Oil Spill Contingency Plan

OSPAR Oslo/Paris convention (for the Protection of the Marine Environment of the North-East Atlantic)

PASS Potential acid sulfate soils

PEAR People, Environment, Assets and Reputation

PEP Project Environmental Plan

PLONOR Pose Little Or No Risk to the Environment

PNEC Predicted no effect concentrations

PPE Personal protective equipment

ppm Parts per million

PRT Pipeline recovery tool

PTS Permanent Threshold Shift

QA Quality Assurance

QASSIT Queensland Acid Sulfate Soils Investigation Team

QC Quality Control

RL Reduced Levels

RLOF Rock load out facility

RO Reverse osmosis


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

RWA Restricted Work Areas

SCR Chromium Reducible Sulfur

SDS Safety data sheet

SEL Sound Pressure Level

SIMP Social Impact Management Plan

SOPEP Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan

SOW Scope of works

SPU Solid Polyurethane

SSDV Side stone dumping vessel

SWMS Safe Work Method Statement

TARP Trigger, Action and Response Plan

TMS Tug Management System

TPWC Act Territory Parks and Wildlife Conservation Act

TSS Total Suspended Solids

TTS Temporary Threshold Shift

UPNG Underwater Piling Noise Guideline

VRA Vessel risk assessment

VRASS Vessel risk assessment score sheet

WDL Waste Discharge Licence

WMPC Waste Management and Pollution Control Regulations (NT)

WONS Weeds of National Significance


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

2 REFERENCES

This section provides a list of references used within this CEMP. The references are grouped as to whether they are Company, Contractor or subcontractor documents; codes, guidelines or standards; or approval documents.

2.1 COMPANY DOCUMENTS

No. Document No. Document Title Rev

A1. C075-AH-REP-0006 Draft Environmental Impact Statement 0

A2. C075-AH-REP-0008 Supplement to Environmental Impact Statement 1

A3. C025-AG-PLN-0010 Heritage Management Plan: Heritage Sites (Aboriginal and WWII) in the onshore development area and sacred sites in Darwin Harbour

4

A4. C025-AG-PLN- 0029 Non-Aboriginal Heritage Management Plan: Nearshore Development Area

1

A5. C075-AH-STD-0020 Quarantine (Environmental) Management Standard 0

A6. C075-AH-PRC-0029 Marine Megafauna Interaction and Observation Procedure

1

A7. C075-AH-GLN-0016 Marine Quarantine Guidelines 0

A8. C075-AH-PLN-0007 Nearshore Construction Oil Spill Contingency Plan 7

A9. L025-AG-PLN-00003 GEP Construction - Stakeholder Engagement Plan 0

A10. C075-AH-PRC-0006 Incident Reporting, recording and investigation procedure.

0A

2.2 CONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS


B1. F281-AH-PLN-10008 Project Environmental Plan 0

B2. F281-AH-PLN-10014 Offshore Environment Plan C

B3. F281-AH-LIS-10002 Environmental Compliance Register 0

B4. F281-AH-REP-10024 Nearshore Acid Sulfate Soil Investigation Report 0

B5. F281-AH-PLN-0012 Onshore/Nearshore Emergency Response Plan A

B6. STD-COR-HSEC-019-E E&C Construction Vessels Pollution Control and Waste Management

1

B7. STD-COR-HSEC-009-E E&C Construction Vessels Control of Substances Hazardous to Health

1

B8. N/A Ecological Screening Criteria – Potential Glutaraldehyde Release from Ichthys GEP

-

B9. N/A Darwin Harbour Discharge Plume Dispersion Analysis

-

B10. J0229 Darwin Harbour Discharge Far-field Modelling Results

1

B11. F281-AH-PRC-0001 Health, Safety, Security and Environment Reporting Procedure

0


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


B12. F281-AH-PRC-0003 Accident / Incident Report Procedure 1

B13. F281-AH-PLN-0015 Critical Weather Event Plan 0

B14. F281-AH-PRC-0005 HSE Induction and Training Procedure 0

B15. F281-AH-PLN-10012 Oil Spill Contingency Plan - Nearshore C

B16. F281-AV-PRC-0076 Landfall Preparation and Temporary Works Procedure

B1

2.3 SUBCONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS


C1. F281-AH-PLN-10009 Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan 3

C2. N/A Ichthys EO377 Gas Export Pipeline ‘Detailed’ Erosion Sediment Control Plan

0

C3. F281-AH-PLN-10035 Acid Sulfate Soils Management Plan 0

C4. F281-AH-PLN-10037 Noise Management Plan GEP Shore Approach 0

2.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

No. Authority Document Title

D1. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 14001: 2004: Environmental Management Systems - Specification with Guidance for Use

D2. Department of Lands, Planning and Environment

Northern Territory Planning Scheme, Zoning Maps (Darwin Region, August 2013)

D3. International Erosion Control Association

Best Practice Erosion and Sediment Control (2008)

D4. Queensland Acid Sulfate Soils Investigation Team (QASSIT)

Queensland Acid Sulfate Soil Technical Manual

D5. Standards Australia and New Zealand Committee

Australian Standard AS/NZS ISO 31000:2009, Risk management—Principles and guidelines

D6. Standards Australia and New Zealand Committee

Risk Management Guidelines – Companion to AS/NZS 4360:2004

D7. Department of Natural Resources, Environment, The Arts and Sport

Land clearing guidelines (2010)


Water quality objectives for the Darwin Harbour Region – Background Document

D9. Department of Environment and Conservation, Queensland

Treatment and management of soils and water in acid sulfate soil landscapes

D10. Australian and New Zealand Environment and Conservation Council

Australian and New Zealand guidelines for fresh and marine water guidelines

D11. NT EPA Noise guidelines for development sites in the Northern Territory (2013)


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


D12. Department of Primary Industries and Fisheries

The Northern Territory Plant Health Manual (2012)


Northern Territory Weed Management Handbook (2009)

D14. Department of Health Personal protection from mosquitoes & biting midges in the NT (2011)

D15. Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities (DSEWPaC)

Australian National Guidelines for Whale and Dolphin Watching 2005

D16. Food Standards Australia New Zealand

Australia New Zealand Food Standards Code

D17. Australian Quarantine and Inspection Service (AQIS)

National Seaports Program: Australian ballast water management requirements—Version 5 – November 2011.

D18. Department of Agriculture, Fisheries and Forestry (DAFF)

The National System for the prevention and management of marine pest incursions (2011)

D19. Sunshine Coast Regional Council

Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control version 1.2, November 2008

D20. QASSIT Guidelines for Sampling and Analysis of Lowland Acid Sulfate Soils (ASS) in Queensland (1998)

D21. British Standards Institute British Standard (BS) 5228- 2:2009 Code of practice for noise and vibration control on construction and open sites – Part 1: Noise, Part 2: Vibration.

D22. ISO International Standard ISO9613-2 (First Edition 1996-12-15) Acoustics – Attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors. Part 2: General method of calculation.

2.5 APPROVAL DOCUMENTS


E1 Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities

Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 - Approval Decision EPBC 2008/420

E2 Department of Land, Planning and Environment (DLPE)

NT Environmental Assessment Act 1994 - Assessment Report 65


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

2.6 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

No. Reference

F1. BOM, Climate averages for Darwin, Bureau of Meteorology, www.bom.gov.au

F2. BOM, Tropical cyclones, Bureau of Meteorology, www.bom. gov.au

F3. Brocklehurst, P. And Edmeades, B. 1996. The mangrove communities of Darwin Harbour. Technical Memorandum No. R96/9. Resource Capability Assessment Branch, Department of Lands, Planning and Environment, Darwin, Northern Territory.

F4. DEWHA 2009, Channel Island Reefs, Australian Heritage Database, Department of the Environment, Water, Heritage and the Arts, Canberra, ACT

F5. Moein Bartol, S, Musick, JA 2003, ‘Sensory biology of sea turtles’. In: Lutz, PL, Musick, JA, Wyneken, J (eds), Biology of sea turtles, Vol II. CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, p 79–102

F6. Jensen, F, Bejder, L, Wahlberg, M, Aguilar Soto, N, Johnson, M, Madsen, P 2009. Vessel noise effects on delphinid communication. Marine Ecology Progress Series 395, 161-175.

F7. Department of Lands, Planning and the Environment 2012, Heritage Register: search for sites web page. Department of Natural Resources, Environment, the Arts and Sport, Darwin, Northern Territory. Viewed online on 9 October 2012 at <http://www.ntlis.nt.gov.au/heritageregister/f?p=103:300:190635973233150>.

F8. Central Dredging Association (CEDA). 2011. Underwater sound in relation to dredging. CEDA Position Paper 7 November 2011. Central Dredging Association, Delft, The Netherlands. Available <https://docs.google.com/viewer?a=v&q=cache:O_1kmCsen9oJ:www.dredging.org/documents/ceda/ht ml_page/2011-11_ceda_positionpaper_underwatersound_v2.pdf>.

F9. Department of Land Resource Management 2013. Water Quality Protection Plan for Darwin Harbour. Available at: http://lrm.nt.gov.au/water/dhac/quality (accessed 26 August 2013)

F10. M.L. Tasker, M. Amundin, M. Andre, A. Hawkins, W. Lang, T. Merck, A. Scholik-Schlomer, J. Teilmann, F. Thomsen, S. Werner & M. Zakharia (2010) Underwater noise and other forms of energy, MARINE STRATEGY FRAMEWORK DIRECTIVE Task Group 11 Report. International council for exploration at sea.

F11. Southall, B.L., Bowles, A.E., Ellison, W.T., Finneran, J.J., Gentry, R.L., Greene Jr, C.R., Kastak, D., Ketten, D.R., Miller, J.H., Nachtingall, P.E., Richardson, W.J., Thomas, J.A. & Tyack, P.L. 2007, Marine Mammal Noise Exposure Criteria: Initial Scientific Recommendations. Aquatic Mammals 33: 411–509.

F12. Hastings, M.C. and Popper, A.N. 2005. Effects of sound on fish. Report prepared for Jones and Stokes, Sacramento, California, USA. Viewed online on 9 November 2012 at <http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/env/bio/files/Effects_of_Sound_on_Fish23Aug05.pdf>.

F13. Whiting, S.D. 2003. Marine mammals and marine reptiles of Darwin Harbour. pp 67–73 in Darwin Harbour Region: current knowledge and future needs. Proceedings of public presentations hosted by the Darwin Harbour Advisory Committee at the Northern Territory University, Darwin, on 11, 19 and 26 February 2003. Department of Infrastructure, Planning and Environment, Darwin, Northern Territory.

F14. Cardno. 2013. Routine Turtle and Dugong Monitoring Program Report- Dredging Report 2. Ichthys Nearshore Environmental Monitoring Program. Prepared for INPEX. L384-AW-REP10246

F15. Metcalfe, K. 2008. INPEX LNG Project – Blaydin Point, Darwin. Rehabilitation of Mangroves Field Report June 2008, Prepared for INPEX Corporation Perth Ofccie and URS.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

3 SCOPE OF WORK

This Chapter outlines the construction activities to be completed and the types of equipment required (Section 3.1), an indicative schedule for the construction activities (Section 3.2) and further detail on methodologies for more complex construction activities (Sections 3.3 to 3.5). An indicative site layout is provided in Section 3.3.

3.1 OVERVIEW OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

The construction activities, relevant to this environmental management plan, to be undertaken by Contractor are detailed in Table 3-1 (onshore) and Table 3-2 (nearshore). Contractor has subcontracted the shore approach work, including pipe pull, rock armour supply and installation to a subcontractor.

A range of equipment will be utilised to complete Contractor SOW including civil works equipment, pipe pull equipment and rock installation equipment. An indicative equipment list, including marine vessels, is summarised in Table 3-3. Full specifications of the main construction vessels are given in Appendix A.

Table 3-1 Onshore construction activities at Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach site

Activity Description

1. Onshore – Middle Arm

Shore Approach Work (to be undertaken by subcontractor)

1.1. Vegetation clearance and site stabilisation

The vegetation units to be removed are eucalyptus woodlands (~5.5 ha) and mangroves (~2.5 ha). The site layout is shown in Figure 3-3. The vegetation will be mulched and stockpiled for reuse where possible. If vegetation cannot be reused (e.g., it has a risk of containing weed plants or seeds, or is too bulky to be mulched) it will be disposed of offsite by a licensed contractor. The site will be stabilised by covering the cleared area with geotextile and imported gravel that will be compacted to design requirements.

1.2. Temporary centreline access track

An unsealed temporary centreline access track will be constructed (as shown in Figure 3-3). The road will be made of (imported and quarantine-compliant) granular material on top of a geotextile layer.

1.3. Beach valve access road (woodland)

An unsealed temporary access road (from Wickham Point Road) will be made of (imported and quarantine-compliant) granular material on top of a geotextile layer (as shown in Figure 3-3). The beach valve access road will constructed to be a maximum of 8 m in width and thickness will be approximately 0.3 – 1.5 m with a minimum level of HAT over the entire length. Dimensions are dependent final engineering and location.

1.4. Temporary intertidal work road (intertidal area)

An unsealed temporary access road will be constructed along the trench route in the salt flat and mangrove area (as shown in Figure 3-3). At the salt flat and the inner section of the mangrove area, the work road will consists of filter rock bed on top of a geo-textile layer. At the section of the mangrove area closest to Darwin Harbour water edge, the work road will be constructed between two rows of sheet piles in order to allow for working at higher tides. The temporary intertidal access road will be a maximum of 8 m in width and thickness will be approximately 0.3 – 1.5 m with a minimum level of HAT over the entire length. Dimensions are dependent final engineering and location.

1.5. Sheet piling installation (Cofferdam)

Two rows sheet piles will be installed in the western most section of the trench within the mangrove area in preparation for excavation of the trench. The sheet piles will be installed over a distance of approximately 500 m with a separation of 5 m. A third and fourth row of sheet piles (approximately 200 m) will also be installed and used to facilitate construction of the temporary intertidal work road adjacent to the cofferdam. Further detail on the trenching methodology is provided in Section 3.4.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320



1.6. Temporary facilities installation

The on-site facilities will include:

site surfacing works (refer to Figure 3-3 which details the location and size of sealed areas)

cyclone-rated office buildings

material laydown and storage areas

temporary power generation area (generator sets)

lighting towers

bunded diesel fuel station

workshop

car parks

temporary site welfare facilities including holding tanks or temporary transportable toilets

stormwater management facilities (pipes and drainage ditches)

fencing and gates.

1.7. Installation of linear winch and pulling wire reels

The linear winch will be installed on a concrete slab laid on top of flattened soil. Ground anchors will be buried approximately 25 – 50 m behind the linear winch and connected to the winch by slings. On top of the ground anchors an artificial hill will be constructed with top soil or soil material sourced locally. This hill will provide sufficient counter weight for the reaction forces required to operate the winch. Reels containing the pulling wire will be installed and the pulling wire fed into the linear winch in preparation for the shore pull operation.

1.8. Excavation of onshore trench at pipeline shore approach

The onshore trench will be approximately 1 km long and require excavation of approximately 32 000 m3. A cofferdam will be installed in approximately the last 500 m of the trench closest to the harbour waters. The remaining 500 m of the trench will be excavated using open trenching. These two methodologies (and their locations) are explained in more detail in Section 3.4.

1.9. Excavated material management

The excavated material (approximately 32 000 m3) will be temporarily stored onshore and later used as trench backfill material. Excess material not used for backfilling will be disposed of at an onshore waste facility by a licensed contractor.

All material will be tested for Acid Sulfate Soils (ASS) during excavation. If material identified as ASS, the material will be treated until neutralised. Maximum liming rates will be acquired from Nearshore the ASS investigation report [Ref B4] If the material is identified as non-ASS it will be transferred to the storage area without treatment. The management of excavated material (including material identified as ASS) is further detailed in Section 8.1.5.

1.10. Installation of a bedding layer within the trench (to be confirmed)

Subject to final trench design and shore pull requirements a rock bedding layer on the trench bottom may be installed. The material for the bedding layer will be sourced from local suppliers and be quarantine compliant.

1.11. Pulling wire deployment

The pipeline pulling wire will be deployed from the shore approach site to Semac-1 shore pull location using a support vessel and laid on the sea bed in preparation for the arrival of the Semac - 1.

1.12. Shore pull operations

The pipeline pulling wire will be recovered by Semac-1 and attached to the pipeline head assembly in preparation for commencement of shore pull operations. Approximately 3 km of the GEP will be pulled from the Semac-1 that will be located approximately 2 km offshore, to the beach valve location, using the onshore pulling winch.

Immediately after the shore pull operation, 35 air-filled buoyancy tanks equally spread along the pipeline, will be removed. Once recovered, the buoyancy tanks will be transported onshore.

1.13. Backfilling of onshore trench

Filter rock will be installed on top of the GEP after the pipe pull has been completed. Subsequently the trench will be backfilled with the intertidal road material and capped with the treated excavated material.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320



1.14. Mid-stage demobilisation

All temporary facilities associated with the shore approach work will be removed. This includes:

removal of the cofferdam, which consists of the removal of the support beams and extraction of the sheet piles. This includes the removal of the sheet piles utilised for the construction of the work road adjacent to the cofferdam

dismantling of winch spread and back anchor

removal of temporary work roads in mangrove area and salt flats

removal of temporary facilities and ASS treatment pad

restoration of the natural contour of the ground

removal of any surplus material including excess filter rock material

demobilisation of all plant and equipment

removal of all site facilities including offices, sewage tanks, lighting, fencing, signage, etc.

The temporary beach valve access road and laydown areas, and surface water drainage system will remain.

1.15. Reinstatement and rehabilitation of mangrove area

Areas not required for further GEP or Company activities, such as the mangrove area, will undergo rehabilitation works.

Wet Buckle Standby (Mobilisation of equipment is required as a stand-by measure, as described in Section 8.2.10)

1.16. Mobilisation of temporary facilities

The following temporary facilities will be installed:

cyclone-rated office buildings

temporary contained diesel power generators

workshop

lighting towers

temporary site welfare facilities including holding tanks or temporary transportable toilets.

1.17. Mobilisation of pipeline dewatering and chemical passivation spread

The mobilisation of the pipeline dewatering and chemical passivation spread will be staged in line with pipeline installation work and will comprise installation of:

up to 16 air compressors and up to 4 air dryers

removal of pulling head and installation of a temporary pig launcher

chemical receiving and injection system

contained diesel fuel storage and distribution system

new and used contained oil storage facilities

up to 6 break tanks

up to 4 water pumps

up to 4 silencer air vents

storage containers.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320



1.18. Pipeline dewatering and passivation – onshore end

CONTINGENCY ACTIVITY (if a wet buckle occurs)

In the event of a wet buckle occurring during pipeline construction the dewatering and passivation spread will be operated to facilitate pipeline dewatering. This will require:

launching of two pigs

receiving freshwater for pipeline injection by truck delivery

receiving chemicals (stored offsite) for pipeline injection by truck delivery

receiving and storing diesel fuel for compressor operation

Approximately 200 m3 of chemically treated freshwater is batched between the two pigs and propelled down the pipeline with compressed air to dewater and passivate the pipeline.

Chemical dosing is a function of the location of the wet buckle location. If a wet buckle occurred at the NT three nautical mile boundary the maximum quantity of chemicals used would be :

Biocide – approximately 30 L of biocide chemical containing approximately 7 L of active glutaraldehyde.

Corrosion inhibitor – approximately 60 L of corrosion inhibitor containing approximately 25 L of active chemical.

Further detail on the wet buckle discharge (contingency only) is provided in Section 8.2.10.

Once the chemically treated fresh water has been released (refer to activity 1.20), a volume (dependent on the location of the wet buckle) of pressurized air will be released at the onshore end to return the pipeline to atmospheric pressure.

1.19. Pipeline dewatering and passivation – marine end

CONTINGENCY ACTIVITY (if a wet buckle occurs within NT waters)

The pipeline is cut underwater at the wet buckle location using a special remotely controlled cutting tool. A Pipeline Recovery Tool (PRT) is fixed to the end of the pipeline at the buckle location. The pipeline is then dewatered by injection of chemically treated freshwater between the pigs, at the onshore end, followed by the injection of compressed air.

The pipeline is depressurised (refer to activity 1.19) and then recovered by the Semac-1 and pipeline installation is re-commenced

1.20. Final stage demobilisation

All facilities and equipment from the wet buckle standby spread will be removed from site. The beach valve access road and temporary laydown areas will remain for the next contractors.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 3-2 Nearshore construction activities


1. Nearshore

Installation of concrete mats for cable crossing

1.21. Installation of concrete mats

The GEP route crosses the power / telecommunications cable corridor within Darwin Harbour (shown in Figure 1-3). The fours crossing locations (identified by survey) will be prepared in advance using concrete mats that will elevate the GEP as it crosses the cables. The cable crossing activities will include:

use of the survey/construction support vessel to be used for concrete mats installation

installation of the concrete mats on the seabed by crane, prior to pipelay commencing

surveying to confirm correct installation

Refer to Section 3.5 for further detail on concrete mat installation.

Pipelay

1.22. Mobilisation This activity includes mobilisation of:

the semisubmersible pipelay barge (Semac-1) from overseas to Darwin

anchor handling tugs (AHTs) from Australia or overseas

supply and survey/construction support vessels from overseas or Australian location

Side stone dumping vessel (SSDV) from an overseas location.

1.23. Receiving and transfer of linepipe

Linepipe will be shipped from South-east Asia using cargo barges towed by towing tugs.

Linepipe will be transferred from the cargo barges directly to Semac-1 using cranes. (No linepipe will be landed onshore.)

1.24. Laying of pipeline including anchor handling

Approximately 35 km of pipeline will be laid within Darwin Harbour and approximately 85 km outside Darwin Harbour. Linepipe sections will be welded together, inspected and a field joint coating applied in a continuous process on board the Semac-1, prior to being lowered into position on the seabed. There are two types of infill materials; HD Polyurethane (HDPU) and Solid Polyurethane (SPU). The HDPU material will be supplied as two separate components; formulated polyol-component and Isocyanate (B-component).

The Semac-1 has a 12 point mooring system that allows the barge to maintain position and move (pull itself) forward. Each anchor will be periodically moved using one of three dedicated AHTs during pipelay operations. The AHTs will move into a pre-determined and approved position and the anchor placed in the intended location.

1.25. Installation of rock armouring

Following the installation of the pipeline, approximately 17 km of the pipeline will be covered with rock armour in the nearshore area. Approximately 780 000 tonnes of rock will be loaded onto the SSDV at the rock load out facility at East Arm Wharf and the SSDV will transport the rock from East Arm Wharf to the pipeline. The SSDV accurately positions itself over the pipeline, using dynamic positioning, and the rock is released over the side of the vessel using hydraulic machinery (Appendix A).

1.26. Survey activities All surveys will be carried out along pre-determined lines, and include:

Pre-dredge / backfill survey - to establish the starting point prior to any dredging / backfilling operations. The pre-survey will consist, at a minimum, of a longitudinal survey along the centreline of the pipeline route.

Intermediate surveys - to monitor pipeline installation progress and ensure that the required alignment, levels and limit adherence is being maintained. The frequency of these surveys is dependent on rate of progress and accuracy levels required.

Post-dredge / backfill survey - to ascertain that the required alignment, levels and limits have been achieved. This survey is undertaken along the same lines as were used for the pre-dredge / backfill survey.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 3-3 Equipment list for the construction activities

Area Construction activity type Typical Construction Equipment

Onshore – Middle Arm

Shore crossing works Excavators.

Front End Loaders.

Dump trucks.

Bulldozer.

Watercart.

Roller / compactor.

Crawler crane or excavator with vibrating and impact hammer.

Crane.

Trucks.

Chippers / mulchers.

Small hand power tools such as chainsaw.

Shore pull operations Support vessel.

Linear winch and hold anchor.

Wire reels.

Wet buckle spread Forklifts.

Cranes.

Trucks.

Nearshore Installation of cable crossing, pipelay and rock installation

Semac-1 (semi-submersible pipelay barge).

AHTs.

Survey vessel.

Support vessels.

Cargo barges.

Towing tugs.

SSDV.

3.2 SCHEDULE

Indicative schedules are shown for the construction activities in Figure 3-1 (onshore) and Figure 3-2 (nearshore). The schedule may be subject to change, for example if approvals were provided sooner than anticipated or should the construction progress fall significantly behind plan.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 3-1 Indicative schedule for onshore construction activities

Figure 3-2 Indicative schedule for nearshore construction activities

3.3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

Site plans for the shore approach work (activity 1, Table 3-1) and the wet buckle phase (activities 2, Table 3-1) is provided in Figure 3-3. Although the full set of equipment for each phase of the wet buckle contingency will not be present on site at the same time, the lay-out present the overall location.

Construction Environmental Management Plan Icthys Project - Gas Export Pipeline EPCI Contract

F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 3-3 Middle Arm Peninsula – Indicative shore approach site layout


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

3.4 ONSHORE TRENCHING METHODOLOGIES

The GEP distance is measured in Kilometre Points (KPs) from the offshore end in the Ichthys field (KP 0) to the onshore beach valve location at the shore crossing in Darwin Harbour (KP 881).

The onshore trench will be excavated over a length of approximately 1000 m from KP 879.7 to KP 880.7 (Figure 3-4). Approximately 32 000 m3 of soil will be removed.

The following methodologies will be used to excavate the onshore trench:

open trenching (from KP 880.2 up to KP 880.7)

cofferdam (from KP 879.7 up to KP 880.2).

The location for these different methodologies is shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Overview of onshore trenching methodology

3.4.1.1 Open trenching

Across the salt flat area to the landward edge of the mangrove fringe, an open trench will be constructed using land-based excavators. The trench will have a maximum depth of 4.0 m and a bottom width of 5 m. The slopes of the trench will vary between 1:1 and 1:3.5, depending on the soil conditions (Figure 3-5). Besides the trench route a work road will be constructed to support land based excavation equipment.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 3-5 Cross section of the trench profile in the salt flat area

3.4.1.2 Cofferdam

A cofferdam is a temporary enclosed construction consisting of two parallel rows of sheet-piles. The material between the sheet-piles can be excavated with minimal risk of the trench wall collapsing. This method reduces the amount of material to be excavated and reduces the risk of the trench wall being eroded. The width of the trench will be approximately 5 m, with a maximum depth of approximately 3.0 m.

The temporary intertidal work road will be constructed along the cofferdam in the mangrove zone and will continue in the salt flat area (activity 1.3 in Table 3-1). The (combined) temporary intertidal work road is shown in Figure 3-4. For the 200 m closest to the water edge, a third and fourth row of sheet-piles will be installed along the cofferdam to support the work road (Figure 3-6).

The cofferdam will be installed using a vibrating hammer and when required, an impact hammer attached to a crawler crane or excavator. The hammer will drive the sheet piles into the mangrove mud and the firmer granular layer below. Struts will be installed between the sheet-piles to provide additional support to the construction (Figure 3-6). The material between the sheet piles will be excavated to the required level with an excavator. Figure 3-7 shows the general arrangement of the GEP cofferdam at the seaward end (cofferdam sheet piles depicted in red).

Sheet piling activities will be conducted on a continuous basis. While vibro hammering will be conducted at any time, with impact hammering only to be undertaken in dry conditions or during daylight hours when the water level is below mean sea level (MSL) as described in Section 8.2.4.

For sheet piling using the vibration hammering one sheet pile is hammered in approximately every 15 minutes, this comprises 5 minutes for sheet piling and 10 minutes for handling and moving the hammer to the next sheet pile. It is proposed that two vibro piling units will be operating concurrently to install the cofferdam. As the impact will only be used as a contingency its use will be dependent on the effectiveness of the vibro hammer. Any use of the impact hammer will be in relatively short bursts, typically less than one minute, with the majority of time spent repositioning the hammer.

Following completion of the excavation and pipeline installation, sheet piles will be removed as the backfilling of the trench progresses and transferred to the ASS treatment and storage pad. Sheet piles will be cleaned inside the treatment pad and waste water will be contained within the Retention Basin. As described in Chapters 8 and 9, water within the retention basin will be tested and, if required, treated prior to discharge.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 3-6 Cofferdam structure overview with two sheet-piles (left side) and with a two additional sheet-piles to provide stability to the temporary work road (right side)

Figure 3-7 General arrangement of GEP cofferdam at the seaward end

3.4.1.3 Tidal inundation

An overview of the trench location in relation to tidal height is provided in Figure 3-7. A tidal assessment has been performed using predicted tidal levels between 1st of January and 1st of May 2014. At four locations along the trench at the shore approach: seaward edge of mangroves, salt flat edge of mangroves, mid salt flat and landward edge of salt flat (Figure 3-9). The maximum tidal water level per day in the trench has been calculated as shown in Table 3-4. The entire trench bottom is flooded on a daily basis and approximately 80% of trench profile will be inundated on a weekly basis. Figure 3-10 shows the frequency that the trench base is inundated with tidal waters.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 3-8 Predicted tidal heights within the trench. The bedrock, trench profile and seabed levels are indicative only. The black box (KP 879.7 to 880.2) indicates where the cofferdam will be installed.

Figure 3-9 Location of KP reference points along the trench


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 3-4 Summary of tidal inundation expected within the trench

Location Before excavation After excavation

KP 879.7 Seabed located at +2.7 m LAT

Daily tidal inundation.

Water covering this section between 65% and 100% of the time each day.

Maximum water depth between 2 m and 5 m above tidal flat.

Bottom trench located at +0.2 m LAT Daily tidal inundation of full trench profile.

Water covering the full trench profile twice a day.

Maximum water depth between 4.5 m and 7.5 m above trench bottom.

KP 880.2 Seabed located at +6.7 m LAT.

Weekly tidal inundation.



Bottom trench located at +4.0 m LAT.


Water covering the trench base between 40% and 50% of the time each day.

Maximum water depth between 0.5 m and 3.7 m above trench bottom.

KP 880.4 Seabed located at +7.3 m LAT.

Two weekly tidal inundation.





Water covering the trench base between 10% and 45% of the time each day.

Maximum water depth between 0.2 and 3.2 m above trench base.

KP 880.6 Seabed located +7.4 m LAT.

Monthly tidal inundation.

Water covering the tidal flat between 0% and 10% of the time each day.

Maximum water depth between 0 m and 0.8 m above tidal flat.


Near daily tidal inundation of trench base (never longer than 1 day of no inundation.

Weekly inundation of approximately 80% of trench profile.

Water covering the tidal flat between 0% and 40% of the time each day.

Maximum water depth between 0 and 4.5 m above trench base.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 3-10 Water level assessment along the shore approach trench based on predicted tidal levels at Darwin Harbour. The blue dots indicate the percentage of time per day this location is in the water.

The red dots indicate the maximum water levels per day.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

1‐1‐2014 31‐1‐2014 2‐3‐2014 1‐4‐2014 1‐5‐2014 31‐5‐2014 30‐6‐2014

Water level in trench [m]

Percentage

%

Date

Seaward side of cofferdam before trench excavation (KP879.8)

% of day seabed inundated Max water level above seabed / day

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

1‐1‐2014 31‐1‐2014 2‐3‐2014 1‐4‐2014 1‐5‐2014 31‐5‐2014 30‐6‐2014


Percentage

%

Date

Seaward side ofcofferdam after trench excavation (KP879.8)

% of day trench base inundated Max water level above trench base / day

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

1‐1‐2014 31‐1‐2014 2‐3‐2014 1‐4‐2014 1‐5‐2014 31‐5‐2014 30‐6‐2014


Percentage

%

Date

Landward side of cofferdam before trench excavation (KP880.2)


0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

1‐1‐2014 31‐1‐2014 2‐3‐2014 1‐4‐2014 1‐5‐2014 31‐5‐2014 30‐6‐2014


Percentage

%

Date

Mid salt flat before trench excavation (KP880.4)


0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

1‐1‐2014 31‐1‐2014 2‐3‐2014 1‐4‐2014 1‐5‐2014 31‐5‐2014 30‐6‐2014


Percentage

%

Date

Mid salt flat after trench excavation (KP880.4)

% of day trench base inundated Max water level above trench base / day

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

1‐1‐2014 31‐1‐2014 2‐3‐2014 1‐4‐2014 1‐5‐2014 31‐5‐2014 30‐6‐2014


Percentage

%

Date

Landward side of salt flat before trench excavation (KP880.6)



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

3.5 CABLE CROSSING CONSTRUCTION

The eight concrete mats will be installed in water depths between 20 m and 24 m using a suitable vessel prior to the laying of the GEP. The mat dimensions and locations are designed to achieve minimum vertical clearance between bottom of the GEP and the top of existing cable with consideration of sliding stability and potential scouring effects.

The design and size of the mats is shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-11 Schematic of GEP cable crossing

Figure 3-12 Schematic view of two layers of concrete mattress


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

4 OBLIGATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

4.1 ICHTHYS PROJECT APPROVALS

The Ichthys Project initially underwent a formal environmental assessment with the Draft EIS [Ref A1] being assessed by the Australian Commonwealth Government under the EPBC Act and by the Northern Territory government under the NT EA Act. The Draft EIS described the Ichthys Project’s potential environmental, social and economic impacts and the approach that Company plans to take to manage these.

A public consultation review process was undertaken during this assessment period. The EIS Supplement [Ref A2] was subsequently drafted responding to all submissions received. The EIS Supplement also includes a number of additional technical studies that were undertaken to enhance the understanding of the environments in which the Ichthys Project will be operating.

The “Final EIS”, consisting of the Draft EIS and the EIS Supplement, was submitted to the Commonwealth and Northern Territory Governments in April 2011 for assessment.

The NT Department of Natural NRETAS issued an environmental assessment report and recommendations (Assessment Report 65) for the Project on 17 May 2011 [Ref E2]. Commonwealth approval was granted by the Commonwealth Minister for DoE (formerly DSEWPaC) on 27 June 2011 [Ref E1].

4.1.1 Commonwealth Environmental Approval

Commonwealth Government Approval Decision EPBC 2008/4208 was accompanied by 18 ministerial conditions which require the development of management plans to minimise impacts on listed threatened species and communities, listed migratory species, and commonwealth marine areas [Ref E1]. These conditions are to be addressed in plans specific to the Condition and submitted to DoE for approval prior to commencement of works.

4.1.2 Northern Territory Environmental Assessment Decision

The Assessment Report 65 [Ref E2] documents the findings of the environmental assessment completed under the EA Act, and includes 24 recommendations. All NRETAS recommendations applicable to GEP SOW have been detailed in the Environmental Compliance Register [Ref B3].

4.1.3 Aboriginal Areas Protection Authority Certificates

An Aboriginal Areas Protection Authority (AAPA) certificates protect sacred sites from damage due to nearby works, and sets out conditions for using or carrying out work on land, sea or near sacred sites across the Northern Territory. It is administered under the Northern Territory Aboriginal Sacred Sites Act 1989, by the AAPA.

The following AAPA authority certificates are applicable to the GEP Works:

AAPA Authority Certificate C2013/177: The 1000 m construction corridor in Darwin Harbour needs to be increased to accommodate the revised pipeline anchor corridor, which is 1300 m at its narrowest and 2700 m at the cable crossings. The corridor allows space for the pipelay barge anchors and support vessel movements, it also allows for flexibility to modify the pipeline route around any obstructions.

Note: The construction corridor area has now been increased in accordance with AAPA Authority Certificate C2013/177.

AAPA Authority Certificate C2011/166: For all works necessary to plan, develop, operate and maintain an industrial estate for gas-based industry, including but not limited to: various surveys (geotechnical – terrestrial and marine, flora and fauna – terrestrial and marine, air shed sampling, and monitoring, site surveying for leveling); planning general site layout and specific layout plans for industrial plants and associated structures; occupying the estate; site leveling to planned reduced levels (RL) involving cut and fill with local or imported material; land clearing, provision of roads, utilities and services to and


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

within the state; sea bed dredging and land reclamation; plant construction and provision of gantries, pipelines, belt conveyors, marine structures, etc., as required.

AAPA Authority Certificate C2112/046: For Environmental monitoring programmes involving one or more of the following general activities: soft bottom benthos monitoring, water quality and sedimentation, marine pest monitoring, fish and invertebrate monitoring.

4.1.4 Commonwealth

This CEMP has been developed to acknowledge Commonwealth approval conditions and will support any conditions that may be applied from key environmental approvals.

4.1.5 Northern Territory

This CEMP, and the subsequent issue of an Environment Protection Approval, is supported by other approvals, including:

Development Permit

Department of Mines and Energy "Consent to construct"

Fisheries Permit – Rock Installation

Waste Discharge License (WDL) for Semac-1 treated wastewater release (Issued to Contractor as a separate approval to the CEMP and therefore the activity associated with the discharge of treated wastewater is not included in the scope of this CEMP).

Conditions with these permits, where they are relevant to the environmental management of works covered under this CEMP, will be incorporated into future revisions of the CEMP.

4.2 LEGISLATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Key environmental legislative requirements governing GEP Works is described in the following sections.

4.2.1 Commonwealth

Commonwealth legislative requirements relevant to the GEP onshore and nearshore construction activities are presented in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Commonwealth legislation relevant to GEP construction

Commonwealth

Title Description

Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Heritage Protection Act 1984

The purposes of this Act are the preservation and protection from injury or desecration of areas and objects in Australia and in Australian waters, being areas and objects that are of particular significance to Aboriginals in accordance with Aboriginal tradition.

Aboriginal Land Rights (Northern Territory) Act 1976

Provides for the granting of traditional Aboriginal land in the Northern Territory for the benefit of the Aboriginal people.

Australian Heritage Council Act 2003

An Act to repeal and amend certain Acts as a consequence of the enactment of the Australian Heritage Council Act 2003, and for related purposes. The council maintains the National Heritage List and Commonwealth Heritage List.

Biosecurity Bill 2012 This bill (which reflects and replaces the Quarantine Act 1908) to: manage biosecurity risks, the risk of contagion of a listed human disease, the risk of listed human diseases entering Australian territory, risks related to ballast water, biosecurity emergencies and human biosecurity emergencies; and give effect to Australia’s international rights and obligations.

Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999

This Act provides a national framework for environmental and heritage protection. It focuses on protecting “matters of national environmental significance” including listed protected species and the Commonwealth marine environment.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Commonwealth

Title Description

Hazardous Waste (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act 1989

An Act to provide for the regulation of the export, import and transit of hazardous waste, and for related purposes.

Hazardous Waste (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Amendment Act 1996

An Act to amend the Hazardous Waste (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act 1989, and for related purposes. The object of this Act is to regulate the export, import and transit of hazardous waste to ensure that exported, imported or transited waste is managed in an environmentally sound manner, so that society and the environment, both within and outside Australia, are protected from the harmful effects of the waste.

Historic Shipwrecks Act 1976 An Act protecting historic wrecks, associated relics, and objects deposited on the seabed which are more than 75 years old and lie in Australian waters. For historically significant wrecks or articles and relics which are less than 75 years old the minister responsible for heritage matters may exercise his/her powers to declare such wrecks, articles or relics to be protected under the Act.

National Greenhouse and Energy Reporting Act 2007

This Act introduced a single national framework for the reporting and dissemination of information about greenhouse gas emissions, greenhouse gas projects, and energy use and production of corporations.

Navigation Act 2012 and Marine Safety National Law Bill 2012

The Navigation Act 2012 repeals the Navigation Act 1912. This Act relates to maritime safety and the prevention of pollution of the marine environment, and for related purposes.

The Navigation Act 2012 applies to all foreign flagged vessels, Marine Safety National Law is applicable to marine safety for domestic commercial vessels.

Native Title Act 1993 This Act aims to protect the native title rights of Indigenous people in relation to land or water and for related purposes.

Protection of the Sea (Harmful Anti-fouling Systems) Act 2006

An Act relating to the protection of the sea from the effects of harmful anti-fouling systems. It covers the application or use of harmful anti-fouling systems and the issue and endorsement of the required certificates and anti-fouling declarations.

Protection of the Sea (Prevention of Pollution from Ships) Act 1983

This Act relates to the prevention of pollution (in any form) from ships.

Quarantine Regulations 2000 An Act and its associated Regulations relating to quarantine, including the quarantine and quarantine procedures of vessels, persons and goods.

4.2.2 Northern Territory

Northern Territory legislative requirements relevant to the GEP onshore and nearshore construction activities are presented in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Northern Territory legislation relevant to GEP construction

Northern Territory

Title Description

Aboriginal Land Act This Act provides for access to Aboriginal land, certain roads bordered by Aboriginal land and the seas adjacent to Aboriginal land.

Northern Territory Aboriginal Sacred Sites Act 1989 and Northern Territory Aboriginal Sacred Sites Regulations

An Act and its associated Regulations to effect a practical balance between the recognised need to preserve and enhance Aboriginal cultural tradition in relation to certain land in the Northern Territory and the aspirations of the Aboriginal and all other peoples of the Northern Territory for their economic, cultural and social advancement.

Anti-Discrimination Act An Act to promote equality of opportunity in the Territory by protecting persons from unfair discrimination in certain areas of activity and from sexual harassment and certain associated objectionable conduct, to provide remedies for persons discriminated against and for related purposes.

Bushfires Act 1980 and Bushfires Regulations

An Act and its associated Regulations relating to the prevention and suppression of bushfires.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Northern Territory

Title Description

Crown Lands Act An Act responsible for managing Crown land and facilitating (development consented) land use for economic development.

Dangerous Goods Act An Act to provide for the safe storage, handling and transport of certain dangerous goods. The goods will be classified and need to be taken care of by specialised persons. This Act will be controlled by competent authorities.

Darwin Port Corporation Act An Act to provide for the establishment of the Darwin Port Corporation for the control and management of the Port of Darwin and for related purposes.

Environmental Offences and Penalties Act and Environmental Offences and Penalties Regulations

This Act and associated Regulations establishes penalties for certain offences under prescribed Acts (such as an environmental offence) and for related purposes.

Fisheries Act and Fisheries Regulations

An Act and its associated Regulations to provide for the regulation, conservation and management of fisheries and fishery resources so as to maintain their sustainable utilisation, to regulate the sale and processing of fish and aquatic life, and for related purposes.

Heritage Act 2011 This Act provides for the conservation of the Territory’s cultural and natural heritage.

Ichthys LNG Project Act 2008 An Act to facilitate the Ichthys LNG Project.

Litter Act An Act relating to litter. It includes the prescription that no person shall leave, throw, deposit or abandon litter in, on to or from a public place or land elsewhere than into authorised receptacles.

Marine Act and Marine (Pilotage) Regulations

An Act and its associated Regulations to protect the marine and coastal environment by minimising intentional and negligent discharges of pollutants (such as oil, garbage, sewage, etc.) from ships into coastal waters and for related purposes.

Marine Pollution Act and regulations

An act and its associated Regulations to protect the marine and coastal environment by minimising intentional and negligent discharges of pollutants (such as oil, garbage, sewage, etc) from ships into coastal waters and for related purposes.

Planning Act The Planning Act establishes the rules for land use planning and development in the Northern Territory.

Territory Parks and Wildlife Conservation Act

An Act to make provision for and in relation to the establishment of Territory parks and other parks and reserves and the study, protection, conservation and sustainable utilisation of wildlife.

Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail (National Uniform Legislation) Act

The object of this Act is to regulate the transport of dangerous goods on land in order to promote public safety and protect property and the environment.

Weeds Management Act 2001 The Weeds Management Act 2001 was enacted on 1 July 2001, replacing the former Noxious Weeds Ordinance 1962. The new Act was written to reflect greater responsibility for all land managers, and to ensure that landholders are responsible for and carrying out weed control on land that they manage.

Waste Management and Pollution Control Act 2009 and Waste Management and Pollution Control (Administration) Regulations

This Act and associated Regulations aim to enforce appropriate waste management practices and protection against pollution on the one hand and on the other, to provide the right tools and level of assistance for those wishing to adopt sustainable environmental practices. The Act protects and, where practicable, aims to restore and enhance the quality of NT environment. The Act facilitates the implementation of National Environment Protection Measure (NEPM) established by the National Environment Protection Council (NEPC).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Northern Territory

Title Description

Water Act This Act covers the investigation, use, control, protection, management and administration of water resources in the NT. The Act prohibits the release of certain restricted substances into watercourses.

Work Health and Safety (National Uniform Legislation) Act 2011 and Work Health and Safety (National Uniform Legislation) Implementation Act 2011

These Acts focus on achieving the highest possible standards of occupational health and safety to ensure the elimination of avoidable risks, and control and mitigation of unavoidable risks, to the health or safety of workers.

4.3 INTERNATIONAL

International conventions and guidelines relevant to this CEMP are presented in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 International conventions and guidelines relevant to GEP construction

International Conventions

Title Description

Convention on the Prevention of Marine Pollution by Dumping of Wastes and Other Matter, 1972, and the 1996 Protocol Thereto (the "London Convention")

An agreement to control pollution of the sea by dumping and to encourage regional agreements supplementary to the Convention. It covers the deliberate disposal at sea of wastes or other matter from vessels, aircraft, and platforms. It does not cover discharges from land-based sources such as pipes and outfalls, wastes generated incidental to normal operation of vessels, or placement of materials for purposes other than mere disposal, providing such disposal is not contrary to aims of the Convention.

International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78) and its Annex V (Prevention of Pollution by Garbage from Ships)

The MARPOL Convention is the main international convention covering the prevention of pollution of the marine environment by ships from operational or accidental causes. It covers the prevention of pollution by oil, chemicals, and harmful substances in packaged form, sewage and garbage. Annex V deals with different types of garbage and specifies the distances from land and the manner in which they may be disposed of. The requirements are much stricter in a number of “special areas” but perhaps the most important feature of the Annex is the complete ban imposed on the dumping into the sea of all forms of plastic.

International Convention for the Control and Management of Ships’ Ballast Water and Sediments

The Convention aims to prevent the potentially devastating effects of the spread of harmful aquatic organisms carried by ships’ ballast water from one region to another.

The Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals (the “Bonn Convention”)

The Bonn Convention aims to conserve terrestrial, aquatic and avian migratory species throughout their range. It is an intergovernmental treaty, concluded under the aegis of the United Nations Environment Programme, concerned with the conservation of wildlife and habitats on a global scale.

4.4 STANDARDS, CODES AND GUIDELINES

There are a number of Australian and International Standards and Codes of Practice and Guidelines that are applicable to the GEP Work. These have been identified below:

AS/NZS 4801 Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) Management

AS/NZS ISO 9001:2008, Quality management systems - Requirements

AS/NZS ISO 14001:2004, Environmental management system - Requirements with guidance for use

AS/NZS ISO 31000:2009, Risk management - Principles and guidelines


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

HB 203:2006 Environmental Risk Management - Principles and Process

International Maritime Organization (IMO) International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code

International Safety Management Code

International Ship and Port Facility Security (ISPS) Code

Guidelines for the Development of Garbage Management Plans for compliance with Regulation 9(2), Annex V of MARPOL

OHSAS 18001:2007 Occupational Health and Safety Assessment Series

International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance Standards on Social and Environmental Sustainability 2006

IFC EHS Guidelines for Liquefied Natural Gas Facilities 2007

IFC EHS Guidelines for Offshore Oil and Gas Development 2007

IFC EHS Guidelines for Ports, Harbours and Terminals 2007

IFC Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Onshore Oil and Gas Development 2007

IFC Environmental, Health, and Safety General Guidelines 2006

Australian Ballast Water Management Requirements 2001

Department of Agriculture, Fisheries and Forestry (DAFF) Offshore Installations Quarantine Guide

Australian Ballast Water Management Requirements 2001

Australian Petroleum Production & Exploration Association Ltd (APPEA) Code of Environmental Practice

Environmental Protection (National Pollutant Inventory) Objective 2004

Guidelines for Fresh and Marine Water Quality - Australia and New Zealand Environment Conservation Council (ANZECC) and Agriculture and Resource Management Council of Australia and New Zealand (ARMCANZ) 2000

National Strategy for Ecologically Sustainable Development (Commonwealth Government of Australia 1992)

National Water Quality Management Strategy (Commonwealth Government of Australia 1992)

Intergovernmental Agreement on the Environment (Commonwealth Government of Australia 1992)

National Strategy for Conservation of Australia’s Biological Diversity (Commonwealth)

Government of Australia 1996

Intergovernmental Agreement on a National System for the Prevention and Management of Marine Pest Incursions, April 2005

The Northern Territory Planning Scheme (DLPE)

The Framework for Marine and Estuarine Water Quality Protection (DoE, formerly DSEWPaC).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

5 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Contractor is fully committed to achieving the highest standard to environmental compliance within its business activities. This commitment is achieved through the implementation of AS/NZS ISO 14001:2004 Environmental Management System, as outlined in the Contractor Environmental Policy (Appendix B).

This Chapter details the EMS of the Contractor and the EMS designed by the Contractor specifically for the GEP Project (Project EMS). The systems provide a methodical approach to planning, implementing and reviewing the environmental aspects of the organisation's activities.

The Project EMS of the Contractor is outlined in further detail in the Project Environmental Plan (PEP) [Ref B1] and is summarised in this Chapter. The following sections also relate to certain aspects of the Project EMS:

Chapter 11 Auditing, Reporting and Communication.

Chapter 12 Corrective and Preventative Action.

Chapter 13 Responsibilities, Training and Awareness.

5.1 OVERVIEW

The EMS of the Contractor forms one key component of Contractor’s overall Business Management System and has been third-party certified by Bureau Veritas Certification as meeting the requirements of ISO 14001 - Environmental management systems. The Project EMS is also managed in line with ISO 14001 [Ref D1] as detailed in Table 5-1.

The ultimate objective of the Project EMS is to provide a consistent approach to the environmental management of operations, whilst ensuring the required corporate, contractual and legislative requirements are met and environmental impacts are prevented or minimised where possible.

Subcontractors will gain approval from Contractor for an EMS suitable for their SOW and obligations, or alternatively they will be required to work under the Project EMS.

5.2 EMS DOCUMENT STRUCTURE

Contractor Project EMS structure (Figure 5-1) allows for effective management and incorporation of overarching objectives and targets into supporting and sub-documents. The following section describes each of the environmental documents.

5.2.1 Environmental Policy

The Project Environmental Policy provides the overall intention and direction (otherwise known as the mission) of Contractor in relation to its GEP Project environmental performance. A copy of the Project Environmental Policy is provided in Appendix B.

5.2.2 Environmental Compliance Register

Environmental commitments made in the Draft EIS [Ref A1] and the EIS Supplement [Ref A2] that are relevant to the CEMP activities, have been consolidated into an Environmental Compliance Register [Ref B3]. The register also includes the Commonwealth EPBC approval conditions (approval 2008/4208) and NRETAS Recommendations (Assessment Report 65).

The environmental compliance register is a live document that will need to be progressively updated to incorporate additional conditions, commitments of secondary approvals and evidence of compliance. It will be a stand-alone document to this CEMP. The register will also serve as an audit tool.

5.2.3 Project Environmental Plan

The PEP is an overarching environmental document intended to provide sufficient information to support Contractor and subcontractor EMS in meeting a sufficient standard for the GEP Project.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

The PEP is not intended to document environmental controls or monitoring regimes in detail. Its purpose is to explain what environmental aspects shall be considered and how the Contractor Project EMS will be structured to support the management of these aspects.

5.2.4 Discipline-specific Environmental Management Plans

Discipline-specific environmental management plans include the Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) [Ref C1] this Onshore and Nearshore CEMP and the Offshore Environment Plan [Ref B2].These plans aim to:

Provide environmental management measures with the intent of managing all environmental aspects raised in the PEP or during risk assessments to meet Project commitments, statutory and contractual requirements.

Provide environmental monitoring regimes to track environmental management measures with the intent of making sure the controls achieve the level of performance expected.

5.2.5 Activity specific procedures

As required, activity specific procedures will be developed for use at each specific location or vessel.

5.3 OBJECTIVES AND TARGETS

A key component of the environmental management process is the development and implementation of GEP Project overarching objectives and targets listed in Table 5-2, which have been committed to by Contractor for the duration of the GEP Project.

In the environmental management frameworks detailed in Chapter 8 of this CEMP, specific objectives and targets are set for each significant environmental aspect. Performance requirements related to the objectives and targets for each of the environmental management frameworks can also be found in Chapter 8.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 5-1 Requirements of ISO 14001 – Environmental Management Systems

ISO Requirements CEMP Reference P

lan

4.1 General requirements Chapter 5 Environmental Management System

4.1.1 Environmental policy Chapter 5 Environmental Management System Appendix B Environmental Policy

4.3 Planning

4.3.1 Environmental aspects Chapter 7 Environmental Risk identification and assessment

4.3.2 Legal and other requirements Chapter 4 GEP Project obligations and requirements

4.3.3 Objectives, targets and program (s) Chapter 8 Environmental Management Frameworks – under each relevant environmental aspect

Do

4.4 Implementation and operation

4.4.1 Resources, roles, responsibility and authority Chapter 13 Responsibilities, training and awareness

4.4.2 Competence, training and awareness Chapter 13 Responsibilities, training and awareness

4.4.3 Communication Section 11.4 Awareness and Communication

4.4.4 Documentation Chapter 5 Environmental Management System

4.4.5 Control of documents Section 11.5 Document control and record management

4.4.6 Operation control Chapter 8 Environmental Management Frameworks

Chapter 9 Monitoring

4.4.7 Emergency preparedness and response Section 12.4 Emergency preparedness and response

Ch

eck

4.5 Checking and corrective action

4.5.1 Monitoring and measurement Chapter 11 Auditing, reporting and communication Chapter 8 Environmental Management Frameworks – under each relevant environmental aspect

4.5.2 Evaluation and compliance Chapter 4 GEP Project obligations and requirements Chapter 11 Auditing, reporting and communication

4.5.3 Nonconformity, corrective and preventative action

Chapter 12 Corrective and preventative action

4.5.4 Control of records Chapter 13 Responsibilities, training and awareness Section 11.5 Document control, data and record management

4.5.5 Internal audits Section 11.2 Auditing

Act

4.6 Management review Section 1.5 CEMP Review

Section 5.4 Continuous Improvement

Chapter 10 Auditing, Reporting and Communication

Chapter 11 Corrective and Preventative Action


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 5-2 Contractor overarching environmental objectives and targets

Objectives Targets

Prioritise environmental issues for all business activities

1a.

1b.

1c.

All inductions to include a section on the relevant environmental aspects and obligations and highlight where EMS documentation can be accessed.

All EMS documents to be accessible to Contractor and subcontractors personnel.

All HAZID workshops to adequately cover all environmental aspects

Minimise environmental impacts which could be caused by operations

2a.

2b.

All work practices to be risk assessed to ensure potential impacts are identified and appropriate management measures implemented

Zero environmental incidents.

Comply with relevant environmental legislation and standards and any other statutory requirements

3a. No breaches of relevant environmental legislation, standards or other statutory requirements.

Prevention of environmental impacts in balance with socio-economic needs

4a.

4b.

4c.

Stakeholder consultation is to be considered and documented during the development of all environmental management plan(s).

A Sustainability Engineer is to be appointed by Contractor. Tasks will include the prevention of environmental impacts in balance with socio-economic needs.

All HAZID/ ENVID workshops are to consider community impacts.

Uphold continual improvement of the EMS

5a.

5b.

EMS to be managed in accordance with ISO 14001.

Environmental documents are to be reviewed at least annually.

5.4 CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT

Contractor is committed to continuous improvement by conducting reviews and updates of the EMS with the intention to meet best environmental management practices.

Regular CEMP review, as described in Section 1.5, as well as an ongoing risk assessment process, as detailed in Chapter 7, will allow for the identification of opportunities for continuous improvement and improved environmental performance for the GEP Project. The ongoing review and improvement process is outlined in Figure 5-2. Identification of further opportunities for continuous improvement through auditing, reporting and communication are detailed in Chapters 10 and 11.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 5-1 Environmental management system document hierarchy

Company and DSEWPaC

Company and NOPSEMA

Company and NT EPA

Company (Only)

Contractor

Document delivery to:


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 5-2 Ongoing risk assessment process

Company risk assessment (including ENVID workshop)

Project-specific risk assessment (ENVID workshop)

EIS and Supplement

ENVID register

Development of environmental management controls (including reporting and monitoring

requirements)

DRAFT Construction Environmental Management Plan

Review by Company and regulators

Task-specific risk assessments (including ENVID workshops)

Work instruction procedures

Implementation

Monitoring Auditing /

Inspections Reporting

Construction Environmental Management Plan

Review of CEMP (See table 1.1 for review and

approval process)

Minor or routine

revisions

Major revisions


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

6 EXISTING ENVIRONMENT

6.1 OVERVIEW

This Chapter provides a brief overview of the existing environment, focussing on information relevant to the area and construction activities covered by this CEMP. This information provides the context for determining the management strategies detailed in Chapter 8.

6.2 METEOROLOGICAL CONDITIONS

Wickham Point is located in a tropical monsoonal bioregion with high rainfall in the monsoon season from November to April [Ref F1 and F2]. Dry season climate conditions prevail from May to October. Based on Bureau of Meteorology (BOM) mean rainfall data from Weather Station 014015 (located at Darwin’s International Airport) the mean annual rainfall is 1711 mm with rain falling on an average of 111 days. Of this approximately 21 % of the mean annual rainfall is recorded between the dry season and 79 % recorded during the wet season. Figure 6-1 illustrates the monthly rainfall probabilities at the site showing the lowest, 10th percentile, median, 90th percentile and highest rainfall.

Figure 6-1 Monthly rainfall probabilities for Darwin (mm)

6.3 ONSHORE ENVIRONMENT (MIDDLE ARM PENINSULA)

6.3.1 Onshore vegetation

Middle Arm Peninsula comprises two small ‘islands’ of terrestrial vegetation surrounded by intertidal mangrove forests which are partially or completely inundated by water at high tide. A map showing the various vegetation communities is presented in Figure 6-2 [Appendix 16 to the Draft EIS; Ref A1]. Mangrove zonation within Darwin Harbour is shown in Figure 6-3.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

The onshore area at Middle Arm can broadly be divided into three vegetation types:

Mangrove area: Mangroves typically occupy the mid-high tidal mud flats and form a peripheral belt around the Middle Arm Peninsula. The species present in this area are Sonneratia alba, Rhizophora stylosa, Ceriops tagal and Bruguiera exaristata.

Salt flat: Areas of salt flats and samphire flats have developed in the high tidal zone as a result of hypersaline groundwater conditions precluding mangrove establishment.

Woodland area: This area is predominantly mixed species low woodland dominated by eucalyptus woodland, melaleuca communities and closed monsoon vine forest. The seaward side of the woodland area is fringed by a narrow strip of mixed species closed forest which includes Lumnitzera racemosa, Exoecaria ovalis and Ceriops australis.

There is only one species of cycad listed as “vulnerable” under the Territory Parks and Wildlife Conservation Act (NT) (TPWC Act) and the EPBC Act within the site. This cycad (Cycas armstrongii) was recorded within the eucalyptus woodland vegetation community. This cycad is considered to be abundant locally.

No vegetation communities found within the site are listed as threatened ecological communities under the EPBC Act. However, both the monsoon vine forest and the intertidal mangrove communities are considered to have conservation significance in the Darwin Harbour area and the NT. Both of these communities are utilised as feeding or breeding areas by a wide range of vertebrate and invertebrate animals.

The Australian Weeds Strategy identifies weeds of national significance (WONS). The NT has 12 WONS and these are legislated and administrated in the NT under the Weeds Management Act 2001 (NT). This legislation declares weeds into groups that require action. These classifications are:

Class A – weeds to be eradicated.

Class B – weeds for which growth and spread must be controlled.

Class C – weeds not to be introduced to the NT.

Flora and vegetation surveys of the GEP site undertaken in October 2007 and May 2008, investigated weed presence at Blaydin Point and along access roads, including Wickham Point Road. The survey did not cover the Middle Arm Peninsula – shore crossing site. Four of the weeds identified are listed as Schedule Class B/C weeds under the Weeds Management Act 2001 (NT). These are mission grass (Pennisetum polystachion), hyptis (Hyptis suaveolens), lantana (Lantana camara) and gamba grass (Andropogon gayanus). This classification obliges landholders to make “reasonable attempts” to contain the growth and prevent the spread of these species.

6.3.2 Onshore fauna

Surveys of Blaydin Point (which included the onshore area covered in this CEMP) in 2007 and 2008 recorded 148 vertebrate species, including nine species of mammal (of which four were bats), 106 birds, 22 reptiles and 11 frogs [Technical Appendix 16 of Ref A1]. No significant fauna species were recorded in the site during either of the field surveys. The NRETAS and EPBC databases suggest that there are a number of protected native fauna species that could potentially occur in and around the site. Of these species, the site contains suitable habitat for the northern quoll (Dasyurus hallucatus) and several migratory bird species listed as endangered under the EPBC Act. A full list of protected species identified under the EPBC Act is provided in Appendix C.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Figure 6-2 Vegetation communities of the Middle Arm Peninsula development area


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 6-3 Mangrove zonation in Darwin Harbour [Ref F3]


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

6.3.3 Surface water

The Middle Arm Peninsula – shore crossing site has a gentle slope of less than 1.5%. Wickham Point Road is 8 m + LAT and the seaward side of the woodland area is 4 m + LAT (where the winch pad is to be located). Wickham Point Road is considered as the catchment area boundary from where surface water runoff will drain in a west-south-westerly direction to supply the salt flat and mangroves with surface water runoff (Figure 6-4) [Ref C2].

The Middle Arm Peninsula site surface soil layer rapidly absorbs water from rainfall when the soil is dry, such as at the end of the dry season and into the beginning of the wet season. After regular rainfall the surface layer becomes saturated and overland water flows occur. Due to the low undulating topography, surface flows are most likely to consist of non-turbulent sheet flow over the soil surface [Ref A1].

Figure 6-4 Natural drainage pathway of surface water runoff at the Middle Arm site

6.3.4 Soil erodibility

The susceptibility of an area to erosion depends on a combination of factors, mainly climatic conditions, nature of the terrain, soil characteristics and vegetation cover. The soils in the shore crossing site are considered to be susceptible to erosion. Although the slope of the site is very gentle, the heavy rainfall expected during shore crossing works means the site may be at risk of erosion.

The three families of soil present on the site are:

Euro: found on intertidal flats under mangrove vegetation and which experience regular saline tidal inundation.


81-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Maand: found on the salt flat which is bare of vegetation except for halophytes. Tidal inundation on these areas is infrequent (refer to the tidal assessment in Chapter 6 for more detail). The soils are non-gravelly, poorly drained marine muds.

Blaydin: found in the woodland area, above HAT, and is characterized by a well-structured A horizon that is very thick and melanic.

The erosion potentials for these soil types are presented in Table 6-1. The soil distribution across the site is shown in Figure 6-5 [Appendix 17 of the Draft EIS; Ref A1]. Broad soil classifications based on the geological profile encountered during the ASS Investigation [Ref B4] along the proposed trench profile are shown in Figure 6-6.

Table 6-1 Erosion potential for soil types at Middle Arm - shore crossing site

Soil family Pulverulence Water erosion Wind erosion

Blaydin moderate low low

Euro low low moderate

Maand low low low


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Figure 6-5 Soil family types on Middle Arm - shore crossing site


81-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 6-6 Cross-section of soil profile along the pipeline alignment

WOODLAND


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

6.3.5 Groundwater

Little information is available regarding groundwater on the Middle Arm Peninsula – shore crossing site. A detailed groundwater study was performed at the site of the onshore LNG processing plant on the northern side of Middle Arm Peninsula (Blaydin Point) as part of the Draft EIS [Technical Appendix 18 of the Draft EIS; Ref A1] and monthly groundwater monitoring has been undertaken at this site since June 2012. Some of the bores being monitored on the northern side of Middle Arm Peninsula may provide some indication of groundwater characteristics at Middle Arm Peninsula – shore crossing site, due to their proximity to the mangroves and lithology. However, as the groundwater at the Blaydin Point site is likely to be from a different catchment, there are limitations as to how comparable the data may be. Data for Blaydin Point are not yet publically available.

The groundwater levels at the Middle Arm Peninsula – shore crossing site will generally follow the existing topography, similar to the surface water runoff. This means the groundwater will flow from Wickham Point Road in a west-south-westerly direction towards the salt flat where it will drain in a westerly direction to the mangrove area, parallel to the pipeline alignment. Groundwater levels are generally lower towards the coast.

Dry season pH levels are expected to be slightly acidic and this has been attributed to the near-surface build-up (and subsequent flushing into the aquifer during the wet season) of humic acids. During the wet season, when a greater supply of fresh water occurs, pH levels are expected to be closer to neutral [Technical Appendix 18 of the Draft EIS; Ref A1].

6.3.6 Acid sulfate soils

6.3.6.1 Background

ASS is a common name for naturally occurring clays, muds and sands rich in iron sulfides (pyrite). ASS typically occurs in coastal and estuarine sediments. When such sediments are exposed to the air by excavation, placement of fill or by lowering the local ground water table, the iron sulfides react with oxygen to form sulfuric acid according to the following overall reaction:

FeS2 + 154O2 + 7

2H2O→ Fe(OH)3 + 2SO4

-2- + 4H+

The decrease in pH also causes iron, aluminium and other metals to become soluble. The flushing or leaching of disturbed ASS potentially enables mobilisation of the dissolved metals and acid into the leach waters. This can cause significant impact to the environment, engineered structures and human health in the receiving areas.

In their natural (usually anaerobic) environments, the iron sulfides in the soil are relatively stable. These stable ASS are called potential acid sulfate soils (PASS) because they have the potential to produce acidity when disturbed or exposed to air. PASS materials have a pH close to neutral (pH 6.5 – 7.5) when undisturbed. Disturbed PASS materials that have been subjected to oxidation are referred to as Actual Acid Sulfate Soils (AASS). AASS are acidic and have a pH of less than 4.

The risk of acidification of acid sulfate materials can be determined indirectly by an acid-base accounting approach. Net acidity, a measure of the acid- producing capacity of the sediments, is estimated as:

Net Acidity = Potential Sulfidic Acidity + Actual Acidity + Retained Acidity – Acid Neutralising Capacity

Where: Potential sulfidic acidity is an estimate of the acidity that could be liberated after complete oxidation of the reduced inorganic sulfides in the soil material.

Actual acidity is current acidity and includes not only soluble acidity and acid adsorbed onto the soil particles (exchangeable acidity resulting from oxidation of sulfidic materials), but also other sources of acidity such as organic acids.

Retained acidity represents the ‘less available’ forms of the existing acidity that may be released by hydrolysis of relatively insoluble sulfate minerals, such as jarosite.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Acid Neutralising Capacity (ANC) is an estimate of the soil’s ability to neutralise the released acid. In practice, the measured acid neutralising capacity is modified by a fineness factor to discount the neutralising capacity of larger particles of carbonates such as shell fragments. In coastal systems, the measured acid neutralising

capacity is usually divided by a fineness factor of ≥ 1.5.

Sediments with a net acidity of more than 0.03%S trigger the requirement for further ASS assessment, but only if that acidity is sulfide related acidity and not simply naturally occurring organic acid acidity [Ref D4].

The Chromium Reducible Sulfur (SCR) laboratory analytical method is commonly used to determine the percentage of reducible inorganic sulfur compounds (%S) and when concentrations exceed the 0.03%S guideline criteria, acid base accounting is used to determine treatment liming rates using the following equation:

Liming rate = %S x 30.59 x 1.02 x 1.5

Where: 30.59 converts %S to mole H2SO4 per tonne of soil, 1.02 converts to CaCO3 and 1.5 is the safety factor.

ASS are formed by natural processes and can be found in intertidal areas and marine, wetland, estuarine or river settings. They occur predominantly in low-lying areas near the coast. Coastal estuarine and mangrove swamp environments develop ASS due to the waterlogged and anaerobic soil environments.

6.3.6.2 Monosulfidic Black Oozes

Monosulfidic Black Oozes (MBO) are highly reactive organic-rich gels with extremely high moisture contents. They can form as thick accumulations in drains and waterways that drain ASS landscapes, and are easily mobilised or resuspended during runoff events. MBO can oxidise rapidly once exposed to oxygen, and can cause severe acidification and/or deoxygenation of floodwaters.

6.3.6.3 Acid Sulfate Soils investigation at Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach

A field investigation undertaken in October 2012 sampled for the presence of PASS and AASS along the profile of the trench to be excavated as part of the GEP construction SOW [Ref B4]. Sampling locations were situated at approximate 50 m intervals along the proposed GEP alignment. An opportunistic sample was collected from the surface soil in the tidal flat area following identification of soil with potentially similar characteristics to MBO. The sampling location is labelled as MBO01 in Figure 6-7.

The results of a nearshore ASS investigation [Ref B4] indicate the prevalence of PASS within the area to be cleared and excavated on Middle Arm Peninsula. The risk from PASS is associated with ground disturbance activities, such as excavation. Low lying and undisturbed mangrove or intertidal areas are assumed to pose a higher risk of ASS or PASS occurrence. The report indicates that the soils contain limited buffering capacity to naturally neutralise the potential acid generated if the materials were disturbed.

Following soil characterisation of the proposed trench, the areas identified as PASS have been mapped to support decision making and management during excavation, as shown in Figure 6-7. A further explanation of the PASS characteristics is provided below. The soils have been separated into the three vegetation zones.

Tidal Flats

The silty clay soils within the tidal flats contains moderate to very high levels of potential acidity with minimal actual acidity. As such the material is considered to comprise moderate to very high levels of PASS. The PASS layer appears to be most prevalent from 0.5 to 3.5 mbgl however; PASS is also present above and beneath this layer. The maximum liming rate calculated for tidal flat soils was 110 kg CaCO3/tonne. Samples were not collected below 4.0 mbgl therefore the extent of PASS has not been fully vertically delineated.

Salt Flats

The soils within the salt flats generally comprised silty clays overlain by approximately 1 m of clay with fine shell fragments. Similar to the silty clay layer observed in the tidal flat area, the salt flat silty clay layer (generally present between 1.0 - 4.0 mbgl) contained moderate to very high levels of potential acidity with minimal actual


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

acidity. As such the material is considered to comprise moderate to very high levels of PASS. The PASS layer appears to be most prevalent from 1.0 to 4.0 mbgl however; PASS is also present above and beneath this layer. The maximum liming rate calculated for salt flat soils was 234 kg CaCO3/tonne. The analytical results generally indicate that surface soils 1.0 to 4.0 mbgl would not require liming in the majority of the sampling locations.

Woodland

The PASS layer appears to dissipate rapidly away from the salt flat soils into the woodland zone with no PASS identified at the most easterly borehole (ON14). The PASS layer identified in the woodland zone (at around 1 mbgl) contains low levels of potential acidity however the absence of ANC in the soils prevents natural buffering of the PASS. The remainder of the soil in the woodland zone is considered unlikely to contain PASS. The maximum liming rate calculated for woodland soils was 3 kg CaCO3/tonne.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 6-7 Distribution of potential acid sulfate soils profile along proposed trench area

WOODLAND


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

6.4 MARINE ENVIRONMENT

6.4.1 Coastal geomorphology and bathymetry

Darwin Harbour is a large macro tidal estuary, formed by post-glacial marine flooding of a dissected plateau. It has three main components – East Arm, West Arm and Middle Arm – that merge into a single unit, along with smaller Woods Inlet, before opening into Beagle Gulf to the north. The harbour extends for more than 30 km along this north-north-westerly to south-south-easterly orientated axis.

The main channel of the harbour is around 15-25 m deep, with a maximum depth of some 36 m. The channel favours the eastern side of the harbour and continues into East Arm and Middle Arm. The channel extending into Middle Arm, up to the western side of Channel Island, has a depth that ranges from about 10-20 m. A slightly shallower channel (about 10-15 m in depth) separates Channel Island from Middle Arm Peninsula, where the pipeline shore crossing is located.

The predominant seabed material to the west of Middle Arm Peninsula, near the pipeline shore crossing, is residual soil grading to weathered phyllite and sandstone. There are also pockets and veneers of unconsolidated sands and gravels and harder phyllite [Ref A1].

6.4.2 Metocean conditions

Darwin Harbour experiences maximum tidal level variations of up to 8 m. The mean spring tide variations are around 6 m and the mean neap tide variations are around 3 m. The tides are semi-diurnal, meaning there are two high tides and two low tides per day. There is some amplification of tidal range in the order of 100 mm–150 mm as the tide progresses through Darwin Harbour. The tidal range does not begin to reduce until well into the upper arms.

The large tidal ranges produce strong currents that peak at speeds of up to 2 – 2.5 m per second. Tidal flows are also large which creates a well-mixed system. The strong currents associated with muddy and sandy substrates also give rise to very turbid plumes that can extend over wide areas of the harbour.

6.4.3 Marine water quality

The Darwin and Blackmore rivers flow into Middle Arm of the harbour. Freshwater inflow to the harbour occurs from January to April. Water quality in Darwin Harbour is described as generally high, although naturally turbid most of the time [Ref A1]. Water quality parameters vary greatly with the tide (spring versus neap), location of sampling point (inner versus outer harbour), and with the season (wet season versus dry season). There is no evidence of widespread water pollution in the harbour, although there is some localised pollution. Anthropogenic influences on harbour water quality include the port operations at East Arm Wharf, historical industrial activities at Darwin Waterfront and Sadgroves Creek, and wastewater outlets.

6.4.4 Marine biota

6.4.4.1 Darwin region

The shores of Darwin Harbour are characterised by extensive mangroves and intertidal mud flats. Mangroves form a valuable part of the marine ecosystem by producing large amounts of organic matter and nutrients utilised by fauna such as crustaceans and fish. Under the NT Planning Scheme these communities are zoned for “conservation”, recognising the biodiversity value of this vegetation community [Ref D2].

Approximately 80% of the Darwin Harbour region’s seafloor is estimated to be covered with soft surfaces consisting of mud and fine sand. Hard coral and filter-feeder communities occur in Darwin Harbour where the substrate is rocky in the lower intertidal and shallow subtidal zones and where hydrodynamic conditions permit. Filter-feeder communities primarily comprise sponges, gorgonians (sea fans and sea whips) and other soft corals. They may co-occur with hard corals, giving rise to “mixed species” communities. However, they also occur at depths shallower than, and deeper than, those at which hard corals thrive and can be the dominant component of the benthic community in some areas [Technical Appendix 8 of the Draft EIS; Ref A1].


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

6.4.4.2 Shore crossing

The western shore of Middle Arm Peninsula, where the pipeline crossing is located, is fringed by mangroves. The mangrove communities present within the pipeline corridor are Sonneratia alba woodland, Rhizophora stylosa shoreline forest and Avicennia marina – Ceriops australis open forest (Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3). A sparse epibenthic biota and relatively featureless mangrove muds characterise the intertidal zone at the pipeline shore crossing, with low to moderate bioturbation (~10-20 burrows per m2) [Ref A2]. The salt flats seaward of the mangroves support sparse epibenthic and infauna communities that are well represented elsewhere in the harbour [Technical Appendix 8 of the Draft EIS; Ref A1].

On the intertidal platform between Channel Island and the mainland, less than 1 km to the south-east of the shore crossing (Figure 6-13) is a coral community that is listed on the Register of the National Estate and is a declared Heritage Place under the NT Heritage Act 2011. The declaration is based upon the presence of a relatively diverse community, which demonstrates that a coral-based community can survive in an area where most physical conditions are adverse (e.g. high turbidity, strong tidal currents and seasonally low salinity). The communities also have a high diversity of coral not consistent with their location in an area of deep, fine muds, and very low salinity and high turbidity during the wet season. The high coral diversity, clear reef zonation and the accessibility of the location make the Channel Island coral community important for research and education.

6.4.4.3 Pipeline route

The seabed along the pipeline route predominantly consists of muddy to sandy-mud substrates with low bioturbation (around 10 burrows per m2). Epibenthic fauna are sparse, comprising occasional sea fans, sea whips (Juniceella spp.), feather stars, bryozoans soft corals (Dendronephthya spp.), hydroids, sea pens, sponges and ascidians (‘sea squirts’) [Technical Appendix 8 of the Draft EIS; Ref A1]. Studies have shown that Darwin Harbour has a relatively low diversity of soft corals and sea whips, with 20-25 species (11 genera) and 30-40 species (18 genera) respectively. Their poor representation can be attributed to the turbidity of the water in the harbour and the combination of factors such as low light availability, and exposure to wave action and strong currents.

6.4.5 Protected marine fauna

A complete list of species identified as “matters of national environmental significance” under the EPBC Act that are potentially present within (or in close proximity to) Darwin Harbour is presented in Appendix C. This list includes 23 threatened species, 51 migratory species and 100 marine species. The list includes dolphins, turtles, dugongs and saltwater crocodiles, all of which have been observed within Darwin Harbour and are discussed in more detail in the subsections below.

It should be noted, however, that some of these species, such as blue whales, rarely venture into shallow water sections of the Harbour and thus are unlikely to be affected by construction activities. Nevertheless, the management measures proposed in this CEMP are intended to be effective for all marine mammal species that may venture into the GEP Project area during the construction phase.

6.4.5.1 Dolphins

Three species of coastal dolphin occur in Darwin Harbour: the Indo-Pacific humpback dolphin (Sousa chinensis), the Indo-Pacific bottlenose dolphin (Tursiops aduncus) and the Australian snubfin dolphin (Orcaella heinsohni).

The Indo-Pacific bottlenose dolphin is the most widely distributed and abundant of the three coastal dolphin species in Darwin Harbour, and occurs all around the Australian coastline. Indo-Pacific humpback dolphins are known to occur along the northern coastline, extending to Exmouth Gulf on the west coast, and the Queensland/New South Wales border region on the east coast. The Australian snubfin dolphin is a recently described species, having previously been considered to be a population of the Irrawaddy dolphin (Orcaella brevirostris) [Technical Appendix 4 of the Draft EIS; Ref A1]. The snubfin dolphin occurs across the subtropical and tropical parts of Australia. There are no current estimates of population sizes or trends for


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

snubfin or Indo-Pacific humpback dolphins at a national level or at a regional level within Darwin. Population estimates available to date for the Australian snubfin dolphins indicate this species is generally found in very low numbers within a fragmented coastal distribution.

6.4.5.2 Marine turtles

Within Darwin Harbour, four species of marine turtles are known to occur and forage; the green (Chelonia mydas), hawksbill (Eretmochelys imbricate), flatback (Natator depressus) and olive ridley turtles (Lepidochelys olivacea).

The shoreline throughout Darwin Harbour, particularly in Middle Arm, consists largely of mangrove forests and mudflats and does not provide suitable nesting habitat for any species of turtle. The nearest nesting beach (used by the flatback turtle) is located in the Casuarina Coastal Reserve near Lee Point on the north-eastern shore of the harbour, approximately 20 km from the shore crossing site at Middle Arm Peninsula (Figure 6-8).

Turtles may occur in the shore crossing site and along the pipeline route whilst foraging for food [Ref A1], and areas of Darwin Harbour such as Channel Island may act as a nursery habitat. Green turtles forage amongst seagrass and macroalgal communities (Figure 6-9). Flatback and hawksbill turtles forage on the filter-feeder communities which are extensive in the harbour (Figure 6-10 and Figure 6-11). The hawksbill turtle also forages on seagrass and macroalgal communities in addition to filter-feeders [Technical Appendix 4 of the Draft EIS; Ref A1].

6.4.5.3 Dugongs

The dugong (Dugong dugon) has a range that extends across the Indo-Pacific, although the majority of dugongs live in the northern waters of Australia between Shark Bay and Moreton Bay. Dugongs are usually found in coastal areas such as shallow protected bays and mangrove channels where seagrass grows. They are herbivorous and demonstrate a strong dietary preference for seagrasses, although they will also eat algae [Ref A1]. Potential foraging habitat for dugongs is shown in Figure 6-12.

In general, it is considered that dugongs could occur anywhere in the harbour that could support seagrasses or algae, which corresponds with hard-substrate areas in waters less than 10 m in depth and areas of rocky reef such as Weed Reef and Channel Island [Ref A1].

6.4.5.4 Saltwater crocodiles

The saltwater crocodile (Crocodylus porosus) is distributed throughout South East Asia and Australia. In Australia, the saltwater crocodile is distributed in the northern parts of Queensland, the NT and Western Australia, where it occupies a range of habitats including tidal rivers, coastal waters and estuaries, to freshwater lakes and marshes [Ref A1]. The total population in the NT is considered to be approaching the same levels as in the 1960s, before the numbers were reduced drastically through hunting [Ref D2].


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 6-8 Location of the closest turtle nesting beach to the development area


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 6-9 Potential green turtle foraging habitats in Darwin Harbour


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 6-10 Potential flatback turtle foraging habitats in Darwin Harbour


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 6-11 Potential hawksbill turtle foraging habitats in Darwin Harbour


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 6-12 Potential dugong foraging habitats in Darwin Harbour


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

6.4.6 Reserves and Protected Areas

An EPBC Protected Matters Report was generated to identify matters of national environmental significance and other matters protected by the EPBC Act in the project area. No threatened ecological communities, key ecological features, commonwealth reserves, heritage places or critical habitats were identified (Appendix C). A small coral community on the rocky platform at Channel Island (located approximately 1.5 km south of the project area) is considered a unique feature in Darwin Harbour. The Channel Island coral community is listed on the Register of National Estate and is a declared heritage place under the Heritage Act 2011 (NT) [Ref F4]. The location of Channel Island relative to the pipeline shore crossing is shown in Figure 6-13. The declaration is based upon the presence of a relatively diverse community, which demonstrates that a coral-based community can survive in an area where most physical conditions are adverse (e.g. high turbidity, strong tidal currents, and seasonally low salinity).

Figure 6-13 Location of Channel Island in relation to development area for GEP pipelay


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

6.5 EXISTING SITES OF HISTORIC AND CULTURAL SIGNIFICANCE

6.5.1 Onshore

There are no declared non-Aboriginal or Aboriginal heritage places and objects recorded on the NT Heritage Register which are located within the Middle Arm Peninsula site covered by this CEMP [Ref F7].

A number of heritage sites and artefacts have been discovered within the wider Ichthys Project Area on Middle Arm Peninsula [Ref A3 and A4]. Therefore, it is possible that heritage artefacts may be uncovered during construction works on the area covered by the plan.

6.5.2 Nearshore

There are a number known items of historic significance in the Darwin Harbour region. Figure 6-14 shows the location of known wrecks in Darwin Harbour.

Shipwrecks and aircraft wrecks in Darwin Harbour may be protected under legislation. Protection in the form of declared areas or exclusion zones are implemented through the Heritage Act 2011 (NT) and the Darwin Port Corporation Act (NT) and depending on the level of protection afforded, a restricted zone may exist around them. Some wrecks not formally protected by legislation have been assigned a protection zone by Company for protection from damage resulting from Project related activities. The types of restricted zones around wrecks present in Darwin Harbour are:

declared area

exclusion zone

Project controlled zone.

Declared areas exist around a number of wrecks within Darwin Harbour and nearby the pipelay anchoring corridor. These areas extend to a distance of 100 m around the wreck (200 m around the Dakota and the Kelat) and prevent any vessel from anchoring in the area without a permit. Most project vessels (with the exception of the pipelay barge) may traverse over the area. Declared areas are shown in Figure 6-14.

Exclusion zones provide further protection by legally excluding all vessels from anchoring in and traversing over them. The exclusion zones have been established under the Darwin Port Corporation Act (NT) and are enforced by the Harbour Master. Exclusion zones exist around two wrecks in Darwin Harbour:

Catalina 6 – 200 m exclusion zone

Booya – 200 m exclusion zone.

These exclusion zones are shown in Figure 6-14.

Project controlled zones have been established by Company around a number of wreck sites in Darwin Harbour. The zones extend to a radius of 100 m from the wrecks of the Catalina 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 and to a radius of 50 m from the Catalina tailplane section. These wrecks are all located to the east of Wickham Point and as such will not be in the vicinity of the pipelay barge. GEP project support vessels in this area will be allowed to traverse through these zones however no anchoring is permitted. Project controlled zones are shown in Figure 6-14.

Aboriginal sites of significance or sacred sites are afforded protection in the form of Restricted Work Areas (RWA). A number of sites were recorded and relocated by Company, to the satisfaction of the Heritage Branch. A range of sacred sites remain in the vicinity of the GEP anchoring corridor that are protected by RWAs. Vessels are not permitted to anchor in or traverse through the RWAs (further detail on the nearshore heritage management framework is provided in Section 8.2.1). The locations of these sites cannot be presented in this document but will be provided to all vessels in confidence for inclusion on their navigation systems and the Tug Management System (TMS).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 6-14 Location of controlled zones and wrecks


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

6.6 CURRENT LAND

Middle Arm Peninsula was identified as a site for future industrial development by the NT Government and is classified as such under the NT Planning Scheme. Current use of the land on Middle Arm Peninsula includes a power station on Channel Island and ConocoPhillips’ Darwin LNG plant and offloading facility at Blaydin Point. There is also the Darwin Immigration Detention Centre and an alternative place of detention (Foxy Robinson camp). A number of aquaculture ventures also exist around the Middle Arm Peninsula.

6.7 CURRENT SEA USE

There are a number of existing infrastructure objects in the vicinity of the pipelay construction activities. These are:

existing Bayu-Darwin pipeline (ConocoPhillips) (shown in Figure 1-3)

underwater power and communication cables which extend across the harbour on the seafloor between Mandorah and Myilly Point (shown in Figure 1-3).

Darwin has a substantial history as a trading port over the past century, which has included dredging campaigns, port developments involving extended sheet piling programs, and other major developments. During 2008–09, approximately 1600 trading vessels and 5600 non-trading vessels visited the Port of Darwin and this number is expected to increase.

The NT has the highest rate of recreational fishing membership in Australia. Darwin Harbour is used frequently for recreational fishing with around one-third of all fishing effort occurring in the harbour. The amount spent by tourists and locals on recreational fishing is estimated to be nearly $35 million per year. This does not include the many fishing-tour operators, most of whom operate out of Darwin [Ref A1].

Very little commercial fishing activity takes place inside Darwin Harbour. Operators of the Coastal Line Fishery and the Aquarium Fishery are permitted to fish in Darwin Harbour but rarely do so [Ref A1].

6.7.1 Existing sources of underwater noise

There are several sources of anthrogenic noise already present within Darwin Harbour, including year-round vessel traffic (as noted in Section 6.7). Table 6-2 below provides a comparison of the source sound levels at 1 m distance for a range of sound sources that may occur within Darwin Harbour.

Table 6-2 Overview of biological and manmade sound source levels at 1 m [Ref F8]

Sound source Source level at 1 m Bandwidth Main energy Duration Directionality

Impact piling 220–257 decibels (dB) re 1 μPa zero-to-peak

10 Hz - 20 kHz 100–200 Hz 5–100 ms omni- directional

Echo sounders 230–245 dB re 1 μPa rms 11.5 – 100 kHz various 0.01–2 ms downwards

Harbour porpoise

click

205 dB re 1 μPa peak-to-peak

110 – 160 kHz 130–140 kHz 100 μs directional

Shipping (large

vessels)

180–190 dB re 1 μPa rms 6 Hz -30 kHz <200 Hz continuous omni- directional

Trailing suction

hopper dredger

(TSHD)

186–188 dB re 1 μPa rms 30 Hz – 20 kHz 100–500 Hz continuous omni- directional

Cutting-suction

dredgers (CSD)

172–185 dB re 1 μPa rms 30 Hz – 20 kHz 100–500 Hz continuous omni- directional


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

7 ENVIRONMENTAL RISK ASSESSMENT

This Chapter describes the environmental risk assessment process that has been undertaken to determine the potential risks to the environment from the construction activities described in Chapter 3.

7.1 OVERVIEW OF ICHTHYS PROJECT RISK ASSESSMENT

Company has committed to a systematic risk assessment process as a means of achieving best practice in environmental management for the Ichthys Project. The assessment of environmental risk has been an essential component of Company’s approach to the environmental impact assessment process.

The EIS risk assessment forms the basis for ongoing management and review of significant environmental risks throughout the life of the Ichthys Project. The risk assessment methodology adopted by Company was developed to align with Australian Standard AS/NZS ISO 31000:2009 [Ref D5], Risk management—Principles and guidelines, together with its associated document Risk Management Guidelines—Companion to AS/NZS 4360:2004 [Ref D6].

The environmental risk assessment presented in the Draft EIS [Ref A1] has been used as the basis for identification of risks that are applicable to the GEP activities outlined in this CEMP. Further information on the environmental risk assessment outcomes associated with the Ichthys Project is detailed in Chapters 7, 8 and 10 of the Draft EIS [Ref A1].

7.2 GEP PROJECT RISK ASSESSMENT

Contractor and subcontractors have undertaken an environmental risk assessment process specifically for Contractor GEP SOW, using the Ichthys Project risk assessment as a basis. An overview of the risk assessment process undertaken to date is outlined in Figure 7-1, and the context of the risk assessment process for GEP ongoing review and improvement is outlined in Figure 5-2.

The purpose of Contractor risk assessment process was to:

Identify any additional risks in light of information available post-EIS, primarily through the development of the SOW or construction methodologies.

Review all risks (including those identified in the EIS risk assessment) within the context of Contractor SOW. This included the review of proposed control measures to determine whether further or alternative controls were required and, where necessary, identifying the additional controls required to reduce the risk as appropriate.

The environmental risk matrix shown in Table 7-1 was used to assess the likelihood, consequence and the risk of potential environmental impacts. The risk assessment was conducted through environmental hazard identification (ENVID) workshops. The outcomes of the risk assessment are incorporated into an ENVID register, which will be used throughout the GEP Project to facilitate the appropriate management of all identified risks.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Figure 7-1 Overview of ENVID process

A summary of the onshore and nearshore GEP Project-specific risks, their risk rating and references to the specific management measures that have been developed to address those risks are outlined in Table 7-2 (onshore) and Table 7-3 (nearshore).

The risk assessment process has been used to develop a series of environmental objectives and associated performance criteria for the construction activities applicable to this EMP, as outlined in Chapter 8, as EMFs.

SWMSs are one of the tools that will be used identify and control environmental hazards on site. A SWMS is a second tier risk assessment with the aim of preventing personal injury to a person, or their colleagues, or harm to the environment. Their use is further described in Chapter 8.

The environmental risk profile of construction activities will be assessed as construction progresses. These assessments will be ongoing as part of the continual improvement in the environmental management process.

Identify all work activities (Chapter 3: scope of work)

Identify environmental risks associated with work activities

Assess risk rating based on controls identified

Has the risk been reduced sufficiently?

Conclude risk assessment process and finalise outputs ENVID register

Identify additional control and

mitigation methods

Yes

No


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 7-1 ENVID risk matrix


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 7-2 Summary of key risks identified for the onshore scope of work

Aspect Hazard Potential impacts Residual risk

Management element

All onshore operations

Waste Release of waste products into the local environment resulting in pollution and attraction of pest animals

Toxic impacts to flora and fauna

Changes to natural ecology of the local environment

Low Waste EMF

Oil Spills Release of hazardous substances through accidental spills


Moderate Dangerous goods and Hazardous Materials EMF

Onshore Hydrocarbon Spill Response EMF

Weeds Transport of invasive weed species into or from the construction sites

Weed outbreak with negative impacts on native flora and fauna biodiversity

Moderate Weeds EMF

Bushfires Fire outbreak into surrounding vegetation

Risk to human safety

Loss of native flora and fauna biodiversity

Low Bushfire EMF

Airborne Noise Production of construction noise Resulting in loss of amenity at sensitive receptors. (Exceedance of 70 dBa at nearest receptor 3.5 km away)

Low Onshore Noise EMF

Vegetation clearing at Middle Arm Peninsula shore approach

Installation of temporary road and facilities

Flora Removal of vegetation outside of permitted area

Damage to surrounding flora during permitted vegetation removal

Localised reduction in flora biodiversity

Low Flora EMF

Fauna Loss of fauna habitat

Physical interactions with vehicles or equipment

Entrapment in trenches

Localised decrease in local fauna populations

Low Fauna EMF

Dust Release of airborne dust during vegetation removal, road preparation and unsealed road use for full duration of SOW

Human health impacts

Irritation to humans

Smothering of vegetation

Low Dust EMF

Erosion Erosion and scouring causing increased levels of turbidity in surface water runoff and in the receiving environment

Increased turbidity impacting on sensitive marine flora and fauna

Moderate Erosion and surface water runoff EMF

Surface water management

Pooling of water creating biting insect breeding grounds

Human health impacts

Irritation to workforce and other local receptors

Moderate Erosion and surface water runoff EMF

Pest management EMF


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320


Management element

Cultural Heritage

Uncovering of heritage item during vegetation clearing, installation of temporary road facilities and any other ground disturbing works

Damage to, or loss of, heritage item.

Low Heritage EMF

Acid sulfate soils

Release of acids and heavy metals, potential contamination of surface water and groundwater

Adverse impacts on terrestrial and marine flora and fauna

Low Acid sulfate soils EMF

Construction of onshore trench

Noise Unacceptable levels of underwater noise generated by piling during cofferdam installation

Displacement of, or disruption to, marine fauna

Low Noise EMF

Underwater noise EMF

Acid sulfate soils

Release of acids and heavy metals, potential contamination of surface water and groundwater

Adverse impacts on terrestrial and marine flora and fauna

Moderate Acid sulfate soils EMF

Cultural heritage

Uncovering of heritage item during construction activities

Damage to, or loss of, heritage item

Low Heritage EMF

Wet buckle standby (equipment mobilisation and testing)

Noise Noise generated by diesel driven equipment (approx. 2 days) and air vents (approx. 2 days) concurrently

Resulting in loss of amenity at sensitive receptors. (Exceedance of 70 dBa at nearest receptor 3.5 km away)


Oil spill Release of hydrocarbons from equipment, during refuelling or transport and handling of hydrocarbons


Moderate Onshore Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Materials EMF


Wet buckle operations (in the event of a wet buckle)

Chemical spills

Release of chemicals (biocide and corrosion inhibitor) through accidental spills


Low Onshore Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Materials EMF

Oil spill Release of hydrocarbons from equipment, during refuelling or transport and handling of hydrocarbons


Moderate Onshore Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Materials EMF


Noise Noise generated by diesel driven equipment (max. 21 days) and venting compressed air onshore (max. 14 days) but not occurring concurrently.

Exceedance of 70 dBa at nearest receptor 3.5 km away



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Table 7-3 Summary of key risks identified for nearshore scope of work


Management element

Marine operations: movement and routine operations of vessels

Waste Release of waste products, including hazardous waste into nearshore waters

Localised alteration of marine environment including nutrient enrichment and toxicity

Low Nearshore waste EMF

Nearshore Dangerous goods and hazardous materials EMF

Nearshore Liquid discharge EMF

Oil spill Accidental hydrocarbon spill of approx. 1-2 L during refuelling

Localised toxicity within marine environment

Low Nearshore Dangerous goods and hazardous materials EMF

Nearshore Spill prevention and response EMF

Use of toxic anti-fouling paints

Release of toxic anti-fouling paints into the marine environment

Localised toxicity within marine environment

Low Nearshore Dangerous goods and hazardous materials EMF

Liquid discharges

Release of liquid discharges (e.g. deck wash)

Localised, low level contamination of marine environment

Low Nearshore Liquid discharge EMF

Non-Aboriginal heritage

Sedimentation and/or scouring effects due to vessel propeller wash. Anchoring of vessels in, or unauthorised passage into heritage protection zones causing physical damage

Damage to heritage item(s) Moderate Anchoring EMF

Heritage EMF

Nearshore Heritage management plan [Ref A4]

Aboriginal heritage

Vessel activity occurring within exclusion zones, physical disturbance to heritage items caused by sedimentation, scouring or anchoring.

Disturbance to heritage sites and/or intrusions into sacred sites

Moderate Heritage EMF

Anchoring EMF

Aboriginal Heritage Management Plan [Ref A3]

Protected species

Physical interactions between vessels and marine megafauna

Injury or death of marine megafauna

Low Protected species EMF

Protected species

Unacceptable levels of underwater noise

Injury to marine fauna Low Nearshore underwater noise EMF

Mobilisation of vessels into NT coastal waters

Marine pests The discharge of ballast-water containing marine pests

The transfer of exotic marine pests due to presence on external structure of vessel (e.g. biofouling)

Loss of biodiversity, reduction in, or loss of, native species, reduction in fishery productivity

Moderate Nearshore Quarantine EMF

Pest animals The transfer of exotic terrestrial pests from vessel to shore (for example, via waste containers)

Loss of biodiversity, reduction in, or loss of, native species, reduction in agricultural productivity

Moderate Nearshore Quarantine EMF


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320


Management element

Rock placement and cable crossing construction

Protected species

Physical interactions between equipment and materials, and marine megafauna

Injury or death of marine megafauna

Low Protected Species EMF

Operations in the firing line on Semac 1

Waste Release of hazardous waste products, including chemical waste and metal swarth

Localised alteration of marine environment including nutrient enrichment and toxicity

Low Nearshore waste EMF

Pipelay by Semac-1

Oil spill Release of hydrocarbons from spill in open waters during Semac-1 refuelling or loss of fuel refuelling from collision of support vessel of up to 5 000 L

Direct mortality through toxic effects and physical coating

Sublethal effects through the disruption of physiological or behavioural processes

Degradation of habitat

Moderate Nearshore Spill prevention and response EMF

Company nearshore oil spill contingency plan (OSCP) [Ref A8]

Sensitive benthic habitats

Anchoring or anchor dragging over sensitive marine habitats outside of planned area of disturbance

Localised loss of benthic fauna and change to benthic habitat

Low Anchoring EMF

Non-aboriginal and Aboriginal Heritage

Misplacement of anchor and/or excessive anchor dragging

Damage to marine heritage sites.

Disturbance to Aboriginal heritage sites and/or intrusions into sacred sites

Low Anchoring EMF

Wet buckle operations (in the event of a wet buckle)

Emergency response-liquid discharges

Release of chemically treated fresh water at high pressure within NT coastal waters following a wet buckle incident

Localised, low level contamination of marine environment

Low Wet buckle EMF


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORKS

This chapter is divided into two sections: the onshore activities occurring within the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site; and the marine activities occurring within nearshore waters. Each section is further subdivided into sections addressing a specific environmental aspect, as follows:

Onshore: - cultural heritage management - flora management - fauna management - erosion and surface water runoff management - acid sulfate soil management - dust management - bushfire prevention - rehabilitation management - airborne noise management - quarantine and pest management - waste management - dangerous goods and hazardous materials management - spill prevention and response.

Nearshore: - heritage management - anchoring management - protected species management - underwater noise management - quarantine management - waste management - liquid discharge management - dangerous goods and hazardous materials management - spill prevention and response - wet buckle response management.

For each aspect listed above, an EMF is presented which comprises the following components in tabular format:

objectives, targets and indicators

management measures (including responsibilities, engineering controls, training and awareness, procedures and monitoring)

a Trigger, Action, Response Plan (TARP), defining the actions to be undertaken in the event that monitoring identifies a deviation from expected results.

Monitoring actions are further detailed in Chapter 9.

8.1 ONSHORE

8.1.1 Cultural heritage management

It is a legislative requirement and a GEP Project commitment to protect the known listed significant areas (as detailed in Section 6.5) and to protect any heritage finds (such as human remains and artefacts) identified during GEP Project operations.

Legislation in place to protect such sites includes:

Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Heritage Protection Act 1984 (Cwth)

Northern Territory Aboriginal Sacred Sites Act 1989 (NT)


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Aboriginal Sacred Sites Regulations (NT)

Heritage Act 2011 (NT).

All listed significant areas in the GEP Project region are previously disturbed with no cultural heritage sites identified. Given this, this EMF applies to the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site during all ground disturbing activities.

Company will manage Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal heritage issues in collaboration with the AAPA and the Heritage Branch of the NT DLPE. Additionally, Company will be working in cooperation with the Larrakia Advisory Committee (LAC) on all Aboriginal heritage matters.

Company has developed the following documents to detail how to appropriately manage operational risks for significant sites in or near the onshore area of the Ichthys Project, and Contractor (and its subcontractors) will comply with these documents:

Heritage Management Plan: Heritage Sites (Aboriginal and WWII) in the onshore development area and sacred sites in Darwin Harbour (HMP: A&WWII) [Ref A3].

Non-Aboriginal Heritage Management Plan (NAHMP): Nearshore Development Area [Ref A4].

As there are no known heritage sites within the GEP onshore site, the cultural heritage management focuses primarily on responding to the discovery of a potential heritage item in a manner that will maximise the retention of the cultural value.

The objectives, targets and indicators that have been established for the cultural heritage management are shown in Table 8-1. The management measures designed to drive achievement of these objectives, targets and key performance indicators (KPIs), are described in Table 8-2. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the cultural heritage TARP will be initiated (Table 8-3). The residual risk level identified for onshore heritage management is low.

Table 8-1 Cultural heritage objectives, targets and indicators

Objective Target KPI

Implement a controlled response to the discovery of previously unknown heritage items

100% compliance with CEMP in response to the discovery of heritage items

Number of reported non-conformances relating to the discovery of heritage items

Minimise any potential damage to items of cultural heritage significance

No damage to any item of cultural significance discovered during construction

Number of incident reports relating to damage of items of cultural significance

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of potential cultural heritage issues on the work site

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) to complete a site induction which will include information on the cultural values of the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site and heritage responsibilities

Induction presentation material and induction records

Heritage issues to be included in JSA/SWMS for activities involving ground disturbance.

Sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering heritage management


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-2 Cultural heritage environmental management measures

Management Action Reference Timing Responsibility

Induction and training

Heritage awareness training included as a part of inductions will include:

the cultural values of the site

the procedure in the event of the discovery of a new heritage site or a heritage site being damaged

the importance of not working outside the boundaries of the construction site.

Environmental compliance register item H1.1, H1.2, H1.3, H1.4, H1.5

Prior to mobilisation

Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Consideration of heritage risks will be included in JSA/SWMS and toolbox talks.

Environmental compliance register item 28.6

Prior to mobilisation and at all times

Subcontractor.

HSE Manager (Contractor).

Vegetation clearing and excavation works

Areas to be cleared will be clearly marked on the construction and design plans and these plans will be readily available to personnel.



Subcontractor. Darwin Site

Representative (Contractor).

Areas to be cleared will be pegged and clearly delineated using high-visibility flagging tape or a similar device, so that operators are aware of the site boundaries.


Prior to clearing activities



A Permit to Work system shall be followed prior to commencing vegetation clearance in order to clearly define permitted work areas and to avoid accidental disturbance of heritage sites.

Environmental Compliance register item 28.06

Prior to clearing activities and at all times

Subcontractor.

Darwin Site Representative (Contractor).

Responsive actions


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320


Any potential heritage items discovered during onshore operations will result in temporary suspension of the work by Contractor in the immediate vicinity. The procedure documented in the NAHMP [Ref A3] shall be followed:

The work supervisor will immediately notify the Contractor Darwin Site Representative, who will inform the Company’s Project Manager Construction as soon as is practicable.

If the remains are skeletal, the work supervisor will also immediately inform the NT Police Service (telephone 13 14 44) that skeletal remains have been found.

Company’s Project Manager Construction will arrange for an archaeologist to inspect and report on the site. The archaeologist, in the company of a minimum of two Larrakia heritage monitors, will inspect each newly discovered heritage object or site.

Work is not to recommence in close proximity to the site until a return to work has been authorised in writing by either the Heritage Branch of NT DLPE or Company’s Project Manager (Construction Darwin). In the case of skeletal remains, no further work in the immediate area is permitted until the express permission to do so, in writing, is granted by the NT Police Service and Company’s Project Manager (Construction Darwin).

NAHMP [Ref A3]

At all times All personnel.

Monitoring and Inspections

Clearing extents shall be inspected to confirm that works are consistent with any Permit to Work and that there is no unauthorised clearing outside permitted areas.

Good International Industry Practice (GIIP)

Daily during clearing activities

Subcontractor. Environmental

Specialist (Contractor).

Ongoing observations by personnel undertaking clearing activities to identify previously unidentified heritage items.

GIIP At all times All personnel


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Table 8-3 Cultural heritage TARP

Responsibility Normal situation Level 1 Level 2

No new discovery of culturally significant items during construction activities

Culturally significant item discovered during construction and controlled response is implemented

Culturally significant item damaged as a result of non-conformance to CEMP guidelines during construction activities

Site Custodian (Subcontractor or Contractor)

Undertake construction as planned.

Ongoing training and awareness.

Report finding to Contractor Darwin Site Representative.

Implement responsive actions as detailed in Table 8-2.

Report finding to Contractor Darwin Site Representative.


Raise an environmental incident report.

Undertake investigation into incident and cooperate with any regulatory investigations into incident.

Review practices and make changes to response to comply with response requirements.

Darwin Site Representative (Contractor)

Ongoing inspections and observations.

Report finding to Company.


Report incident to Company.


Participate in the incident investigation.

Environmental Specialist (Contractor)

Conduct inspections or audits to validate implementation of CEMP management measures.

Participate in the incident investigation and review of management measures.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.2 Flora management

Under the EIS [Ref A1] the entire GEP corridor area for Contractor SOW (marked by the blue lines in Figure 1-3 and Figure 3-4) has been approved for vegetation clearing at the Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach site. As a result of the site design only 8.0 ha of vegetation will be cleared of the pre-approved 10 ha area. The vegetation units to be cleared on this site are Eucalyptus woodlands (5.5 ha) and mangroves (2.5 ha) (refer to Section 6.3.1 for more information on vegetation types).

Table 8-4 provides the objectives, targets and performance indicators for flora management. Table 8-5 outlines management measures to minimise the localised reduction in flora biodiversity due to required clearing for the GEP construction. The management approach recognises that ongoing management will be required to ensure no disturbance occurs outside the nominated clearance area. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, flora management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-6). The residual risk associated with flora management is low.

Table 8-4 Flora management objectives, targets and indicators


Limit clearing to designated and approved areas

No clearing of vegetation outside of pre-approved areas

Number of reported incidents involving disturbance outside of pre-approved areas

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of flora management issues on the work site

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) to complete a site induction which includes information on the importance of protecting flora in the area


Flora issues to be included in JSA/SWMS for all relevant activities

Number of sign-off sheets for JSA/SWMS covering flora management


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-5 Flora impacts management framework



Vegetation clearance management will be included as part of the GEP Project inductions. Environmental compliance register item 28.06



(Contractor).

Daily pre-start meetings and JSA/SWMS will address vegetation clearance management actions for the SOW.



Subcontractor.


Pre vegetation clearance

Clearing will not exceed the area designated, which has been designed to be as small as practicable, in order to minimise the loss of monsoon vine thicket and cycads and mangroves.

Area to be cleared will be clearly marked to prevent clearance outside the designated area.

Environmental compliance register item 14.08 and 14.09




Areas to be cleared will be clearly marked on the construction and design plans and these plans will be readily available to personnel.



Subcontractor.


A minimum buffer zone of 5 m will be maintained within the permitted corridor area, along the perimeter, to minimise potential impact to neighbouring vegetation from clearing activities.

GIIP At all times Subcontractor. Environmental


Areas to be cleared will be pegged and clearly delineated using high-visibility flagging tape or a similar device, so that operators are aware of the site boundaries.

Land clearing guidelines (NT) [Ref D7]






F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320


A Permit to Work system shall be followed prior to commencing vegetation clearance in order to clearly define permitted work areas.





Vegetation clearing

Mangroves will be cleared in such a way that minimises disturbance of the root system (such as cutting off the mangroves at root level or pushing the vegetation over).



If it is determined that specimens of the cycad, Cycas armstrongii, are to be moved off site and used for commercial purposes, a permit under the Territory Parks and Wildlife Conservation Act will be applied for and obtained prior to this being undertaken.

Territory Parks and Wildlife Conservation Act




Post vegetation clearing

A clearing register will be maintained to record location and amount of cleared areas. Environmental compliance register item 14.02

During and following clearing activities



Loose cleared vegetation shall be mulched and stockpiled on site boundaries (outside the intertidal zone) or off site. Where possible, the mulch will be used for both rehabilitation and soil stabilisation to prevent erosion.





Unused mulched vegetation will be disposed of offsite by a licensed contractor. No stockpiled vegetation will be burned.





Rehabilitation

Rehabilitation activities will be undertaken in accordance with the Rehabilitation management EMF in Section 8.1.13.

See Section 8.1.13 See Section 8.1.13

See Section 8.1.13


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320



Clearing extents shall be inspected to confirm that works are consistent with any Permit to Work and that there is no unauthorised clearing outside permitted areas.

GIIP Daily during clearing activities



Contractor will provide the clearing register to Company at the completion of clearing activities. GIIP On completion of clearing




F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Table 8-6 Flora management TARP


Vegetation cleared within pre-approved area

Vegetation cleared outside of pre-defined areas but within the permitted corridor area

Vegetation clearing beyond permitted corridor area

Subcontractor Undertake clearing as planned.

Continue to implement CEMP management measures.

Report incident to Contractor Darwin Site Representative.





Stop work until approval given by Contractor.




Undertake rehabilitation.

Darwin Site Representative

(Contractor)


Report incident to Company as part of standard environmental reporting.

Participate in the investigation and review of management measures.

Follow-up inspections and audits.

Report incident immediately to Company.



Facilitate any external investigations or audits.





F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.3 Fauna management

Protected native fauna species (Section 6.3.2) could potentially occur in and around the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site. Vehicle movements, vegetation clearing and major earthworks, such as the onshore trenching, may pose potential risks to terrestrial fauna such as:

removal of habitat causing displacement

potential injury due to physical interactions with vehicles or equipment

entrapment within trenches.

Table 8-7 provides the objectives, targets and performance indicators for fauna management. Table 8-8 presents the management measures (in addition to those covered in Table 8-5) to minimise impacts to terrestrial fauna from vehicle movements, vegetation clearing and trenching activities. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the fauna management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-9). The residual risk level identified for fauna management is low.

Table 8-7 Fauna management objectives, targets and indicators


Avoid disturbance to fauna outside of pre-approved vegetation clearance areas

Zero incidents of unauthorised clearing and disturbance

Number of reported incidents involving disturbance outside of pre-approved areas

Minimise the risk of injury or death to native fauna resulting from vegetation clearing and/or vehicle strikes

All clearing activities are

undertaken in compliance

with the activity’s permit-to-work requirements

Number of occurrences of clearing activities that contravene that activity’s specific permit-to-work

No incidents of native fauna injuries/deaths attributable to vehicle strikes

Number of reported incidents of native fauna injuries/deaths attributable to vehicle strikes

Avoid injury or death to

native fauna resulting from

accidental entrapment

Zero incidents of death or injury to native fauna resulting from accidental entrapment

Number of reported incidents relating to death or injuries of native fauna attributable to accidental entrapment

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of fauna management issues on the work site

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) to complete a site induction which includes information on the importance of protecting fauna in the area


Fauna management to be included in JSA/SWMS for all clearing and excavation activities

Number of sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering fauna management


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-8 Fauna management measures



Management of risk to fauna will be included as part of the GEP Project inductions. GIIP Prior to mobilisation


(Contractor).

Daily pre-start meetings and or JSA/SWMS will address management of fauna issues as necessary. GIIP Prior to mobilisation and at all times

Subcontractor.


Vegetation clearing

A fauna spotter will conduct a fauna survey immediately prior to clearing activities commencing.

Fauna will be relocated away from the site prior to clearing in the area.

GIIP Prior to clearing Subcontractor.


Vehicle movements

All disturbances including personnel and vehicle movements will be contained within the designated onshore development area.


At all times All personnel Darwin Site


Restricted speed limits for vehicles will be implemented (in accordance with site safety rules), sign-posted and enforced on all roads throughout the GEP area to minimise the risk of animals being hit.

GIIP At all times All personnel / HSE Manager (Contractor).

Waste management on site

Putrescible wastes will be stored in secure bins (with lids) and transported off site regularly for disposal to minimise risk of attracting fauna.


At all times All personnel / HSE Manager (Contractor).

Trenching activities

High-risk entrapment areas will be constructed with sloping egress ramps to allow trapped animals to escape, if applicable.


At all times All personnel Darwin Site



F281-AH-PLN-10011 Rev. 2

of 320


Uninjured trapped fauna will be captured and released by a licensed contractor. GIIP At all times All personnel Darwin Site



Daily targeted inspections will be conducted before construction activities commence in locations of “high-risk” entrapment areas.


Daily All personnel Darwin


Trenches/excavations will be visually checked for fauna prior to backfilling. Environmental compliance register item 15.03

Prior to backfilling



Pre-start checks will include looking for fauna taking cover from the heat under vehicles and construction plant and equipment.

GIIP Daily, prior to start of site activities

All personnel Darwin Site


Inspections will be carried out to check and record the integrity of the food waste containers for signs of any breach by native or feral animals.

GIIP Daily All personnel Darwin Site



F281-AH-PLN-10011 Rev. 2

of 320

Table 8-9 Fauna management TARP


No fauna observed during clearing and earthworks and no vehicle collisions.

Native mammals, reptiles or birds in the path of construction activities (e.g. vegetation clearing or trench excavation). No injury or death to the fauna results.

Native mammals, reptiles or birds injured or killed during construction activities.


Continue to undertake pre-clearance fauna surveys and ensure procedures are followed to minimise risk of impact on fauna.

Stop the activities concerned until the area is clear of fauna.

Contact a licensed animal carer or handler if the animal is injured.


Contact a licensed animal handler if the animal is injured.

Dispose of dead animal at an approved disposal location.

Report as an environmental incident.

Investigate incident and review management actions implemented to reduce the risk of repeat incidents.


Continue to undertake regular inspections.

Conduct inspections to validate implementation of CEMP management measures.

Report incidents to Company.

Participate in inspections or audits.

HSE Manager (Contractor) Incorporate relevant information regarding fauna sightings and incidents into inductions, pre-start meetings and JSA/SWMS.

Incorporate relevant information regarding fauna sightings and incidents into inductions, pre-start meetings and JSA/SWMS.

Environmental Specialist (Contractor) Conduct inspections or audits to validate implementation of CEMP management measures.


Construction Environmental Management Plan Ichthys Project - Gas Exp

F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.4 Erosion and sediment control

Erosion and the subsequent release of sediment can result in a reduction in nearshore water quality due to increased sediment load from turbid surface-water runoff. High levels of water turbidity may result in increased sedimentation on intertidal and benthic habitats, and reduced levels of light availability in the marine environment, which may adversely impact habitats of listed marine species. Erosion risk is dependent on the likelihood and intensity of expected rainfall, the estimated rate of soil loss and the anticipated disturbance period.

The GEP construction works will be designed to minimise construction footprint in order to minimise soil disturbance. The risk that the erosion hazard results in environmental harm due to disturbance activities occurring for the GEP project has been assessed according to International Erosion Control Association (IECA) 2008 guidelines [Ref D3], and a Certified Erosion Sediment Control Plan has been developed (see Appendix D for certificate). The management outlined in this CEMP is consistent with the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan (ESCP).

This assessment is based on the Slope and Rainfall Erosivity Erosion Hazard Table, sourced from the Sunshine Coast Regional Council Guidelines [Ref D19] (Table 6-2). The assessment took into account the whole site (both intertidal and non-intertidal areas, and all types of soil detailed in Section 6.3.4). An erosion risk was only identified for the area of the site above the HAT (i.e., the woodland area):

A very low to low hazard exists for land based disturbance activities which within the dry season between May and September (Table 8-10)

a high to extreme hazard exists for land based disturbance activities within the wet season between October and April (Table 8-10).

Table 8-10 Erosion hazard based on monthly rainfall erosivity (Darwin)

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

Extreme Extreme Extreme High Low Very Low

Very Low

Very Low

Very Low

High High Extreme

Source: IECA 2008 [Ref D3], Table E2 (based on an R factor of 13,738)

Based on calculations of potential erosion risk, the assessment concluded that Type 2 sediment control devices will be sufficient to manage the predicted erosion on the Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach site. For all catchments other than the ASS treatment pad and stockpile area, the Type 2 devices will be rock filter dams. Within the ASS treatment pad and stockpile area, all surface water and/or leachate will be drain into a retention basin. The locations of the Type 2 devices (rock filter dams and the retention basin) and further details on their design are provided in Appendix E.

Diversion drains will be located along the down gradient perimeter of each catchment, as shown in Figure 8-1. These drains will collect and concentrate sheet flow to the rock filter dams or ASS retention basin (in the case of the ASS treatment pad and stockpile area). All diversion drains will be temporary structures with an anticipated design life of less than 24 months. Temporary drain structures will be designed for a 1 in 5 year design storm. The diversion drains within the ASS treatment pad and stockpile area will be designed for a 1 in 20 year storm event as this area will be present on site for a shorter period.

A rock filter dam will installed at the downstream end of the clean water diversion bund to the north of the temporary access road. The rock filter dam will be installed to ensure concentrated flows do not create an erosion risk and will comply with IECA 2008 Guidelines [Ref D3].The retention basin is designed to have the capacity to hold up to 85% of the treatment pad and stockpile area runoff from a one in one year Average Recurrence Interval (ARI), 120 hour storm event (in accordance with IECA guidelines for a sensitive receiving environment). The retention basin volume calculations assume that five days or less is required from the


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

commencement of a rainfall event to achieve effective, settling, flocculation (where required) and discharge of the surface water.

Discharge of untreated stormwater (i.e., an uncontrolled discharge) is only permitted when the storm event exceeds the design criteria of the retention basins and other controls in accordance with the IECA 2008 Guidelines [Ref D3]. Uncontaminated water will be disposed of via evaporation and/or by controlled discharge to Darwin Harbour via the installed sediment and erosion control / surface water drainage system. Any sediment extracted from this basin will be placed on the ASS treatment pads, tested, and treated if necessary prior to being stored in the stockpile area.

As soil disturbance is unavoidable within the intertidal zone (< HAT), erosion control rather than sediment control shall be the focus to minimise the movement of sediment within the work area. Erosion control will involve construction of the temporary work road and minimisation of non-essential traffic within the tidal area. The installation of two 12.5 m wing walls either side of the cofferdam will aid in mitigating potential erosion impacts around the base of the cofferdam as a result of tidal movements. In addition, if scouring occurs in the base of the excavated trench a rock layer will be installed as a control measure.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 8-1 Site drainage plan

Figure Note: A rock filter dam will be installed at the downstream end of the clean water diversion bund, north of the temporary access road (installed in accordance with the ESCP guidelines)


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

The objectives, targets and indicators that have been established for the surface water runoff and sediment management are shown in Table 8-11. The management measures designed to drive achievement of these performance objectives, targets and indictors, are described in Table 8-12. The outcome of the IECA assessment was a requirement to produce an ESCP, which has been approved by a Certified Professional Erosion and Sediment Control (CPESC) [Ref C2]. The mitigation measures detailed within this CEMP are consistent with the Certified ESCP.

Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the TARP will be initiated (Table 8-13 and Table 8-14).The residual risk identified for sediment and erosion control is moderate.

Table 8-11 Objectives, targets and indicators for erosion and sediment control

Objectives Targets KPI

Minimise erosion onsite and in immediate surroundings.

Zero incident reports for soil erosion onsite and immediate surroundings.

Incident reports for soil erosion

Minimise transport of sediment offsite.

All controlled discharges from PASS retention basin will be released within discharge criteria up to design (major) storm event1.

Quality of water discharged from retention basin

Sediment level within retention basin will be maintained lower than 50%.

Inspection and maintenance reports for the retention basin

Ensure onsite sediment controls are effectively maintained.

Sediment to be removed from rock filter dams prior to one third (1/3) of the design volume being reached.

Rock filter dams inspection and maintenance reports

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of erosion and sediment control management.

All onshore personnel will attend a site induction which will include information on erosion and sediment control.

Records of personnel attendance and induction content

Content on erosion and sediment control (ESC) to be included in JSA/SWMS for vegetation clearing and earthworks.

Number of sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering erosion and sediment control

1 The design of the retention basin is intended to capture all of the runoff from the treatment pad up to 85% of a design event of a 1 in 1 year Average Recurrence Interval (ARI), 120 hour storm event. Discharge of untreated stormwater (i.e., an uncontrolled discharge) is only permitted when the storm event exceeds the design criteria of the retention basins and other controls in accordance with the IECA 2008 Guidelines.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-12 Erosion and sediment control management

Management Action Reference Timing (Frequency, if applicable)

Responsibility


An ESC awareness programme will be implemented as part of the site induction.

The induction will include the following specific components:

awareness of surface water and erosion management that will be undertaken on site

locations of outfall areas and erosion risk areas

the obligation for all personnel to report signs of erosion, or erosion and sediment control incidents to their supervisor.

Contractor Environmental Policy

Contractor HSE Policy

Before commencement

Subcontractor. HSE Manager (Contractor).

Regular reinforcement of the aspects listed above to personnel, through toolbox talks, pre-start meetings and SWMS/JSA.

GIIP Throughout works Subcontractor. HSE Manager (Contractor).

Design and planning

An ESCP has been prepared and involve an erosion risk assessment to manage and minimise erosion during the GEP construction works. The ESCP has been endorsed by a CPESC.

IECA 2008 guidelines [Ref D5]

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2]

Prior to works commencing

Subcontractor Environmental Specialist

(Contractor).

Risk assessments have been completed prior to the commencement of the wet season to assess the condition of the site, e.g. identification of flow paths, suitable stockpile locations, existing soil cover type, and soil stability and to evaluate the effectiveness of existing ESC devices and ensure these are sufficient for the tropical conditions experienced within the region.

The risk assessments will be reviewed during works to allow for the ongoing identification of specific measures which need to be implemented for the ongoing protection of the surrounding environment. The ESCP and CEMP will be updated (if required). Updates are to be re-endorsed by the CPESC with associated calculations and CPESC endorsement letter.

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] During the wet season

Subcontractor. Environmental Specialist

(Contractor).

Consideration will be given to erosion risk and monthly rainfall probabilities when planning construction works. As clearing and earthworks are required to be undertaken during the wet season, adequate erosion and sedimentation control measures will be implemented to minimise impacts to the receiving environment.


Environmental Commitment Register Item 11.06


Subcontractor. Darwin Site Representative

(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Responsibility

The design of retention basin is intended to capture all of the runoff from the treatment pad up to 85% of a design event of a 1 in 1 year ARI, 120 hour storm event. The settling zone is based on a five day rainfall depth (46.2 mm), which assumes that five days or less is required from the commencement of a rainfall event to achieve effective, settling, flocculation (where required) and discharge of the surface water.

Discharge of untreated stormwater (i.e., an uncontrolled discharge) is only permitted when the storm event exceeds the design criteria of the retention basins and other controls in accordance with the IECA 2008 Guidelines.

GEP ESCP Prior to commencement

Subcontractor Darwin Site Representative

(Contractor).

During the design of erosion and sediment control structures, consideration of the potential storm surge will be given in regards to placement and suitability of a structure in a given area.

IECA 2008 guidelines [Ref D3]


Subcontractor.


Earthworks will be undertaken in stages, where practicable, to minimise the area of soil exposed to wind and rainfall.

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] Prior to works commencing


(Contractor).

Erosion and sediment control measures will be installed prior to and during the construction phase in accordance with the approved ESCP and the guidelines in IECA 2008. All ESC devices will be implemented prior to the commencement of work (as per the ESCP).


Subcontractor.


The site will be delineated prior to works commencing and construction activities will not occur outside of the designated work area.



(Contractor).

To reduce the volume of captured storm/construction water being discharged from the site to the receiving environment, the water will be reused for dust suppression and other construction needs when water quality is confirmed as suitable and water is required.


Subcontractor.


The ESCP and CEMP will be updated to reflect progressive work phases and potential risk, when applicable.

Contractor and Company will be notified of changes to the ESCP. All ESCP updates are to be re-endorsed by the CPESC with associated calculations and CPESC endorsement letter.

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] During works Subcontractor. Environmental Specialist

(Contractor).

Surface-water drains and discharge points throughout the onshore development area are designed to minimise erosion by the use of rock beaching, geotextile, flow velocity reduction etc. Refer to Appendix E.


Prior to commencement


(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Responsibility

During Construction

Vegetation clearing and ground stabilisation will be conducted in a staged manner to minimise the period cleared areas that are at risk of erosion and to achieve compliance with the ESCP requirements. The planned methodology involves:

Vegetation clearing (to existing surface level). No grubbing (root-mass removal) to keep topsoil layer as intact as possible.

On completion of clearing each section, geotextile will be installed over the entire cleared area.

Imported rock fill will placed on top of the geotextile and compacted to engineering specifications.

Boundary diversion drains / rock filter dams / mulch banks etc. will be installed as per ESCP design concurrently with the phased clearing / stabilisation activities.

The clearing and ground stabilisation of each section will be completed within 10 days to ensure compliance with the ESCP.

Landfall Preparation and Temporary Works Procedure [Ref B16]

During clearing works

Subcontractor

If soil erosion is evident, exposed surfaces at the affected area will be stabilised with whatever means is considered practicable and satisfactory (e.g. matting, soil stabiliser, mulching etc.)



During works Subcontractor. Darwin Site Representative

(Contractor).

If scouring occurs in the base of the excavated trench a rock layer to be installed as a control measure.

GIIP During works Subcontractor

All ESC devices are to be maintained in accordance with this CEMP. Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2]


During works Subcontractor Site. Supervisor.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Responsibility

Stockpiles will be managed according to the following:

During the wet season long term stockpiles will have covers if they are inactive for >30 days (April to September), >10 days (October to November and >5 days (December to March).

Multiple handling of soil or rock materials will be minimised.

Diversion channels will be installed up-gradient and mulch berms installed down-gradient of all stockpiles.

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] During works Subcontractor Site. Supervisor.


A buffer distance of 30 m will be maintained between ASS treatment pads/stockpiles and the nearest water body (Darwin Harbour).

Section 8.1.9.1 During shore approach works


(Contractor).

Temporary site roads will be maintained as required.

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] During works Subcontractor. Darwin Site Representative

(Contractor).

Vehicle movements within the intertidal area will be minimised.

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] During works Subcontractor.


A shakedown pad installed at the site entry/exit will minimise soil material being tracked off site.


(Contractor).

If soil material is observed being tracked off site an investigation into the cause will be conducted and an assessment for the need for increased mitigation measures will be conducted.

Should soil material be tracked into a public highway, this will be cleaned by means of a road sweeper.


(Contractor).

If large plumes of dust are observed, dust suppression measures will be implemented. This may include but not be limited to the use of water trucks.


(Contractor).

Water captured within the PASS retention basin will only be discharged onto salt flat/ into the environment if water quality discharge criteria is met (refer to Table 9-2).


Environmental Specialist (Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Responsibility

Graded soil areas will be mechanically compacted as soon as practicable before installation of structures to minimise the potential for erosion.


(Contractor).

Roof catchments of all temporary infrastructures will be directed to diversion drains by means of natural gradient.



The temporary intertidal work road proposed to be constructed above HAT and will be geofabric/filler rock lined. Non-essential traffic will be minimised within the tidal area. The end of this road will be constructed in between two rows of sheet piles.


(Contractor).

Inspections / Monitoring / Reporting

ESC devices will be inspected daily and immediately after a major rainfall event to ensure they are in good working order and to perform maintenance (e.g. sediment removal) if required.

The storage capacity of the retention basin and rock filter dams will be restored as necessary subject to daily inspections and when weather conditions permit, in accordance with the IECA (2008) guidelines [Ref D3]:

Sediment devices (e.g., rock filter dams) will be emptied if 1/3 of their capacity is reached.

The sediment storage capacity within the retention basin will be maintained at <50%.

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] Daily inspections during wet season.

Weekly inspections, with additional inspections when rainfall is >10 mm / 24 hours during the dry season


(Contractor).

A sediment level marker will be installed with the PASS retention basin. During rain periods the retention basin will be continually monitored to ensure water level is <2/3 capacity of the basin.

If no further rain is forecast the captured water may be left to settle/infiltrate/evaporate and if required dewatered offsite once water quality criteria are met (documented in Table 9-2); or if further rain is forecast and the water levels can reasonably be expected to reach 2/3 capacity of the retention basin, subcontractor test water quality and, if criteria are met, discharge water off site.




(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Responsibility

Site inspections using checklist to identify areas of concern will be conducted. Areas of concern will be recorded appropriately actioned and a completion date recorded.




(Contractor).

Visual monitoring of site for evidence of soil erosion. Indicators include:

degradation of surface water quality onsite, in particular in areas adjacent to rock filter dams

scouring in drains

build-up of sediment in sediment and erosion control devices

unplanned discharge from the retention basin (not including uncontrolled discharges in a storm event outside of design capacity)

damaged or failed erosion control devices.



Subcontractor.


Monitoring of roads outside of site boundary for entrainment of sediment from site. Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] Daily inspections during wet season.



(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Responsibility

Monitoring of pH and turbidity of PASS retention basin water captured on site prior to discharge off site. Monitoring will be conducted using calibrated hand held monitoring devices. All monitoring data and/or decisions to release will be recorded and documented.




(Contractor).

All sediment, erosion and surface water quality incidents will be reported in accordance with the project reporting protocol. Examples of incidents to report include:

dewatering of surface water, non-compliance of the dewatering quality criteria

scouring in drains

build-up of sediment in sediment control devices in excess of 50% of their capacity is reached

unplanned discharge from the retention basin (not including uncontrolled discharges in a storm event outside of design capacity)

damaged or failed erosion control devices.

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] As required All personnel.

Notification to Company of possible environmental nuisance on receipt of three or more dust complaints in any 24 hour period are to be recorded in a Complaints Register and Company notified immediately.

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] As required Subcontractor. Darwin Site Representative

(Contractor).

Notification to Darwin Site Manager that environmental harm is occurring or likely to occur (required under the Waste Management and Pollution Control Act - the ‘Duty to Notify’).

Ichthys GEP ESCP [Ref C2] As required All personnel.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-13 Retention basin sediment control TARP


Sediment level within retention basin remains <50% of the capacity.

Sediment level exceeds 50% of the capacity of the retention basin (but no overflow has occurred).

Sediment level exceeds 50% of the capacity of the retention basin and overflow has occurred during a storm event (for storm events within retention basin design specifications).

Subcontractor Continue to implement management measures and monitoring actions.

Implement clean out procedures for the retention basin.



Undertake investigation into incident to identify root cause.

Review management measures and modify accordingly.

Continue to monitor sediment level daily.

Implement clean out procedures for the retention basin.



Undertake investigation into incident to identify root cause and potential environmental impact.

Review practices and management measures. Modify measures accordingly and re-train personnel as necessary.

Review the need for additional monitoring such as environmental impact monitoring.


Continue to implement site inspections as required.



Notify Company within 12 hours and report incident to Company as part of standard environmental reporting.



Follow-up inspections and audits. Review practices and management measures.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-14 Rock filter sediment control TARP


Sediment within rock filter dams is below one third of the design volume

Inspection or audit identified sediment level of rock filter dam exceeds one third of its capacity

Inspection or audit identifies that the sediment level of rock filter dam exceeds one third of its capacity on multiple (>1) occasions

Site custodian Continue to implement management measures and monitoring actions

Implement immediate clean out of the rock filter dams.


Raise an environmental incident report

Investigate root cause and potential environmental impact.

Review management measures and modify accordingly.

Continue to monitor sediment level as required (check consistency with table).

Implement immediate clean out procedures for rock filter dams.



Carry out review of existing sediment and erosion control measures upstream of rock filter dams in consultation with an erosion and sediment control specialist.

Retrain personnel and raise awareness as necessary.


Continue to implement site inspections as required




Facilitate the follow up site inspection.


Participate in the incident investigation and review of existing sediment and erosion control measures.

Conduct follow up site inspection.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.5 Acid sulfate soil management The presence of acid sulphate soil (ASS) may become an environmental issue when the soil is exposed to oxygen for a prolonged period of time. This exposure can be caused in the following ways:

removal of vegetation in the intertidal zone resulting in exposure and disturbance of surface soils

excavation of the trench resulting in:

- exposure of the excavated trench base and trench batters / walls to air

- drawdown of the groundwater table from trenching activities

- exposure of excavated material to air.

Surface water that has been exposed to ASS may be more acidic and have higher heavy metal concentrations. If discharged off site, this water may have detrimental effects on pH levels and heavy metal concentrations of surrounding surface water. Some heavy metals can be toxic to flora and fauna depending on their concentration and bio-availability.

8.1.6 Vegetation clearance

The clearance of vegetation may result in ground disturbance. As no work roads will be present during this stage, the top soil may be disturbed when clearing machinery traverse from the woodland to the mangrove area and through the mangrove area. Although the likelihood of PASS presence in the top soil in the salt flat area is relatively low, there is a risk of prolonged exposure of disturbed top soil to the air in this area during the vegetation clearance period. Potentially disturbed top soil in the mangrove area, which is located below mean sea level, will be inundated daily by tides which will neutralise any acid released from disturbed soils (see Table 3-4).

A number of management measures to reduce the likelihood of soil disturbance and exposure time are detailed in Table 8-17. The residual risk of impacts resulting from ASS disturbance during vegetation clearance is low.

8.1.7 Acidification of soils adjacent to the trench

Excavation of the trench below the groundwater table would decrease the hydraulic head (pressure) in the trench causing groundwater from nearby soil to drain into the trench. Drainage of groundwater creates a depression of the groundwater table near the trench and some oxygen from the overlying soil and atmosphere would be drawn into the soil. Any PASS adjacent to the trench may therefore become oxidised and generate acid.

The amount and rate of oxygen that is drawn into the soil depends on the particle size distribution of the soil. Fine grained soils hold water such that little water drains when the groundwater table drops while in coarse grained soil water drains more freely from the pores. Even above the groundwater table, most of the pore spaces are filled with water, but the pressure is negative due to capillary suction. The specific yield, which represents the percentage of water in the filled pores that drains from a soil under the forces of gravity, is typically 2% for clay and 8% for silt. Particle size distribution analysis of three samples collected from BH03 and BH04 during the geotechnical investigation indicated that the soil contains at least 30% silt and clay and descriptions of samples collected during the ASS investigation suggest the samples contain significant silt and clay content [Ref B4].

It is expected that the drainable portion of the porosity of the silty clay along the proposed excavation transect is 5-10%. More than 90% of the soil water is therefore expected to be retained and only a small portion of the pores would allow oxygen to infiltrate. The drained pores would preferentially be the coarsest pores of the shallow soil which was observed to contain organic matter. Degradation of organic matter is expected to consume oxygen and limit potential oxidation of sulfides.

While the residual risk of acid generation in the soils adjacent to the trench is considered low, monitoring will be implemented facilitate adaptive management of this risk (as detailed in Table 8-17 and Chapter 9).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

The extent of tidal fluctuations of the groundwater table is not known but is expected to be limited given the low hydraulic conductivity of the fine grained soil. Tides are not expected to influence potential acid generation in soils neighbouring the trench.

8.1.8 Acidification of the trench sides During excavation of the trench the freshly exposed surface may react with oxygen in the atmosphere. The thickness of the reactive zone will depend on the evaporation rate and on the duration of exposure to the atmosphere.

A tidal assessment has been performed using predicted tidal levels and is detailed in Section 3.4.1.3. The entire trench bottom is flooded on a daily basis and approximately 80% of trench profile will be inundated on a weekly basis.

The risk of acid generation on the trench walls for the 500 m closest to LAT considered negligible, due to the presence of the cofferdam walls minimising vertical side exposure and the frequency of the tidal flushing (see Table 3-4).

Within the 500 m of the trench furthest from LAT, where open trenching will be used, there is a risk of acid generation on the trench walls. However, only a small proportion of the trench will be exposed to the atmosphere for long enough periods to allow for oxidisation and regular dilution of any acid generated on the trench walls will occur due to tidal inundation.

An Acid Sulphate Soils Management Plan (ASSMP; Ref C3) has been developed which outlines detailed ASS verification testing, treatment and storage management procedures in accordance with the guidelines developed for Queensland [Ref D4 and Ref D9]. These guidelines are used in the absence of specific legislation and guidance for the management of PASS in the Northern Territory. The purpose of the Queensland guidelines is to provide technical and procedural advice to avoid environmental harm and to assist in achieving best practice environmental management in areas underlain by PASS.

8.1.9 Excavated material

All excavated material will be tested for the presence of AASS or PASS by means of field testing and visual observations of indicators as shown in Figure 8-2 (details of visual indicators will be described in an acid sulfate soils verification procedure). All testing will be done in accordance with Guidelines for Sampling and Analysis of Lowland Acid Sulfate Soils [Ref D20]. All materials identified as AASS or PASS will be transferred to a bunded ASS treatment pad where the material will be neutralised and retested to confirm successful neutralisation before it is temporarily stored in a designated area. This field testing will also verify the required liming rates. Liming rates will be calculated in accordance with the QASSIT guidelines [Ref D4], and full details are provided in Appendix F.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 8-2 PASS management flowchart

Identification of ASS Material:

Field testing & visual observation

YES NO

Trench excavation

Excavate and transfer

material to stockpile

Keep mangrove and salt flat

material separate

Transfer material to treatment

pad

Keep mangrove and salt flat

material separate

Treatment of material

Field test

pHF/pHFOX

Material neutralised?NO

YES

Verification test

external laboratory

Stockpile of neutralised material

Neutralised material used for

backfill of trench

YES

Stockpile of non‐ASS material


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.9.1 Design of the treatment pad and stockpile area

The design of the treatment pad, retention basin and storage area will be designed to meet QASSIT (2002) guidelines [Ref D4], IECA (2008) guidelines [Ref D3] and approved by a CPESC as part of an ESCP (see Appendix D for certificate).

The ASS treatment pad and stockpile area (the location of which is shown in Figure 3-3) will be constructed in accordance with the following requirements:

ASS treatment pad will hold up to 800 m3 of material (equal to the maximum daily production) subject to final design considerations correlated with anticipated production rates.

The ASS stockpile area will be designed to hold a maximum of 4 days of untreated PASS/ASS material.

The treatment pad will receive the first load of ASS material from excavation works. This soil will be placed in strips of approximately 0.5 m thick to facilitate drying, weather depending. However, if experience shows that neutralisation can be obtained with thicker layers, the layer thickness may be adjusted. During extreme wet conditions, thinner layers will be applied to allow for sufficient mixing of the lime with the soil. In addition, during these wet periods, sufficient ag lime will be added and further mixing will occur to ensure that homogenisation of the ag lime and ASS material is achieved.

A buffer distance of 30 m will be maintained between ASS treatment pad and stockpile area, and the nearest water body (Darwin Harbour).

Bund walls and diversion channels will be constructed around the entire perimeter of the treatment pad and stockpile area to prevent uncontaminated surface run-on from entering the treatment area. Any leachate or incidental rainfall will be contained within the treatment pad and stockpile area and diverted to a retention basin. Materials used to construct the bunds will be clay materials (sourced from on site or purchased, e.g. bentonite) and free from acid sulfate material.

A layer of compacted non-ASS clayey material (0.3–0.5 m thick) will be placed on the surface of the ASS treatment pad and stockpile area. This will restrict infiltration of leachate or surface water.

A guard layer of neutralising agent (ag lime) will then be spread on top of this clay layer, for the entire ASS treatment pad and stockpile area. This is a precautionary measure to neutralise any acidic leachate from ASS that have not been fully neutralised.

A schematic cross-section of the treatment pad is presented in Figure 8-3.

The rate of neutralising agent used in the guard layer will be based on the QASSIT guidelines [Ref D4]. The rate will be calculated using the maximum potential acidity observed in the trench profile and include a safety factor of 2.5. The liming rate will differ for each zone (treatment pad, storage of untreated material and storage of treated material) depending on the fill height. Appendix F details the full calculation to determine the amount of ag lime to be used.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 8-3 Cross-section of the treatment pad

8.1.9.2 Surface water/leachate diversion drains and retention basin

The design criteria relevant to managing the risk of overflow and sedimentation of the surface water/leachate diversion drains and retention basin are detailed in Section 8.1.4 (ESC). This section covers the controlled discharge of water from the retention basin and managing the risk of ASS leachate contamination.

Sampling of the retention basin water will be conducted to monitor water quality. This sampling will be used to determine the need for any neutralisation of any acidic leachate in the retention basin. There are a range of neutralisation products available that can be used to treat acid waters. The rate of product application is carefully calculated to avoid the possibility of ‘over application’ (i.e. making water too alkaline) [Ref D3].

8.1.10 Environmental management framework

The objectives, targets and indicators that have been established for the management of PASS risks are shown in Table 8-15. The management measures designed to drive achievement of these performance objectives, targets and indictors, are described in Table 8-16, Table 8-17 and Table 8-18.

Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the TARP will be initiated (Table 8-19, Table 8-20, Table 8-21, Table 8-22 and Table 8-23).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-15 ASS trench work management objectives, targets and indicators


Minimise disturbance of ASS through planning and design of trenching activities.

Zero incidents of ASS disturbance beyond the designated footprint.

Number of incident reports and the area and quantity of disturbance outside the designated disturbance footprint.

Handle and dispose of all excavated ASS in accordance with agreed management strategies.

Zero incidents of excavated ASS not handled or disposed of in accordance with the agreed management strategies.

Quantitative records of ASS removal to approved disposal facilities or locations

Minimise the potential for acidification of trench liquid Discharges.

Maintain trench seawater pH between 6 - 8.5.

pH records from trench discharge monitoring.

Minimise changes in groundwater quality in areas adjacent to the trench and ASS Treatment Pad, during trenching activities.

No change in pH outside of the 20th – 80th percentile range of concurrently measured control locations.

pH records from groundwater monitoring.

Minimise the disturbance to and alteration of mangrove communities as a result of disturbance to ASS.

Less than 20% decline in mangrove health.

Monitoring of mangrove health parameters such as canopy cover, sedimentation rate, and tree condition.

Discharges from retention basin to the surface water drainage system meet criteria.

Zero incidents of controlled discharges from retention basin exceeding discharge criteria.

Water quality and discharge records from retention basin monitoring.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-16 General ASS management measures



All relevant personnel will be required to attend pre-mobilisation induction and relevant training modules, covering the following specific components for ASS management:

description of ASS and the objectives relating to ASS management

locations of areas where ASS is likely or known to occur

awareness of ASS soil sampling and treatment and disposal activities that will be undertaken on site to manage ASS

the obligation to report suspected ASS material to supervisor.

The principal objective of these induction and training modules is to ensure that personnel are provided with the necessary knowledge, skill sets and attitude to perform their work activities in a manner which minimises the potential for harm to themselves, their co-workers and impacts to the environment.

Company Environmental Policy

Contractor HSE Policy

ASSMP [Ref C3]


HSE Manager. Subcontractor.

Table 8-17 Vegetation clearing and trench excavation ASS management measures


Planning and design

An ASSMP has been developed to cover work procedures for all relevant activities detailed in Section 8.1.5 of this CEMP.

GIIP

ASSMP [Ref C3]




Excavation of trench will be scheduled as close as possible to the pipe pull activities in order to have the trench exposed for the shortest practicable period of time only.

GIIP

ASSMP [Ref C3]


Project Manager Onshore / Nearshore (Contractor).

The following construction methods will be selected to avoid and/or minimise ASS disturbance:

installation of cofferdam to minimise the volume of disturbed soils and stabilise the trench walls

installation of work road along entire trench to minimise soil disturbance

optimisation of trench profile in salt flat (slopes as steep as possible) to minimise the volume of disturbed soils.

GIIP

ASSMP [Ref C3]





F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


ASS distribution, depths and neutralisation requirements/liming rates will be indicated on relevant construction drawings and in the ASS register, and will be provided as a series of diagrams and spread sheets.

QASSIT, 2002 [Ref D4]

ASSMP [Ref C3]




Frequently used areas which have been identified with a high risk of ASS (i.e. the salt flat and cleared mangrove area) will be protected with geotextile fabrics, mats, plates or imported construction material to help stabilise soil surface. Examples of these areas are the temporary work roads at the salt flat and mangrove area (not the trench itself as the material will be excavated).


ASSMP [Ref C3]

At all times Subcontractor.


Low ground pressure vehicles (where practical) and/or load-spreading devices (e.g. constructed work roads) will be used to reduce soil consolidation and egress of groundwater in areas with ASS risk.


ASSMP [Ref C3]

At all times Subcontractor. Darwin Site


Work roads will be constructed simultaneously or directly after the vegetation has been cleared. ASSMP [Ref C3] At all times Subcontractor. Darwin Site


Prior to the construction of the work road, vehicle movements over the salt flat will be minimised as much as practically possible.

ASSMP [Ref C3] At all times Subcontractor. Darwin Site


During vegetation clearing, mangrove mulch will be left on the ground to stabilise the ground and prevent erosion.

ASSMP [Ref C3] During vegetation clearing



The root system of the trees and mangroves will be left in the ground as much as practically possible. This will increase the bearing capacity of the ground and prevents soil erosion and potential exposure of ASS material.

ASSMP [Ref C3] During vegetation clearing




F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Soil investigation

An ASS sampling regime will be implemented during construction. This regime will include:

Phase 1—pre-disturbance sampling (completed)

Phase 2—field testing during excavations to verify ASS presence prior to transfer to treatment pad

Phase 3—validation to verify effective neutralisation of all PASS.

Environmental sampling will be performed by an environmental or water-quality professional in accordance with the Guidelines for Sampling and Analysis of Lowland Acid Sulfate Soils in Queensland 1998 [Ref D20].

Environmental samples collected for analysis, will be collected, stored and transported in accordance the relevant Australian standard.

All laboratory analyses of environmental samples will be undertaken by a NATA-accredited laboratory.


ASSMP [Ref C3]

During ASS treatment and storage works


Specialist.

Where material is suspected to be MBO, the material will be treated immediately and the maximum liming rate will be applied

These materials will not be stockpiled untreated.


ASSMP [Ref C3]



Specialist.

Detailed ASS treatment verification testing, and storage will be undertaken in accordance with the guidelines developed for Queensland (QASSIT, 2002 [Ref D4]).


ASSMP [Ref C3]


Subcontractor.

Environmental Specialist.

Trench walls

Should areas of the open trench be exposed to the atmosphere for longer than 140 hours (Table 3-4), lime will be applied to the trench surface to neutralise any acidification that has occurred. Lime will not be applied to the areas of the trench exposed for less than 140 hours to air.

ASSMP [Ref C3] Following trench excavation and prior to backfilling of the trench

Subcontractor.


Monitoring and inspection

Monitoring of groundwater quality will be carried out along the excavated trench to detect changes in pH and ground water level.

GIIP

ASSMP [Ref C3]

Prior to commencement and weekly for the duration of trenching activities


Specialist.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Ebbing tidal water within the onshore trench will be monitored at the seaward end of the trench to detect changes in pH.

GIIP

Table 9-1

ASSMP [Ref C3]

For the duration of trenching activities


In areas adjacent to the trench, monitoring of mangrove health indicators will be carried out, including:

surveys of indicators such as canopy cover, sedimentation rate and tree condition, prior to beginning shore approach works and following completion of these works

on-going visual monitoring of the mangrove health indicators.

GIIP

ASSMP [Ref C3]

Prior to, during (monthly as a minimum) and following completion of the trenching works


Table 8-18 Onshore treatment and storage PASS management measures


Planning and design

The ASS treatment pad and stockpile area will be located in the woodland area where there is a low risk of PASS soils.

The ASS treatment pad, stockpile areas, surface water/leachate diversion drains and retention basin will be constructed as in to the meet QASSIT (2002) guidelines [Ref D4] and IECA (2008) guidelines [Ref D3], as outline in Section 8.1.9.


ASSMP [Ref C3]



Representative (Contractor)

ASS treatment and stockpiling

Liming rates as specified in the soil investigation report will be implemented as follows:

Mangrove area: 110 kg CaCO3/tonne

Salt flat: 234 kg CaCO3/tonne

Woodland area: 3 kg CaCO3/tonne.

A supply of neutralising agent will be readily available at all times for treatment of acid sulfate material and acidic waters.


ASSMP [Ref C3]



Specialist.

Collected water management

Leachate and rainfall collecting inside the ASS treatment pad and stockpile area will be diverted to a retention basin for testing and treatment prior to discharge off site (via the surface water drainage system).

Darwin Harbour water quality guidelines


ASSMP [Ref C3]





F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


The retention basin will be lined with high density polyethylene or similar to reduce the risk of contamination of groundwater.


ASSMP [Ref C3]




Any pH adjustment of retention basin water will occur through in situ treatment with an appropriate treatment agent.

Darwin Harbour water quality guidelines




Specialist.

Monitoring and inspections

Regular inspections of the treatment pad treated stockpiled material, retention basin and immediate surrounds. Inspections will cover:

containment system integrity

retention basin water level

the presence of sulphurous odour

evidence of ASS leachate, oxide staining in neutralised stockpiles.

GEP ESCP

ASSMP [Ref C3]

Daily during ASS treatment and storage works



Monitoring of the water-quality parameters will be carried out prior to discharge from the retention basin to the surface water drainage system. In situ monitoring of the parameters will be conducted using calibrated hand-held monitoring devices in accordance with Table 9-1.


ANZECC 2000 [Ref D8] freshwater criteria

Table 9-1

ASSMP [Ref C3]

Daily during ASS treatment and storage works


Specialist.

Monitoring of groundwater quality will be carried out upstream and downstream of the ASS treatment and stockpile area. Monitoring will be conducted to detect changes in water level and pH over time, in accordance with Table 9-1.


Table 9-1

ASSMP [Ref C3]

Weekly during ASS treatment and storage works

Subcontractor



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-19 Retention basin water quality TARP

Responsibility Normal situation Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Water quality of discharge complies with the criteria listed in Table 9-2.

Refer to monitoring programme in Table 9-1.

Water quality of retention basin does not comply with the criteria listed in Table 9-2.


Water quality of retention basin does not comply with the criteria listed in Table 9-2 post treatment.


Non-compliant discharge from retention basin (for storm events within retention basin design specifications).

Subcontractor Continue to implement the management actions.

Continue to monitor water quality prior to discharge.

Discharge water from retention basin.

Record each discharge.

Immediately undertake treatment measures to adjust pH and/or turbidity levels (e.g. addition of neutralising agents).

Retest for compliance with water-quality discharge criteria immediately following completion of treatment measures.

Discharge water if criteria met.

Immediately re-adjust liming rates and undertake further treatment to adjust pH and/or turbidity levels.

Conduct investigation to identify possible causes of poor water quality.

Construct temporary controls (if appropriate and practical) to prevent continuing short-term deterioration in water quality.

Retest for compliance with water-quality discharge criteria immediately following completion of treatment measures.

Discharge water if criteria met.

Seek independent expert advice on alternative treatment methods management measures and applicability.



Continue to treat water quality and monitor accordingly.

Cooperate with any investigation into the incident.

Construct temporary controls (if appropriate and practical) to prevent continuing short-term deterioration in water quality.

Review practices and management measures. Modify measures accordingly and re-train personnel as necessary.



Participate in any inspections or audits.


Facilitate any investigations or audits.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320



Review water-quality and discharge records.



Provide advice on the interpretation of monitoring results and appropriate remedial actions.

Audit or inspect subcontractor against mitigation measures outlined in this CEMP.

Undertake investigation into incident to identify root cause and potential environmental impact.


Determine the requirement for additional monitoring downstream of the discharge.

Review practices and management measures.

Table 8-20 Trench seawater discharge TARP


pH of tidal induced discharges from trench (to Darwin Harbour) is within performance criteria (> 6 and < 8.5).


pH of tidal induced discharges from trench (to Darwin Harbour) are < 6


Heavy metal concentration of tidal induced discharges from trench (to Darwin Harbour) exceed trigger values (Table 9-1)


Sediment and bioaccumulation monitoring indicates that heavy metal concentrations are above performance criteria listed in Table 9-3 and Table 9-4


Contractor / Subcontractor

Continue to implement the management actions.

Raise incident report (non-compliance).

Investigate cause of non-compliance and implement remedial actions, such as liming of the trench.

Implement Tier 2 monitoring (as per Table 9-1) and review monitoring programme.

Apply Level 1 response actions.

Conduct full review of remedial actions.

Seek independent expert advice on potential management measures and applicability.


Apply Level 1 and Level 2 response actions.

Conduct full review of remedial actions.

Seek independent expert advice on potential management measures and applicability.






F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320



Continue to monitor water quality of ebbing seawater.

Review tidal flow discharge monitoring requirements with objective to confirm significance (extent) of changes.

Review tidal flow discharge monitoring (Tier 1 and 2) requirements with objective to confirm significance (extent) of changes.

Participate in the review of the monitoring programme.


Review other data available from Company monitoring programme.

Review receiving environment monitoring requirements, including environmental impact assessment.

Participate in the review of the monitoring programme and environmental impact assessment guidelines.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-21 ASS treatment and storage TARP


ASS treatment completed and all treated soils are verified as non-PASS.

Groundwater monitoring results are satisfactory (refer to Table 9-1), however system audits indicate a failure to comply with the ASS management processes (e.g. verification testing indicates ASS has not been fully neutralised)

Groundwater monitoring results from downstream stockpile area indicate a reduction in pH levels which exceed trigger values as a result of incorrect treatment/storage of PASS material.

Refer to Table 9-1.

Subcontractor Continue to implement the mitigation measures

Report findings of subcontractor audit/inspection to Contractor if non-compliance is identified.

Investigate cause of non-compliance.

Re-treat material previously identified as non-PASS until neutralisation has been verified.

Review and amend site controls and mitigation measures for validating treated PASS.

Retrain relevant personnel in site controls and mitigation measures.

Continue to monitor groundwater and review results.

Raise incident report (non-compliance).


Identify and implement remedial actions as appropriate to the nature of the non-compliance.

Conduct a full review of implementation of management measures.

Conduct further monitoring to assess remedial actions taken.


Report outcomes of the investigation and audit to Company.

Participate in follow-up audit.

Provide incident details to Company.

Conduct investigation and identify corrective actions in collaboration with subcontractor/s.

Follow-up audit to ensure close out of all audit actions.

Report outcomes of the investigation and audit to Company.


Participate in investigation and review of site controls.

Follow-up audit to ensure close out of all remedial actions as implemented from the investigation.

Participate in follow-up audit.

Determine requirement to report incident to the appropriate regulator(s) and inform contractor.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-22 Groundwater adjacent to the trench TARP


No decrease in pH or water level observed within groundwater adjacent to the trench

Groundwater pH decreases below the 20th percentile of measured control locations or a decrease of 0.5 units

OR

Groundwater level decreases below the 20th percentile of measured control locations or decreases by 0.5 m

Refer to Table 9-1.

Groundwater metal concentrations are above the 80th percentile of measured concentrations at control locations (as well as pH levels that are outside the performance criteria as indicated in level 1)

OR

Soil sampled adjacent to the trench (above the groundwater level) have become acidified

Refer to Table 9-1.

Site custodian Continue to implement the mitigation measures and continue to monitor.

Raise environmental incident report.


Seek input and guidance from recognized experts and company in assessing potential impacts and response.



Report incident to Company immediately.



Review mangrove health monitoring regime (Table 9-1).

Review monitoring programme (including consideration of monitoring mangrove sediment quality).

Review mangrove health monitoring regime (Table 9-1).

Provide technical input / seek advice into interpretation of the monitoring results and methodology for assessing mangrove health.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-23 Mangrove health monitoring TARP


No significant deterioration in mangrove health observed adjacent to trench.

Mangrove health within site is below the 20th percentile of measured control locations or parameters change by more than 20%.

Sediment level increases by more than 5cm.

Refer to Table 9-1.

Mangrove health outside of the site is below the 20th percentile of concurrently measured control locations or parameters change by more than 20%.

Sediment level increases by more than 5cm.

Refer to Table 9-1.

Site custodian Continue to implement the mitigation measures


Review monitoring programme (including groundwater quality) and intensify monitoring regime (see Table 9-1).


Review mangrove health monitoring programme frequency and duration.

Seek input and guidance from recognized mangrove experts and company in assessing mangrove health.



Report incident to Company immediately.


Continue to monitor mangrove health

Participate in the review of the monitoring programme and intensify monitoring regime.

Participate in the review of the monitoring programme.

Provide technical input / seek advice into interpretation of the monitoring results and methodology for assessing mangrove health.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.11 Dust management

The main activities that may result in dust generation are vegetation clearance and earthworks at Middle Arm Peninsula. These activities will predominantly take place during the wet season and as such the volume and duration of dust will be negligible.

During the dry season, there is a low risk that vehicle movements and general construction activities will generate dust. Dust generated from vehicle movement will be minimised by restricting vehicle access to site roads. Dust generated through graded rock handling will be minimised due to the acceptance criteria and preparation procedures applied, prior to the rock leaving the quarry. Prior to loading from the quarry, the graded rock will go through shaker screens which will remove the majority of the loose material and dust. Dust generated from rock transport and handling is expected to be negligible during all seasons as a result of this process.

The most sensitive receptor to dust impacts will be the GEP Project personnel working on site as the generation of dust is a health and safety risk. Local vegetation at the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site, including mangroves, may be potentially affected by dust.

Table 8-24 outlines the objective, targets and performance indicators for dust management. Table 8-25 presents the management measures for dust management. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the dust management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-26). The residual risk of dust related impacts on vegetation is low.

Table 8-24 Dust management objectives, targets and indicators


Minimise airborne dust related to work areas at the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site.

No dust deposition on mangrove vegetation close to dust generating activities.

Number of reports relating to observations of dust deposition on mangroves across consecutive days.

Mangrove health monitoring results

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of dust management issues on the work site.

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) to an induction which includes information on the importance of dust management in the area.

Induction presentation material and induction records.

Dust awareness to be included in JSA/SWMS for clearing and earthworks being undertaken in the dry season.

Sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering dust management.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-25 Dust management measures



Dust management will be included as part of the GEP Project inductions. GIIP Prior to mobilisation Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Daily pre-start meetings and JSA/SWMS will incorporate information on dust management as necessary (e.g. in response to reported dust incidents).

GIIP Prior to mobilisation Subcontractor.


Planning

Construction activities will be planned and undertaken to minimise generation of dust including:

staging works to minimise the area of disturbed land and exposed soil

areas to be cleared will be pegged and clearly delineated using high-visibility flagging tape or a similar device, so that operators are aware of the site boundaries (refer to Table 8-5)

works staging must ensure the interval between land clearing and construction commencement in any part of a site does not exceed 20 days

plan reinstatement works to occur as soon as practicable following the completion of construction activities in a particular location

where possible, mulched vegetation will be used for both rehabilitation and soil stabilisation to prevent erosion (refer to Section 8.1.4).

GIIP

IECA 2008 Best Practice Erosion and Sediment

Control Guidelines


Subcontractor / Environmental


On site management

Temporary site roads will be maintained as required. Section 8.1.4 (Erosion and sediment control)


During works Subcontractor Darwin Site


A shakedown pad installed at the site entry/exit will minimise soil material being tracked off site.

Section 8.1.4 (Erosion and sediment control)


During works Subcontractor



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


If soil material is observed being tracked off site (creating potential for dust generation) an investigation into the cause will be conducted and an assessment for the need for increased mitigation measures will be conducted. Should soil material be tracked into a public highway this will be cleaned by means of a road sweeper.


During works Subcontractor. Darwin Site


If large plumes of dust are observed, dust suppression measures will be implemented. This may include but not be limited to the use of water trucks.


During works Subcontractor.


Multiple handling of soil and rock materials will be minimised.


At all times Subcontractor HSE Manager

(Contractor)

Vegetation clearing (at Middle Arm Peninsula)

The area designated for clearing has been designed to be as small as practicable. GIIP Prior to mobilisation Subcontractor Environmental

Specialist (Contractor)


On-going monitoring by site supervisor so as to respond to changes in conditions (i.e. wind speed or direction) that require a change in dust management.




Recording and reporting of on-site workforce observations regarding dust (e.g. through pre-start meetings, inspection checklists).

GIIP At all times Subcontractor.


Periodic visual inspections to monitor dust deposition on surrounding vegetation at Middle Arm Peninsula.


Weekly during dry season

Subcontractor.


Visual inspections will be undertaken during activities likely to create dust. These include, rock stockpiling, vegetation clearing, major earth works. Activities occurring during periods of elevated wind speeds will also be observed. Inspections will inform the adequacy and the need for any improvement of the mitigation measures being applied.


Weekly during dry season



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-26 Dust management TARP


No dust-related observations reported

Workforce observations or weekly site inspections report that visible dust is above typical site conditions

OR

One dust related complaint received from community member.

Workforce observations or weekly site inspections report that visible dust is above typical site conditions for a period of more than 3 weeks

OR

Multiple dust related complaints received from community members.


Continue to implement CEMP management measures (dust observations and inspections).

Investigate cause and review procedures to ensure management actions are in place to further minimise the risk of dust generation.


Investigate cause and review procedures to ensure management actions are in place to further minimise the risk of dust generation.

Review the need for additional monitoring.




Inform Company of the complaints.


Review the need for additional monitoring.

Follow-up inspection or audit.





F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.12 Bushfire Prevention

Both onshore locations (Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach and East Arm Peninsula) are within the Fire Protection Zones (as outlined in Bushfires Act 1980 (NT) and Bushfires Regulations (NT)). Planned burning is not permitted at any time in the district without a permit to undertake prescribed burning from the Northern Territory Fire and Rescue Service.

No burning is planned as part of the Onshore GEP construction.

Potential ignition sources at both onshore sites include:

Faulty electrical equipment

Machinery and vehicles

Careless disposal of cigarette butts

Hot work activity, i.e. welding expected to be undertaken during the installation of the cofferdam.

Appropriate firebreaks will be developed on the GEP construction site in consultation with the Bushfire Council NT to ensure that firebreaks are compliant with relevant regulations while maintaining adequate vegetation buffer zones between cleared areas and the permitted working corridor. Construction access roads will be designated as firebreaks where they are in place.

Table 8-27 outlines the objective, targets and key performance indicators for bushfire prevention. Table 8-28 presents the management measures for bushfire prevention. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the bushfire prevention TARP will be initiated (Table 8-29). The residual risk of bushfire related impacts on vegetation is low.

Table 8-27 Bushfire Prevention Objectives, Targets and Indicators


Prevent bushfire from commencing due to GEP activities

Zero bushfire incidents

Number and severity of bushfire incident reports

100% compliance with all relevant bushfire regulations

Number of non-compliances identified in incident reports, inspections or audits

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of the importance of reducing the risk of bushfires.

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) to complete a site induction which will include information on bushfire prevention


Bushfire awareness and management to be included all JSA/SWMS involving ‘hot work’

Number of sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering bushfire awareness and management


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-28 Bushfire prevention management measures



All personnel will attend inductions highlighting the main management controls for fire prevention, including general fire extinguisher use, hot-work permit requirements, emergency evacuation procedures, and the location of fire and emergency muster points.

GIIP Prior to mobilisation


(Contractor).

Training drills will be carried out (under the direction of the emergency response team) to familiarise all personnel with evacuation procedures and processes.



(Contractor).


Firebreaks will be established around temporary facilities which border on vegetation at the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore crossing site. Within the Vernon Bushfire Region, bushfires must be, continuous around all external boundaries, however they can deviate around wet or rocky areas and large trees. They should also be

a minimum of 4 m wide and graded, or slashed to a maximum height of 50 mm with all slashed material removed, or

lawn or cultivated garden.


Firebreak Council NT


Subcontractor.


Smoking

Smoking will only be permitted in designated locations and receptacles for cigarette butts will be provided during all phases of the GEP Project.


At all times Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Vehicles and machinery

Vehicles will be restricted to designated roads and tracks except in the event of an emergency.

GIIP At all times Subcontractor. Darwin Site


All vehicles and heavy machinery will be hired from reputable third parties and regular servicing and maintenance performed in order to minimise the risk of fires initiating from engines and exhausts.

GIIP Prior to mobilisation and at all times

Subcontractor.


An internal “hot-work permit” system will be instituted for all hot-work activities, for example welding and grinding. The permit will specify fire-control practices to help to prevent fires arising from conduct of these activities. Permits will be managed under the Contractor’s and subcontractor’s permit-to-work system.


Prior to hot-work activities

Subcontractor.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Waste management

Effective waste management practices and good housekeeping practices will minimise the accumulation of combustible construction wastes (e.g. timber, cardboard and paper) that could pose a potential fire hazard.

GIIP At all times Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Dangerous goods and hazardous materials

The storage of flammable and combustible liquids will be in accordance with regulatory requirements and applicable Australian Standards.

AS 1940-2004

The storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids


(Contractor).

Emergency Response

An emergency response plan [Ref B5] will be developed and emergency response teams will be established at the onshore sites.



Subcontractor.


Fire fighting equipment will be available and strategically located around the work area, including in the permanent site vehicles.





Cleared vegetation

Cleared vegetation will be stockpiled away from potential ignition sources. Burning of stockpiled vegetation is not permitted.




Any cleared vegetation material required to be stockpiled will be kept to as low as possible in order to reduce risk of fire.





F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320



Ensure that fire fighting equipment is inspected, tested and complies with the relevant Australian Standards for Fire Protection.

Relevant Australian standards,

such as:

AS 1851-2012, Routine service of fire protection systems and equipment

AS 2444:2001, Portable fire extinguishers and fire blankets.

Weekly Subcontractor. Darwin Site


Regular inspection of storage facilities for flammable and combustible liquids. AS 1940-2004

The storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids

Weekly Subcontractor Darwin Site


Regular inspection and maintenance of firebreaks. GIIP Fortnightly Subcontractor. Darwin Site



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-29 Bushfire management TARP


No bushfire Fire occurs inside the permitted work site and is controlled without damage or injury to equipment, personnel and/or fauna.

Fire occurs causing offsite damage or injury to equipment, personnel and/or fauna.


Maintain awareness and ensure fire prevention and fighting equipment is maintained and ready for use.

Follow the requirements of the onshore Emergency Response Plan.

Immediately report incident to Supervisor.

Subcontractor must immediately report incident to Contractor.


Investigate cause and review procedures to ensure management actions are in place to minimise the risk of repeat occurrence.

Follow the requirements of the onshore Emergency Response Plan.

Follow any instructions given by the Northern Territory Fire and Rescue Service.

Subcontractor must immediately report incident to Contractor.

Investigate cause and review procedures to ensure management actions are in place to minimise the risk of repeat occurrence.

Cooperate with any external incident audits or investigations.


Report to Company as incident.


Report to Company as incident.


HSE Manager (Contractor) Conduct investigation and review bushfire management measures and emergency response procedures.


Conduct investigation and review bushfire management measures and emergency response procedures.






F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.13 Rehabilitation management

The only areas that will require reinstatement and rehabilitation at the Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach site will be the mangroves and some areas of woodlands cleared to accommodate the ASS pad and stockpiles. These areas will not be disturbed in future works and will require rehabilitation prior to handover to Company for ongoing monitoring and management. The framework of the rehabilitation program will incorporate management strategies from the following sections, as required:

Section 8.1.2 Flora management

Section 8.1.3 Fauna management

Section 8.1.4 Erosion and surface water runoff management

Section 8.1.5 Acid sulfate soil management

Section 8.2.6 Dust management

Section 8.1.12 Bushfire prevention

Section 8.1.16 Weed management.

Table 8-30 outlines the objective, targets and performance indicators for rehabilitation management. Table 8-31 presents the management measures for rehabilitation management. Although the site will be handed back to Company as soon as demobilisation and rehabilitation actions are completed, rehabilitation is likely to be progressive to some extent, hence, where visual inspection indicate a deviation from the expected results, the rehabilitation management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-32).

Table 8-30 Rehabilitation Management Objectives, Targets and Indicators


Leave disturbed areas stabilised at the completion of works

Rehabilitation work is commenced as soon as is practicable, taking into account seasonal rainfall

Completion criteria (yet to be developed)

Not disturb rehabilitated areas Zero occurrences of unauthorised vehicle and/or personal access to rehabilitated areas

Inspection reports and environmental incident reports relating to vehicles/personnel not using designated tracks

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of the importance of management of rehabilitated areas

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) to an induction which includes information on the importance of rehabilitation in the area



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-31 Rehabilitation management measures



Rehabilitation management will be included as part of the GEP Project inductions. GIIP Prior to mobilisation Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Daily pre-start meetings and JSA/SWMS will address rehabilitation management as required.

GIIP During and after rehabilitation


(Contractor).

Vegetation clearing

Clearing activities will be undertaken in accordance with the Flora management EMF in Section 8.1.2.

See Section 8.1.2.

See Section 8.1.2. See Section 8.1.2

Onshore topsoil will be left in-situ under the geofabric layers placed for site stabilisation / erosion protection. If any small areas of topsoil are stripped and stockpiled, for future use in rehabilitation, the topsoil stockpiles will be managed to prevent erosion, sedimentation and dust, and will be regularly inspected for evidence of erosion and weeds.





Loose cleared vegetation shall be mulched and stockpiled on site boundaries (outside the intertidal zone) or off site. Where possible, the mulch will be used for both rehabilitation and soil stabilisation to prevent erosion.





Treated ASS

The stockpiling and use of treated ASS for rehabilitation will be undertaken in accordance with the ASS management EMF in Section 8.1.5.

See Section 8.1.5.

See Section 8.1.5. See Section 8.1.5.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Site reinstatement

Site reinstatement will include restoration of the natural contour of the ground prior to rehabilitation of designated areas. Surveys will be carried out to ensure the required backfill levels are achieved and the original contours of the site are restored.

GIIP Prior to rehabilitation



Rehabilitation

Temporarily disturbed areas such as those in the vicinity of the pipeline shore crossing and the onshore pipeline corridor, as well as areas around the plant that do not need to remain cleared, will be rehabilitated following the completion of construction activities.


Prior to completion of works


(Contractor).

A rehabilitation plan will be prepared for approval by Company. The plan will include records of rehabilitation, the control of introduced weed species, native species found in the vegetation communities present in the area, visual amenity consideration and landform and drainage considerations.


Prior to mobilisation Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

The completion criteria for rehabilitation will be established. They will take into account the nature of rehabilitated areas, the post-operations land use, and any limitations or potential limitations to achieving these desired end uses. Rehabilitation completion criteria for each area will need to address broad objectives including the safety of the area, stability, plant species diversity, density and cover, resilience (fire, diversity and structural attributes), compatibility with surrounding vegetation communities and the absence of weed species for each area.


Subcontractor.


In the event that imported topsoil is required for rehabilitation purposes, topsoil will be certified as being weed free prior to being brought to site.




To prevent inadvertent or unauthorised access, rehabilitated areas will be cordoned/fenced off and signposted.

GIIP During rehabilitation Subcontractor.


Upon completion of onshore works and demobilisation from an area, geotextile will be removed and in-situ topsoil will be scarified relieve compaction. Active seeds (seeds collected from surrounding bushland) will be spread in onshore areas to assist in rehabilitation.

Landfall Preparation and Temporary Works Procedure [Ref B16]

During rehabilitation Subcontractor.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Mangrove rehabilitation will involve the following techniques:

Light ripping / scarification of re-instated mud surface to create niche areas for seedling establishment

Mesh fencing and other natural refugees such as logs to trap and protect mangrove propagules and assist in erosion control

Nursery culture and plant out seedlings of dominant mangrove species

Transplant existing seedlings from adjacent mangroves on Wickham Point

Mangrove seedlings will be planted at a minimum density of one per square metre for areas that are greater than five metres from the edge of the clearing corridor.

Rehabilitation of Mangroves Field Report [Ref F15]

During rehabilitation.

Subcontractor.


Soil and mulch stockpiles are to be inspected regularly for evidence of erosion and weeds, prior to their use for rehabilitation.

GIIP Weekly, prior to rehabilitation



Rehabilitated areas shall be inspected to confirm that works are appropriate, prior to handover to Company.

GIIP On completion of rehabilitation


(Contractor).

Rehabilitated areas shall be surveyed and mapped and appropriate records (including rehabilitation methodology) provided to Company for future monitoring purposes.

GIIP On completion of works




F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-32 Rehabilitation management TARP


Rehabilitation undertaken in accordance with Rehabilitation Plan

Disturbance to rehabilitated area by unplanned event (e.g. vehicle access, bushfire, or storm event) prior to handover to Company

Rehabilitation criteria for handover to Company not met

Subcontractor Undertake rehabilitation as planned.

Continue to implement CEMP management measures and rehabilitation plan.






Delay demobilisation until approval given by Contractor.


Undertake investigation into incident.


Darwin site representative

(Contractor)





Report incident immediately to Company.

Participate in the investigation and review of rehabilitation plan and rehabilitation criteria.

Follow-up inspection.



Assess level of damage and implement additional controls as required.

Investigate cause of rehabilitation failure and implement additional controls as required.

Conduct final inspection to validate implementation of rehabilitation plan and criteria.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.14 Airborne noise management

Onshore noise or vibration can cause nuisance, disturbance or health impacts to local community receptors. The following noise limits for receiving locations have been defined for the Ichthys Project in consultation with NRETAS (now known as NT EPA) [Ref A1]:

Residential, institutional and education areas: LAeq,12hours 55 dB(A) during the day (7am - 7pm) and 45 dB(A) at night (7pm-7m the next day).

Industrial areas: LAeq,12hours 70 dB(A) for all periods.

The noise guidelines for development sites in the Northern Territory [Ref D11] states that construction noise level should not exceed:

in residential use areas ambient noise plus 5 dB(A)

in mixed commercial/residential use areas 60 dB(A) total

in commercial use areas 65 dB(A) total

in industrial use areas 70 dB(A) total

within 15 m of a Noise Sensitive Receptor (NSR) or at or on the boundary of the NSR (adjusted for tonality, impulsiveness, and/or modulation) during acceptable construction times.

At Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site, the closest industrial receptor is the Wickham Point Detention Centre which lies approximately 4 km to the south-east. The closest residential receptor to the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site is a single residential property about 4.5 km to the south-south-east.

The following activities may result in airborne noise from the onshore GEP Project areas having an impact on surrounding areas:

General construction activities at Middle Arm Peninsula, including sheet piling associated with cofferdam construction, and the operation of diesel generators.

The use of air compressors and the release of pressurised air, in the rare event of a wet buckle. The length of time the noise would be generated for would depend on the location of the wet buckle. If a wet buckle occurred at the furthest offshore section of the pipeline, at the Ichthys field, release of compressed air would generate noise for a maximum period of 14 days.

As none of the sites are within 100 m any sensitive receptors, rock handling and other general construction activities are not expected to have any offsite impacts. The loudest construction activities and wet buckle response activities are summarised in Table 8-33. None of these activities are expected to exceed the noise limits. The residual risk identified for onshore noise generation is therefore low.

Table 8-34 outlines the objective, targets and performance indicators for airborne noise management. Table 8-35 presents the management measures for noise management. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the noise management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-36).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-33 Noise generating activities at the Middle Arm Peninsula site

Construction period

Activity Periodicity Noise mitigation Maximum LAeq noise level

Maximum LAeq,12hour noise level at @ 4km

Shore approach work

Operation of up to 4 diesel power generators

Constant daytime operation with potential for 24hr operation

Sound proof protection fitted to equipment <85 dB(A) @1m 18 dB (A)

Use of an impact hammer for cofferdam construction

The impact hammer will be used for approximately 2 hrs/day for 8 weeks.

Selection of smallest sized hammer required for work.

115-120 dB(A) @10m

55-60 dB(A)

Wet buckle standby Operation of 4 diesel power generators

Intermittently for 2 hours Sound proof protection fitted to equipment

<85 dB(A) @1m 18 dB (A)

Operation of 2 air compressors at any one time (a total of 16 air compressors will be on site)

Operated for 8 x 2 hour periods, every week

Compressors are encased in a sound proof protection

<80 dB(A) @1m 18 dB(A)

If a wet buckle occurs (rare incident)

Pressurised air will be released at the onshore end of the pipeline

Constant release for up to 14 days (worst case scenario)

Air silencers will be fitted to the onshore end of the pipeline

<85 dB(A) @1m 5 dB (A)

Operation of 16 air compressors

Constant for up to 14 days (worst case scenario)

Compressors are encased in a sound proof protection

<80 dB(A) @1m 18 dB (A)

Note: Noise calculations considered the equipment that would be used for activities and noise data from the British Standard BS5228-1 and 2:2009 Code of Practice for noise and vibration control [Ref D21]. Noise corrections were based on operational conditions, with predicted noise levels at receptor locations calculated using a standard propagation algorithm from ISO 9613-2 Acoustics – Attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors [Ref D22].


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-34 Airborne noise management objectives, targets and indicators


Minimise the impacts of construction noise and vibration on residential and industry receptors

No complaints from sensitive receptors in vicinity of all sites in respect to nuisance/disturbance caused by increased noise levels

Number of noise-related complaints received

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of the importance of noise management

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) involved in noise-generating activities to complete an induction which will include information on noise management


Noise awareness and management to be included all JSA/SWMS involving noise-generating activities

Number of sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering noise awareness and management


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-35 Airborne noise management measures



Noise management will be included as part of the GEP Project inductions.

All personnel will be made aware of their obligations with regard to reporting any noise related incidents.

GIIP Prior to mobilisation Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Equipment operation and maintenance

All equipment to be maintained and operated in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.



Responsive actions

In response to any reported noise incidents (such as complaints), management measures will be reviewed to identify opportunities for improvement.


(Contractor).


Regular maintenance and inspections of operating equipment which generate significant noise (such as compressors).




F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-36 Noise management TARP


No noise complaints Less than two noise complaints received within a one month period

Two or more noise complaints received within a one month period


Continue to implement management measures.

Participate in investigation and review of management measures.

Evaluate options to reduce the noise affecting the complainant, where practicable.

Participate in investigation and review of management measures.

Evaluate options to reduce the noise affecting the complainant, where practicable.


Raise an incident report.

Investigate cause and review procedures to ensure management measures are in place to minimise the risk of repeat occurrence.


Investigate cause and review procedures to ensure management measures are in place to minimise the risk of repeat occurrence.

HSE Manager (Contractor)

Continue to conduct inspections and audits.

Provide direction to subcontractor (if required) on outcomes of investigation and any remedial actions required to be implemented.

Provide direction to subcontractor (if required) on outcomes of investigation and any remedial actions required to be implemented.

Sustainability Engineer (Contractor)

Liaise with Company regarding appropriate response to the complainant as per the complaints procedure.

Liaise with Company regarding appropriate response to the complainant as per the complaints procedure.




Advise on whether noise monitoring is required.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.15 Quarantine and pest management

GEP Project activities have the potential to introduce new terrestrial species of plants and animals into the Middle Arm Peninsula area. The EIS identified the quarantine requirements for the onshore activities related to the mobilisation of clearing and excavation vehicles, which could potentially transport invasive weeds.

8.1.16 Weed management

The activities that present the risk of spreading weeds are:

general movement of vehicles and equipment, in particular off road or earth moving equipment

vegetation clearance

moving and storing topsoil.

The objective of the weed management framework is to prevent the introduction, establishment and/or spread of declared weeds under the Weeds Management Act 2001 (NT). As described in Section 6.3.1, these weeds could cause significant damage to the ecosystem and indigenous plant species.

While an official weed survey has not yet been undertaken on the Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach site, it is not expected that any declared weeds will be present as the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site is relatively undisturbed. As indicated in Table 8-38, a formal weed survey will be undertaken prior to mobilisation to identify the presence and location of any known weed species.

Typical transportation vectors for weeds include crevices or retained soil on machinery, corners and undersides of packing crates, in bulk-bagged or packaged construction materials, and within, or on the superstructure of vehicles or vessels. It is considered that the risk of weed spread due to transport by vehicles or earthmoving equipment can be effectively managed by visual inspections and cleaning activities prior to the mobilisation of equipment to site. The residual risk of weed related impacts is low.

The objectives, targets and indicators for weed management are provided in Table 8-37. The management measures to be implemented to achieve these objectives and targets are outlined in Table 8-38. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the weed management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-39).

Table 8-37 Weed management objectives, targets and indicators


Minimise the risk of introduction Class A, B and C weeds into the onshore GEP Project area

No new introductions of declared weeds into the project area

Number of observations of declared weeds being introduced during site occupation as identified in weed surveys

Control any declared weeds present on site (listed under the Weeds Management Act 2001)

No increase in abundance or spread of declared weeds within the Middle Arm Peninsula

Weed survey results

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of the importance of weed management

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) to complete an induction which will include information on prevention of the introduction and spread of weeds


Weed awareness and management to be included applicable JSA/SWMS

Number of sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering weed awareness and management


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-38 Weed management measures



The GEP Project induction will include the following specific components for weed management:

identification of weed species, such as mission grass, at the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site and the locations of known infestations

ecological impacts associated with invasive weeds

management measures for controlling weeds, such as cleaning of vehicles.




(Contractor).

Planning

Conduct a weed survey prior to work commencement and develop a weed management plan if any declared weed is detected.

GIIP and Environmental compliance register item 2.15



Vegetation clearance

Areas to be cleared will be pegged and clearly delineated using high-visibility flagging tape or a similar device, so that operators are aware of the site boundaries to prevent further spreading of weeds.



Subcontractor.


Previously disturbed areas that potentially have large infestations of weed species will either be cleared separately from undisturbed areas to avoid spreading weeds and their seeds moved to weed-free areas, or will be managed through weed control programs.


At all times Subcontractor. Environmental Specialist

(Contractor).

Topsoil containing high densities of weed seeds will not be used in site reinstatement.




Any cleared vegetation contaminated with listed weeds, where weed control measures have not been taken, will be independently stockpiled and removed from site. No weeds will be burned.





F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Plant machinery, equipment and vehicles

Goods, equipment and cargo imported into Australia will meet DAFF Biosecurity import conditions and Department of Primary Industries and Fisheries (DPIF) quarantine conditions.

The Northern Territory Plant Health Manual [Ref D12]

DAFF Biosecurity standards



(Contractor).

All earthmoving equipment and vegetation clearing machinery will be inspected, and cleaned if required, prior to mobilisation to site.

All earth moving equipment and vegetation clearing machinery will be either cleaned on site, or transported using trailers and cleaned at its point of origin (or other suitable facility) following demobilisation.

Project commitment reference 17.05




Conduct periodic weed surveys at the Middle Arm Peninsula – shore approach site to confirm weed status.


Quarterly Environmental Specialist (Contractor).

Inspection of all cleaned earth moving equipment and vegetation clearing machinery prior to demobilisation.


Prior to demobilisation




F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-39 Weed management TARP


No introduction of new weeds or spread of existing weed species.

Existing infestations are controlled effectively.

Introduction of a new weed species (not listed as “declared”) to weed-free area.

Weed control management methods not effective.

Introduction of a new weed species (“declared”) to weed-free area.

“Declared” weed populations increase in size.


Continue to implement CEMP management measures (weed monitoring and inspections).

Record location and photograph infestation for monitoring.


Review relevant management measures and procedures (e.g. vehicle hygiene procedures) and modify as required.

Re-assess monitoring programme.

Record location and photograph infestation for monitoring.


Eradicate the infestation in a manner consistent with the Weed Management Handbook [Ref D13].

Investigate incident and review relevant management measures and procedures (e.g. vehicle hygiene procedures).

Implement a monitoring/ inspection schedule to look for any reappearance of the weed.


Continue to conduct inspections to verify implementation of the CEMP management measures.

Report the incident to Company as an environmental incident.

Report the occurrence of any “declared” weeds to Company.


Assist in review of relevant management measures or procedures.

Follow up inspection to ensure corrective actions have been implemented.

Assist in investigation and review of relevant management measures or procedures.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.16.1 Pest management

This management section addresses the risk of:

introducing a pest species to the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site as a result of vehicle and/or equipment movements

attracting pest species by the incorrect disposal of food waste or increasing the local population abundance

increasing the available breeding habitat for mosquitoes and other biting insects.

The introduction of invasive pests can have a deleterious effect on native species through competition for food and habitat and by predation. The pest animals recorded on Middle Arm Peninsula include the cane toad (Bufo marinus), feral pigs (Sus scrofa) and the black rat (Rattus rattus). Cane toads in particular are widespread throughout the Darwin region and impact heavily on native reptile and mammal populations.

Biting insects in the NT include biting midges and mosquitoes, both of which are known to be present at Middle Arm Peninsula. Construction activities can create stagnant accumulations of water which will provide breeding habitats for biting insects, which can pose human health risks, as well as potentially causing significant irritation to personnel.

Taking into account the management measures detailed in Table 8-41, the residual risk for pest management is low. The objectives, targets and indicators for pest management are provided in Table 8-40. The management measures to be implemented to achieve these objectives and targets are outlined in Table 8-41. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the pest management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-42).

Table 8-40 Pest management objectives, targets and indicators


Prevent the introduction of ‘new’ invasive pests to the site

No reports of ‘new’ invasive species on site

Number of reports of the presence of ‘new’ invasive species on site

Reduce the risk of an increase in local populations of pest species on site

All food waste to be disposed of in accordance with this CEMP

Number of reported non-conformances relating to the disposal of food waste

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of the importance of pest management

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) to complete a site induction which will include information on pest management


Pest awareness and management to be included applicable JSA/SWMS

Number of sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering pest awareness and management


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-41 Pest management measures



Inductions will include:

ecological impacts associated with invasive pests and the pest management measures

biting insect control, including identification of insect larvae in standing water and personal protection.

GIIP Prior to mobilisation Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Regular reinforcement (such as at toolbox talks) of the importance of pest management and minimising biting insect breeding areas. Information about pest species will be posted on the site notice board to increase workforce awareness of pest species.


Subcontractor.


Pest animals

Goods, equipment and cargo imported into Australia will meet DAFF Biosecurity import conditions.

Quarantine Act 1908 (Cwlth)



(Contractor).

Putrescible waste on site will be stored, covered and managed to limit access by scavenger animals, and will be regularly transported off site for disposal. See Section 8.1.17 Waste management.




All rubbish and debris will be removed from around the site. GIIP At all times Subcontractor. Darwin Site


Biting insects

Personnel will wear appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) with long sleeves.

Personal protection from mosquitoes & biting midges in the NT [Ref D14]



Drainage will be designed to prevent the accumulation of silt and debris that may create pooling of water.

Environmental compliance register item 16.01, 16.02


Subcontractor.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Sewage systems and wastewater disposal will be operated in a manner to avoid ponding of water.

GIIP At all times Subcontractor. Environmental Specialist

(Contractor).

Chemical control of mosquitoes will be investigated (in consultation with Company) only if necessary for areas that cannot be managed with other management controls.

GIIP As necessary Subcontractor. Environmental Specialist

(Contractor).


The site will be visually inspected for any standing water, including all containers and vessels capable of holding water (e.g. bunded areas) to prevent water pooling. These areas will be drained and treated as required.

GIIP Weekly Subcontractor. Darwin Site


Regular inspections will be carried out for mosquito larvae in high risk areas and controls will be implemented as required. Any occurrences of breeding mosquitoes in the work site will be reported to Contractor site manager.


Daily Subcontractor. Darwin Site


Informal pest inspections will be conducted at higher-risk locations, such as near waste storage facilities.

GIIP Daily Subcontractor. Darwin Site



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-42 Pest management TARP


No introduction of pest species Single observation of a new pest species Multiple sightings of a new pest species


Continue to implement CEMP management measures (pest observations and inspections).

Record observation, including location.


Review relevant management measures and procedures and modify as required.

Re-assess monitoring programme.

Record observation, including location.


Investigate incident and relevant management measures and procedures and modify as required.

Assess control and eradication management, and identify any alternative methods that might be available.

Implement a monitoring/ inspection schedule to look for any reappearance of the weed.




Report the incident to Company as an environmental incident.

Report the occurrence of the new pest species to Company.




Assist in investigation and review of relevant management measures or procedures. Seek advice from pest control experts as required.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.17 Waste management

Wastes generated on Contractor and subcontractor work locations during onshore GEP Project activities will be generated in different quantities and are categorised into one of the following streams:

Main waste streams:

Sewage: expected maximum of approximately 2 m3 per day during shore approach activities and approximately <1 m3 at other times.

Condensate from wet buckle standby compressors (potential waste only in the event of wet buckle): expected maximum of approximately 16 m3 per day in the event of a wet buckle.

General (non-hazardous, non-recyclable) solid waste from construction and maintenance activities: expected maximum of approximately 5 m3 per week.

Minor waste streams:

Recyclable material including paper, cardboard, plastics, glass and metals from construction and maintenance activities.

Putrescible wastes.

Hazardous liquids including oily water, hydrocarbons from construction and maintenance activities.

Biological / medical wastes.

A full list of anticipated waste types that will be generated during the onshore GEP Project activities is contained in Table 8-43.

Where possible, Contractor and subcontractors will re-use, reduce and recycle waste to minimise the impact of waste on the environment.

Listed wastes are wastes listed under Schedule 2 of the Waste Management and Pollution Control (Administration) Regulations (NT) (WMPC Regulations (NT)). The expected listed wastes are summarised in Table 8-43 (numbering is consistent with those in the WMPC Regulations (NT)). All listed wastes will be managed in accordance with the Waste Management and Pollution Control Act 1998 (NT) (WMPC Act (NT)) and WMPC Regulations (NT).

All wastes requiring transport and disposal will be transported by approved and appropriately licenced contractors and disposal will occur only at facilities licensed and capable of receiving the relevant type and quantity of waste to be disposed of. This includes any requirements for listed wastes contained in the legislation identified above.

Contractor will develop a full stand-alone waste management procedure for each onshore GEP Project activity / work phase (Table 3-1). These procedures will contain, as a minimum, site and activity specific information including:

roles and responsibilities relating to waste management

waste segregation requirements and storage methodologies

specific waste disposal requirements

notification and reporting requirements

detailed description of waste management

response in the event of loss of containment

The residual risk for onshore waste impacts is low.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-43 Anticipated types of waste

Potential Recyclable

Listed Shore Approach

Wet Buckle Standby

Wet Buckle Operation

Domestic wastes

Food waste (& containers) N N

Aluminum cans Y N

Glass Y N

Cardboard cartons/paper Y N

Plastic Y N

General (Non hazardous) Waste

Bulbs and tube lights N N P P P

Cables N N P P

Concrete Y N

Metals Y N P P P

Metal containers Y N

Packaging materials N N P

Printer toners N N P P P

Plastic containers N N

Plastic wrapping N N

Stationery N N

Vegetation Y N

Wood / Wood packaging Y N P P

Hazardous Waste

Batteries N N

Chemical waste N Y P P P

Chemical containers N Y1

Contaminated soil N Y2 P P

Oily water and compressor condensate N Y3 P

Degreasers N Y4

Grease and oil Y Y

Lime N N P

Lubricants Y Y

Raw sewage N Y

Solvents N Y5 P P

Medical wastes N Y P P P

Notes:


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

‘P’: Potential waste streams. Y1: Containers that are contaminated with residues of a listed waste Y2: Soils contaminated with a listed waste Y3: Waste mixtures, or waste emulsions, of oil and water or hydrocarbon and water Y4: Degreasers may contain solvents and/or surfactants which are listed Y5: Halogenated organic solvents, Organic solvents excluding halogenated solvents, Waste from the production, formulation and use of organic solvents

The objectives, targets and indicators for managing onshore wastes are provided in Table 8-44. The management measures to be implemented to achieve these objectives and targets are outlined in Table 8-45. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the onshore waste management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-46). The residual risk of onshore waste impacts is low.

Table 8-44 Onshore waste objectives, targets and indicators


Avoid uncontrolled waste (liquid or solid) discharge into the surrounding environment (including Darwin Harbour) at the onshore site

Zero environmental incidents associated with waste management

Number of incident reports and severity of incidents resulting from waste discharges

Minimise volumes of waste going to landfill and maximise recycling

Recycle all recyclable domestic and office waste

Waste volumes produced and waste volumes recycled

Waste inspection reports

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of the importance of correct waste management practices and opportunities for improvement

All onshore workforce personnel (including subcontractors) to complete a site induction which will include information on waste management


Waste awareness and management to be included applicable JSA/SWMS

Number of sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering waste awareness and management


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-45 Onshore waste management measures



Waste management will be included as part of the GEP Project inductions. GIIP Prior to mobilisation


(Contractor).

Waste-generation impacts will be taken into consideration as part of JSA/SWMS where appropriate.

GIIP Prior to mobilisation and during works

Subcontractor.


Regular reinforcement (such as at toolbox talks and pre-start meetings) of waste hierarchy and waste management measures.



Waste hierarchy

Where possible, waste will be reduced, re-used and recycled to minimise the impact on the environment.



(Contractor).


Activity specific waste management procedures will be developed and implemented on site detailing (at a minimum) the items listed in Section 8.1.17.

Contractor commitment

Prior to mobilisation and updated as required.


(Contractor).

Where possible, required materials and chemicals will be purchased in bulk in order to reduce the amount of packaging waste. For example, chemicals may be supplied in intermediate bulk containers in preference to drums.



Procurement and contracts personnel

Waste segregation and storage

Waste will be stored in the designated waste stations and appropriately segregated into hazardous waste and non-hazardous waste, and, where possible, into recyclable waste.


At all times All personnel

Waste containers for food scraps or other putrescible wastes will be covered to prevent scavenging by animals or infestation by flies.





F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


All waste receptacles will be clearly labelled as to the nature of the materials that may be placed in them in order to avoid contamination or mixture of incompatible materials.




Waste receptacles will not be permitted to be overfilled with materials. GIIP At all times All personnel

All hazardous liquid wastes will be stored over a bund in leak-proof sealed containers. Environmental compliance register item 22.07



Management of “listed waste” will meet NT and Commonwealth regulatory requirements with regard to storage, transport and disposal.

WMPC Regulations (NT)

Hazardous Waste (Regulations of Exports and Imports) Act 1989


(Contractor).

Sewage will be collected in tanks and disposed of off site by an appropriately licensed contractor at an appropriately licensed facility.



In the event of the discovery of any unidentified wastes, these will be treated as hazardous waste and stored accordingly.


Disposal of waste

Only approved and NT licensed waste contractors will be employed for waste disposal. Project commitment reference 22.08


At all times Logistics coordinator.

Subcontractor.

Vehicles transporting waste will retain records and manifests of the quantities and types of wastes transported.


At all times Logistics coordinator. Subcontractor.

General “good housekeeping” practices will be undertaken to ensure that there is no accumulation of waste materials in the facilities.


Records


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Records will be maintained of the quantities of waste generated, the quantities transported and disposed of, and the methods of disposal (e.g. landfill or recycling) for all phases of the GEP Project. Records will include waste manifests and disposal certificates.


At all times Logistics coordinator.

Subcontractor.

Inspections and monitoring

Waste storage facilities will be inspected to assess compliance with this CEMP. GIIP Weekly Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Reviews of waste-management procedures and the quantity of regulated wastes generated on site will be carried out to aid continual improvement and waste minimisation.

GIIP Quarterly Subcontractor.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-46 Waste management TARP


All waste stored and disposed of in accordance with CEMP

Waste incorrectly identified or disposed of resulting in contamination of other wastes and/or waste receptacles

Wastes incorrectly stored or disposed of resulting in soil, surface water and/or groundwater contamination

Site custodian Continue to implement waste management measures and procedures.

Conduct regular inspections of waste receptacles and storage facilities.

Remove and segregate hazardous, listed and non-hazardous wastes and store appropriately.

Any contaminated waste items should be disposed of as hazardous and/or listed waste.



Contain and clean up source of contamination, if possible.

Engage specialist waste removal contractors to contain and clean up waste, if required.

Dispose of waste appropriately.


Investigate incident and relevant management measures and procedures and modify as required










F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.18 Hazardous materials management

Hazardous materials will be required to complete construction activities in the onshore GEP Project area. Hazardous materials will consist of dangerous goods and hazardous chemicals

NT WorkSafe defines dangerous goods as "substances that have the potential to cause immediate harm to people, property and the environment due to their explosive, corrosive, toxic, oxidising or flammable nature" while hazardous chemicals are those listed on the National Hazardous Substances Information System as chemicals or other materials that are "above the concentration level which is harmful to human health."

The key onshore activities and substances requiring hazardous materials management are:

transfer, storage and use of diesel for mobile machinery and static equipment (e.g. power generators, linear winch, air compressors)

transfer, storage and use of lubricating oils and hydraulic fluid in mobile and static equipment

transfer and use of small quantities of petrol for use in small petrol engines

collection storage and transfer of sewage

collection storage and transfer of oily water from linear winch operations.

Other potential types of hazardous materials that may require use or be generated include:

Small quantities of herbicides: In the event that weed control is required. The potential need for weed control is identified in Table 8-38 (weed management actions).

Small quantities of pesticides: required to control pest animals such as biting insects. The potential use of pesticides is covered in Section 8.1.16.1 (pest management).

Chemicals: in the event of a 'wet buckle' occurring, up to a maximum of 3 m3 of biocide and 4 m3 of corrosion inhibitor (polyphosphates) will be transported on site and inserted into the chemical receiving and injection system. These chemicals will not be stored on site.

Where discharge of chemicals is unavoidable, chemicals will be selected on technical, health, safety, environmental and commercial considerations. As chemicals will only be discharged during a wet buckle response (contingency only), the chemical selection process is addressed in Section 8.2.10.

Some of the hazardous materials generated by the onshore GEP construction activities are wastes (e.g. sewage and oily water). These wastes, while mentioned in this section due to their hazardous classification, are addressed in greater detail in the onshore waste EMF (Section 8.1.17) and will be managed under the waste management procedures to be developed in line with Section 8.1.12. Diesel fuel will be the most significant hazardous material utilised in the onshore GEP construction activities. Diesel usage and approximate volumes are detailed in Table 8-47.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-47 Diesel storage capacity and transfer at the Middle Arm Peninsula - shore approach site

Construction phase

Equipment Volume Quantity Comment

Shore approach work

Double walled diesel tank provided by licensed contractor

5000 L 1 Contingency storage for refueling of mobile and static equipment in the event that daily off site delivery service of fuel is not available.

Wet buckle standby

Air compressors 800 L 16 Minor consumption as equipment is on standby with only periodic operational testing.

Air filling pumps 1200 L

4

Power generator 230 L 4 Daily refueling by fuel supply contractor, minor consumption

In the event of wet buckle

Double walled diesel tank provided by licensed contractor

20000 L 4 Continuous operation for up to a maximum of two weeks. Daily refueling undertaken by offsite fuel delivery service.

All Contractor vessels apply a standard concerning the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health [Ref B7]. This standard has been extended for the GEP Project and will apply for the onshore activities.

Depending on the quantity of hazardous substance used or generated and exposure frequency, three types of control approach can be applied, as summarised below and in Table 8-48:

Control Approach 1 – Informal Assessment – The user shall read and follow requirements of Safety Data Sheet (SDS). If there is any doubt, the user should request information / assistance from Contractor HSE Department and Supervisor.

Control Approach 2 – Formal Assessment – Supervisor of the activity where the hazardous substance is used or generated, supported by Contractor HSE Department shall analyse SDS, establish necessary control measures and record them within the JSA. If there is any doubt, the Contractor HSE Department should request information / assistance from Contractor Project HSE Team.

Control Approach 3 – Specialist Assessment – Contractor HSE Department shall collect all relevant information (SDS, methods of use, quantity, etc.) and send it to Contractor Project HSE Department for specialist assessment. Any completed specialist assessment shall be retained (electronic copy is acceptable).

Table 8-48 Hazardous material control approach risk assessment

Quantities used / generated

Exposure Frequency

One-off task with duration less than one shift

Periodic for duration of several shifts

Continuous during considerable period of time (GEP Project duration)

Grams / Millilitres Control Approach 1 Control Approach 1 Control Approach 2

Kilograms / Litres Control Approach 1 Control Approach 2 Control Approach 2

Tones / Cubic Meters Control Approach 2 Control Approach 3 Control Approach 3

Hazardous materials shall be stored and disposed of according to SDS and requirements of the Pollution Control and Waste Management standard [Ref B6].

All hazardous materials delivered to site will be accompanied by a SDS, classified and labelled on site according to the Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (GHS) in accordance


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

with the Work Health and Safety (National Uniform Legislation) Act 2011 and Regulations. Under the GHS, both hazardous substances and dangerous goods are deemed “hazardous chemicals”.

Hazardous materials management procedures will be developed for each of the GEP Onshore construction activities. The procedures will provide detailed information on the management of hazardous materials for implementation on site and will include as a minimum:

roles and responsibilities relating to hazardous materials management

containment of hazardous materials

specifications for storage, handling and transport of hazardous materials including disposal.

inspections and audits

reporting

maximum chemical inventories

selection processes for chemicals

spill response equipment

spill response plans.

The objectives, targets and indicators for managing dangerous goods and hazardous materials are provided in Table 8-49. The management measures to be implemented to achieve these objectives and targets are outlined in Table 8-50. The management measures and TARP for managing spills or dangerous goods or hazardous materials are provided in the following section on spill prevention and response (8.1.19). The residual risk for hazardous material impacts is low.

Table 8-49 Hazardous materials management objectives, targets and indicators


Minimise the possible environmental impact from the use, transport and storage of dangerous goods and hazardous materials

No discharge of hazardous materials into Darwin Harbour, or on site which cause or threaten to cause pollution resulting in environmental harm

Number of incident reports and severity of incidents resulting from accidental discharge of hazardous materials

All hydrocarbon and chemical containment to be constructed and used in accordance with legislative, industry requirements and Australian Standards

Number of non-conformances from audits and inspections relating to the storage of hydrocarbons and chemicals

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of the importance of correct dangerous goods and hazardous materials practices

All personnel (including subcontractors) to complete an induction which will include information on the management of dangerous goods and hazardous materials


Waste awareness and management to be included in applicable JSA/SWMS

Number of sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering waste awareness and management


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-50 Hazardous materials management measures



All personnel will be trained in the management and identification of dangerous goods and hazardous materials.



(Contractor).

The site induction will include the following specific components for spill response:

construction activities which pose a risk of releasing hazardous materials

the principle of “spill, contain, clean-up” when responding to spills

location of spill equipment and use of spill equipment and spill response techniques for common scenarios.



(Contractor).

Regular reinforcement (such as through toolbox talks) of dangerous goods and hazardous materials management.

GIIP Throughout works


(Contractor).

Personnel who routinely handle hazardous materials or wastes will receive training in handling, transporting and storing hazardous materials or wastes, in reporting and documentation requirements (and in spill clean-up techniques and practices, refer to Section 8.1.19).




(Contractor).

Any plant and equipment will be operated by an appropriately trained person. Environmental compliance register item 21.06


(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Every effort will be made as to select work processes and practice which do not require use of generation of hazardous substances (hazard elimination).

GIIP During construction design and planning


(Contractor).

Hazardous materials management procedures will be developed and will include:

roles and responsibilities relating to hazardous materials management

containment of hazardous materials

specifications for storage, handling and transport of hazardous materials including disposal.

inspections and audits

reporting

maximum chemical inventories

selection processes for chemicals

spill response equipment

spill response plans.



(Contractor).

Licensed suppliers will be used for material supply, transfer and transport. Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail (7th edition)

Dangerous Goods Regulations (NT)

During procurement

Procurement team.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

On site management

All hazardous materials will be clearly identified and stored appropriately and SDSs for all hazardous materials present on site will be available for on-site personnel.


Australian Standards

At all times Subcontractor. Site


Appropriate storage facilities will be utilised for the storage of chemicals, fuel and hazardous waste. These storage facilities will meet the following requirements in accordance with AS 1940:

the tank shall be capable of resisting damage from the impact of a motor vehicle, or suitable collision protection shall be provided

the storage tank will rest on a foundation adequate to support, without unacceptable or uneven settling, the direct load when the storage tank is full to capacity

all piping connections to the tank shall be above the normal maximum fill level

the tank shall be fitted with a means of determining the level of its contents

minimum separation distances between hazardous material storage tanks will be implemented as per AS 1940

each tank shall be distinguished from any other tank by individual identification numbers.





F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

All hydrocarbons and chemicals will be stored in tanks with integral secondary containment which shall be one of the following:

a double-walled tank

a tank having secondary containment and an external, fire-rated covering

a tank with an attached or integrated spillage compound.

The containment design and construction of secondary storage compounds will meet the following requirements:

located away from busy areas, especially roads

located at least 30 m from any waterway, drainage line or environmentally sensitive area, unless approved by the Environmental Specialist (Contractor)

a concrete or low-permeability base (less than 30 mm/annum) such as High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) liners or compacted clay and cement / concrete

the capacity to contain a minimum of 110% of the volume of the largest storage container within bund

a perimeter cut-off drainage with holding sump

a roof or shed over storage areas except temporary locations of packages in use, to prevent ingress of rain into bunds and potential contamination

possible ramped entrance to the containment structure for ease of access of lifting equipment where

industrial warehouse ventilation/exhaust fan for closed storage containers

cement / concrete containment area walls must:

- be made from concrete blocks or equivalent

- be coated with coal tar epoxy or bitumen to seal the plaster

- have security or access restrictions appropriate to the substances and volumes in storage.


NT Dangerous Goods Act (2012)

Australian Standards



Sewage will be collected onshore in tanks and disposed of offsite by an appropriately licensed contractor at an appropriately licensed facility.

GIIP

Section 8.1.17 (Waste management)



Records of dangerous goods and hazardous materials received, stored and dispensed will be maintained and reconciled.

GIIP Weekly Logistics coordinator.

Subcontractor.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Spill response (Hydrocarbon spill management is covered in Section 8.1.19)

Spill response materials and equipment (including personal protective equipment) will be made available at all times and will be appropriate to the substances being stored on site and in accordance with the SDS.




All spills (any uncontrolled release of hydrocarbon, chemicals, liquid waste or other hazardous substances) must be reported and cleaned up in a timely manner as per the spill response TARP in Table 8-53.

GIIP At all times All personnel.

Spills will be prevented from entering waterways by the use of secondary containment and spill kit. GIIP At all times All personnel.

Where any chemicals are identified and/or brought onto site for application during spill response (e.g. neutralising agents, lime, ethylene glycol, sodium hypochlorite or other disinfectants), a risk assessment will be undertaken and a work instruction will be developed for the use of the chemical.



Monitoring

Dangerous goods and hazardous materials storage areas and bunds will be inspected as part of the weekly inspection regime to verify conformance with this CEMP.

GIIP Weekly Subcontractor. Environmental


Fittings, pipes and hoses on tanks or equipment which store hazardous materials will be inspected weekly and maintained as required.

GIIP Weekly Subcontractor. Environmental



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.1.19 Onshore hydrocarbon spill response

A spill is any uncontrolled release of hydrocarbons or other hazardous substances / chemicals which may result in a health and safety hazard or adverse environmental impact, including water and soil contamination and effects on flora or fauna.

This section deals specifically with hydrocarbon spill response as hydrocarbons have been identified as the significant spill risk for the onshore construction activities. Response management for other hazardous material spills is covered in the Hazardous Materials EMF presented in Section 8.1.18 and specifically in the hazardous materials management procedures that will be created as indicated in that section.

The hazardous materials EMF (Section 8.1.18) also provides for spill prevention for all hazardous materials including hydrocarbons.

A variety of hydrocarbons will be used on site including diesel fuel, hydraulic fluid, brake fluid, engine oil and lubricants.

Potential sources of hydrocarbon spills or leaks are:

heavy machinery such as plant equipment

refuelling of onshore equipment

inappropriate storage and handling of hydrocarbons

collision between plant, equipment and vehicles

long-term slow leaks from fuel tanks

internal pumping and transfer operations.

Spill prevention and response control measures are provided to minimise the likelihood of, and impacts resulting from, the uncontrolled release of such substances. The residual risk for onshore hydrocarbon spills is moderate.

The objectives, targets and indicators for hydrocarbon spill response are provided in Table 8-51. The management measures to be implemented to achieve these objectives and targets are outlined in Table 8-52. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the onshore spill response TARP will be initiated (Table 8-53 in conjunction with Table 8-54).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-51 Hydrocarbon spill response objectives, targets and indicators


Prevent environmental impacts from chemical, hydrocarbon and hazardous waste spills

Zero environmental incidents resulting from hydrocarbon spills or leaks

Number of incident reports and severity of incidents resulting from hydrocarbon spills

100% compliance with CEMP and spill response procedures

Number of non-conformances from audits and inspections relating to spill management

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of effective spill response practices

100% attendance of chemicals and hazardous materials training by supervisors and personnel who routinely handle, transport and/or use hazardous materials or wastes

Training presentation material and records

Spill awareness and management to be included in applicable JSA/SWMS

Number of sign-off sheets from JSA/SWMS covering spill prevention and response


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-52 Hydrocarbon spill prevention and response management measures



The site induction will include the following specific components for spill response:

construction activities which pose a risk of releasing hydrocarbons

The principle of “spill, contain, clean-up” when responding to spills

location of spill equipment and use of spill equipment and spill response techniques for common scenarios.



(Contractor).

Regular reinforcement (such as through toolbox talks) of spill response management. GIIP Throughout works


(Contractor).

Personnel who routinely handle hazardous materials or wastes will receive training in handling, transporting and storing hazardous materials or wastes; in reporting and documentation requirements; and in spill clean-up techniques and practices.




(Contractor).

Contractor shall ensure that any plant and equipment used will be operated by an appropriately trained person.


(Contractor).

Design and planning Onshore facilities will be designed and constructed in such a way that spills and leaks can be constrained or isolated, particularly in areas where there is an elevated risk of spill.





On site management SDSs will be available on all facilities (located in close proximity to storage) to aid in the identification of appropriate spill clean-up and disposal methods for any oil product or chemical.




Hydrocarbon drips and grease specks will be cleaned up on an ongoing basis and leaks will be repaired as soon as practicable. If a leak is not repaired immediately, containment must be provided to collect leaking materials and a process put in place to regularly inspect and maintain the containment.




F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


All construction plant and equipment will be subject to regular maintenance and servicing to check mechanical integrity and operability.

GIIP Monthly Subcontractor Darwin Site.


In the event of a spill from plant or equipment, the equipment will be temporarily stood down and the cause or deficiency will be identified and repaired before the equipment is put back into operation.

Any plant or equipment that is found to cause repeated spill incidents may be required to be permanently removed from site.



Licensed suppliers will be used for hydrocarbon supply, transfer and transport. Dangerous Goods Act (NT)

At all times Procurement team.

No refuelling activities will be carried out over water. GIIP During refuelling



Where refuelling near water is required, a risk assessment will be undertaken to identify any additional risks and mitigation measures and spill response preparedness will be implemented.

GIIP When refuelling near water



Spill response

Spill response materials and equipment (including personal protective equipment) will be made available at all times and will be appropriate to the substances being stored on site and in accordance with the SDS.




All spills (any uncontrolled release of hydrocarbon, chemicals, liquid waste or other hazardous substances) must be reported and cleaned up in a timely manner as per the spill response TARP Table 8-53.


Upon identification of a spill, the appropriate spill response will be initiated and the appropriate supervisor and site management will be notified as per the spill response TARP in Table 8-53.


Spills will be prevented from entering waterways by the use of secondary containment and spill kit.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


All personnel undertaking spill response and clean-up must wear the appropriate PPE required in the SDS.


Where any chemicals are identified and/or brought onto site for application during spill response (e.g. neutralising agents, lime, ethylene glycol, sodium hypochlorite or other disinfectants), a risk assessment will be undertaken and a work instruction will be developed for the use of the chemical.



Disposal of spill clean-up materials will be managed as prescribed in this CEMP in onshore waste management (Section 8.1.17).

Section 8.1.17 At all times Subcontractor. Darwin Site


Fuel or chemical suppliers will carry suitable and sufficient spill-response materials. GIIP At all times Subcontractor. HSE Manager.

Inspections and Monitoring

In the event of an uncontained spill, a monitoring program will be designed and implemented to detect contamination in surface water, groundwater and marine sediment (where relevant), and will be relevant and appropriate to the spill history and any remediation and clean-up program carried out as required.

WMPC Act (NT)

Assessment of Site Contamination (NEPC 1998)

ANZECC Guidelines [Ref D10]

As required Subcontractor. Environmental

Specialist.

Spill-response equipment will be inspected on a weekly basis to check the kits are adequately equipped and suitable for use.

GIIP Weekly Subcontractor. HSE Manager.

Dangerous goods and hazardous materials storage areas and bunds will be inspected as part of the weekly inspection regime to verify conformance with this CEMP, as per Section 8.1.18.

Section 8.1.18 Weekly Subcontractor. Environmental

Specialist.

Fittings, pipes and hoses on tanks or equipment which store hazardous materials will be inspected weekly and maintained as required, as per Section 8.1.18.

Section 8.1.18 Weekly Subcontractor. Darwin Site



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-53 Onshore spill response TARP


No spill A hydrocarbon spill less than 200 L occurs and is contained within a bunded area or with an area that has a sealed surface

A spill of hydrocarbons that is not contained and therefore may result in potential soil or water contamination

OR

A spill over 200 L

Individual who identifies spill (subcontractor or contractor personnel).

Continue to implement management measures and procedures.

Report spill as an incident to direct supervisor.

Apply the spill response measures detailed in Table 8-54.


Apply the spill response measures detailed in Table 8-54.

Direct supervisor (subcontractor or contractor).

Conduct regular inspections of spill equipment, storage facilities and hazardous material locations.

Verify clean-up is adequate.


If subcontractor, report the spill immediately to the Contractor Darwin representative.

Supervise containment of the spill and direct clean-up of the area.


Conduct an investigation into the cause and potential impact of the spill, and determine whether remediation or ongoing monitoring is required.




Report the incident to Company as an environmental incident (Table 11-1).

Notify Company immediately (Table 11-1).

Where a spill impacts the marine environment, notify the Darwin Port Harbour Master.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320



Provide advice/direction on spill clean-up and waste management.


Provide advice/direction on spill clean-up, impact assessment, monitoring and waste management.

Assist in investigation and review of relevant management measures or procedures. Seek advice from technical experts as required.


Table 8-54 Spill response measures and actions relating to spill type

Spill type Control Contain Clean up

Hydrocarbon spills on land or in intertidal area

Identify if spilled substance has hazardous properties.

Alert other personnel on site.

All spills within the intertidal area that are above 1 L must be reported immediately to Company.

Control the spill at source when it is safe to do so (e.g. by closing valves, isolating burst hydraulic hose).

Remove heat and ignition sources (e.g. switch off vehicles, equipment and electrics; beware of static from metal shovels).

If it is safe to do so, contain the extent of spill by:

blocking drains

diverting and absorbing spill using booms, pads, and particulates

collecting any free product using waste sucker truck

building containment dykes or digging cut-off trench if necessary to prevent flow off site or into watercourse

preventing spills entering drains.

Collect affected soil and used spill-containment materials with shovels and place in appropriate containers.

Store affected soil and used spill containment materials in a sealed container and place in a designated bunded area.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2 NEARSHORE

8.2.1 Heritage management

An overview of heritage legislation, commitments and Company management is outlined in Section 8.1.1.

This section addresses the potential risk of vessel activity occurring within heritage protection zones surrounding aboriginal sacred sites or maritime-wreck sites (excluding zones where entry has been approved by the relevant authority) that is not in breach of the requirements of that zone (see Section 6.5 for a summary of heritage protection zone requirements). There are several non-aboriginal heritage sites within the nearshore area [Ref A4]. There is a single aboriginal Sacred Site within 100 m of the anchoring corridor for a short section of the route [Ref A3]. All relevant Aboriginal and non-aboriginal heritage sites have been identified in the Heritage Management Plan: Heritage Sites (Aboriginal and WWII) in the onshore development area and sacred sites in Darwin Harbour (HMP: A&WWII) [Ref A3] and the Non-Aboriginal Heritage Management Plan: Nearshore Development Area (NAHMP) [Ref A4]. Relevant non-aboriginal heritage sites and their protection zones are shown in Figure 6-14.

This section outlines the management measures that will be implemented to comply with the requirements of heritage protection zones for vessels traversing Darwin Harbour. Potential physical disturbance of heritage items by anchoring activities is addressed in Section 8.2.2.There is a small chance that heritage items may be discovered during GEP nearshore project activities. The appropriate response should a potential heritage item be discovered is covered in this section and is in accordance with the Company HMP: A&WWII and NAHMP. The residual risk for non-compliance with protection zones is low.

The objectives, targets and indicators for nearshore heritage management are provided in Table 8-55. The management measures to be implemented to achieve these objectives and targets are outlined in Table 8-56. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, nearshore heritage management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-57).

Table 8-55 Nearshore heritage management objectives, targets and indicators


Avoid all unauthorised intrusions into heritage protection zones.

Zero incidents involving unauthorised intrusions into heritage protection zones.

Number of non-conformances identified in incident investigations or inspections of vessel track logs.

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of potential cultural heritage issues.

All vessel personnel (including subcontractors) to complete an induction which will include information on heritage.

Induction presentation material and induction records.

Heritage issues to be included in pre-start meetings at least once a month.

Pre-start meeting records.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-56 Nearshore cultural heritage environmental management measures

Management Action Reference Timing Responsibility Induction and training

Heritage awareness training during inductions will include:

the cultural values of the nearshore site

the location and requirements of heritage protection zones

the importance of not intruding on heritage exclusion sites

training on the obligations of relevant personnel to comply with the CEMP management measures and report any incidents involving heritage

consequences for non-conformance with heritage protection requirements.

HSE Induction and Training Procedure

Environmental compliance register item H1.1, H1.2, H1.3, H1.4, H1.5



(Contractor).

Vessel operations

Management frameworks will be developed specifically for anchoring activities (refer to Section 8.2.2). Vessels to anchor in designated anchoring locations in accordance with DPC directions.




(Contractor).

Appropriate heritage protection zones will be observed around Aboriginal sacred sites and non-Aboriginal maritime heritage sites, in accordance with the Company’s HMP: A&WWII [Ref A3] and NAHMP [Ref A4]. Requirements for heritage protection zones are presented in Section 6.5.

NAHMP [Ref A4]

HMP: A&WWII [Ref A3]



(Contractor).

All vessels have GPS coordinates and maps identifying wreck and sacred site locations and their applicable protection zones within the GEP nearshore area. These zones will be shown on the vessel positioning system.

Where the feature is available, early warning / proximity alarms will be used to provide vessel masters with an early warning mechanism when approaching a heritage protection zone. Buffer distances will be established within vessel navigation system.



Vessel Master.

Any potential heritage items discovered during nearshore operations will result in temporary suspension of the work in the immediate vicinity. The Vessel master will notify the Contractor Darwin Site Representative (who will inform Company). Contractor Darwin Site Representative will inform NT government in accordance with NAHMP [Ref A4].

NAHMP [Ref A3] At all times Vessel Master. Darwin Site


Should damage occur to known heritage wreck or object(s) during nearshore construction activities, the procedure shown in Figure 8-4 and described in the nearshore heritage TARP (Table 8-57) will be implemented.

HMP: A&WWII [Ref A3] At all times Vessel Master Environmental

Specialist.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Management Action Reference Timing Responsibility Monitoring and inspections

Minimum weekly inspections of vessel track logs to verify compliance with heritage protection zone requirements.

GIIP At least weekly Subcontractor. HSE

Coordinator (Contractor).

Company.

Table 8-57 Nearshore heritage TARP

Responsibility Normal situation Level 1 Level 2 No unauthorised entry into a

heritage protection zone or sacred site.

Unauthorised entry into a heritage protection zone or sacred site.

Unauthorised entry into heritage protection zone or sacred site and damage occurs to the zone/site.

Vessel Master Continue with awareness of location and requirements of heritage protection zones and sacred sites in relation to works being undertaken.

Immediately withdraw from the heritage protection zone or sacred site.

Report as incident to Site Representative.

Review procedures and identify corrective actions to be implemented.

Report incident to Contractor.

Follow process in Figure 8-4 of CEMP.

HSE Coordinator (Contractor) in conjunction with Company representative

Inspections of vessel track logs to verify compliance with heritage protection zone and sacred site requirements.

Follow up inspection / audit to confirm implementation of corrective actions

Report incident to Company


Follow process in Figure 8-4 of CEMP.

Facilitate any internal or external inspections / audits to be carried out

Carry out post audit inspection to ensure any required corrective actions have been implemented by subcontractor.


Participate in the incident investigation into the incident and review of management measures and procedures

Follow-up inspections


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 8-4 Response to accidental disturbance of heritage sites of significance

Damage occurs to known heritage wreck or object(s) during

nearshore construction activities

All work in the immediate vicinity of the damaged wreck or object(s) will cease

CWS to immediately notify the CSEA and CMA, providing details of the incident so that suitable temporary

protection measures can be determined.

Abbreviations: HB – NT DLPE Heritage Branch CMA – Company Marine Archaeologist CSEA – Company Senior Environmental Advisor (Darwin) CWS – Contractor Work Supervisor

As soon as possible CWS is required to complete an

incident report

The CSEA will contact the HB to report the incident and arrange an urgent inspection of

the wreck or object(s)

The CMA is to advise on the most suitable and practicable temporary protection

measures to be put in place.

HB inspect at their discretion. CMA inspect the damage to wreck site

or object(s)

Based on the findings of the inspection the CMA will prepare advice on the extent of the damage and proposed remedial actions to be undertaken.

The CSEA will advise the HB of the proposed remedial actions and will

seek approval to undertake the proposed actions

The CMA will implement any approved remedial actions.

If required, the CMA will undertake monitoring of

the damaged site or object(s) to assess the

effectiveness of the remedial actions taken.

Alternative work methods will be developed to allow work to continue without impact on site of significance


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.2 Anchoring management

This section outlines the requirements to minimise the risk of impact from anchoring activities on sites of cultural or historic significance, existing submerged infrastructure and sensitive marine habitats (such as corals and seagrass). Anchoring management is considered specifically for Semac-1 pipelay activities and generally for all associated support vessels and the SSDV.

For the purpose of this anchoring management framework, the term ‘anchor exclusion zone’ refers to any place where anchoring is not allowed. The Figure 8-5 shows these anchor exclusion zones along the GEP. These include heritage protection zones (see Figure 6-14). A description of the heritage protection zones is provided in Section 6.5. Sensitive marine habitats are also considered to be anchor exclusion zones.

Emergency situations requiring anchoring have not been included in the plan as the priority in these situations is for the preservation of life and secondly vessels/property.

8.2.2.1 Pipelay support vessels and the SSDV

There are no planned anchoring requirements for pipelay support vessels (AHTs, supply vessel and survey vessel) during pipelay activities or the SSDV. As pipelay operations will be continuous all support vessels will also be operating continuously and will return to a wharf or DPC assigned mooring when not undertaking operational duties.

In the event that a vessel was required to anchor this would be done in accordance with DPC requirements and under DPC direction and outside of any anchor exclusion zones (see Figure 8-5).

8.2.2.2 Semac-1 pipelay activities

Anchoring of the Semac-1 during pipelay activities is a complex operation involving 12 anchors and dedicated AHTs to achieve the required anchoring patterns. Semac-1 uses the (bow) anchors to allow the barge to pull itself forward and therefore for the pipeline to be laid from the rear of the barge. Rear and side anchors also assist in maintaining the stability of the Semac-1.

Correct anchor placement and more importantly correct anchor line tension is essential to ensure the pipelay barge maintains position and in control of the pipeline. Positioning is critical to ensure the pipeline is laid in the correct location. Failure to control the tension on the pipeline can result in under-tensioning, a pipeline buckle or the loss of the pipeline from the barge. Further detail on the methodology used to achieve correct anchor positioning and line tension is provided in Appendix I.

As described in Chapter 6 the seabed along the pipeline route predominantly consists of muddy to sandy-mud substrates and is suitable for anchor placement activities. The challenges associated with the anchoring activities of the Semac-1 during pipelay activities relate to the relatively strong currents that can occur in Darwin Harbour and the avoidance of anchoring exclusion zones (Figure 8-5).

8.2.2.3 Pre-mobilisation planning

Prior to commencement of pipelay Contractor will prepare an anchor handling procedure specific to the operations in Darwin Harbour. The anchor handling procedure outlines the requirements for anchor handling including identification of obstacles/anchor exclusion zones and the observance of anchor placement within the approved pipelay anchor corridor. The general corridor width is approximately 1300 m but varies as a consequence of the exclusion areas features. The widest area of the corridor occurs in the vicinity of the power and communications cables that cross the GEP route (refer to Figure 8-5).

Contractor also conducts a mooring analysis that incorporates Semac-1 requirements with the local conditions (tides, winds, seabed characteristics, obstructions) and pipeline tension requirements. The output of the mooring analysis is then used to prepare anchor pattern drawings for critical areas to supplement the standard anchor pattern that will be used under normal operations (where no obstructions or exclusion areas exist). An example of a proposed anchor pattern is provided as Appendix H.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

The anchor pattern drawings will be approved by Company prior to the commencement of pipelay activities. Drawings will include the locations of all known heritage sites and their relevant protection zones, existing submerged infrastructure and sensitive marine habitats that should be avoided when placing anchors.

8.2.2.4 Anchor Handling Operations

Prior to commencement of pipelay activities the anchor pattern drawings are transferred into the TMS (an electronic survey system) on board the Semac-1 and AHTs. The TMS shows in real time the location of the Semac-1, AHTs, anchors and exclusion areas on each vessels bridge and the display will also be available for transfer to an onshore location for viewing in real time if required.

Contractor has developed proposed standard anchor handling and placement procedures outlined in Appendix H. These contain detailed information to allow the safe anchoring of vessels undertaking pipelay activities in the vicinity of any nearshore sites of heritage significance, existing submerged infrastructure and sensitive habitats.

While the Semac-1 Master will comply with the approved anchor patterns, under certain circumstances it may be necessary for the Semac-1 Master to modify the final anchor pattern. Changes to the anchor pattern may be required based on consideration of the local conditions (adverse weather, currents etc), the safety of the barge/personnel and maintenance of the correct tension on the pipeline.

The Semac-1 Master, in determining an alternative anchor location, will ensure the anchor is not placed in any anchor exclusion zones or that operations will not interfere with any anchor exclusion zones including sensitive marine habitat types.

In the event that an anchor is required to be placed outside the approved pipelay anchor corridor (but not within an anchor exclusion area), Company will assess and approve any proposed deviation prior to anchor placement. The decision to place and approve an anchor placement external to the anchoring corridor should only occur under extenuating circumstances that require an immediate response.

Placement of an anchor outside of the nominated pipelay anchor corridor and in accordance with the agreed procedure does not infer any potential increase in environmental impact as the number of anchor placements does not necessarily increase.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 8-5 Pipelay corridor including anchor exclusion zone


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.2.5 Environmental Management Framework

Table 8-58 outlines the objectives, targets and performance measures for anchoring management associated with the Semac-1 pipelay activities. Table 8-59 outlines the management measures to be implemented.

Table 8-60 outlines the trigger action response plan to be implemented in response to a failure to anchor within the pre-approved areas.

Table 8-58 Anchoring management objectives, targets and indicators


Avoid damage to sites of heritage significance and existing submerged infrastructure due to anchor placement and associated activities

No damage to heritage sites of significance or existing submerged infrastructure due to pipelay vessel anchoring activities

Number of incidents with the potential to, or have resulted in damage to heritage sites of significance, or existing infrastructure

No unauthorised breaches of designated anchor exclusion zones

Number of non-conformances identified through audits and inspection of anchor placement records

No vessel will pass over any exclusion zone maintained around sites of heritage significance.

Number of non-conformances identified through audits and inspection of vessel track logs

Avoid / minimise disturbance to sensitive marine habitat areas (Figure 6-14)

No anchoring outside of designated areas

Number of incidents which resulted in anchoring occurring outside designated areas

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of anchoring management

All vessel personnel (including subcontractors) to complete an induction which will include information on anchoring


Anchoring management to be included in pre-start meetings at least once a month

Pre-start meeting records


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-59 Anchoring management measures



The anchor handling tug crews will be appropriately trained and experienced in anchor handling.




(Contractor).

All relevant crew will receive an induction with regard to anchor handling management measures and procedures including anchor exclusion zones and buffer distances.



(Contractor).

Planning

Detailed procedures for anchor handling and placement (including buoy handling). Environmental compliance register item 3.04, 28.07


Lead Project Engineers.

Specific pipelay anchor patterns will be prepared for locations requiring avoidance of seabed features.

Contractor standard practice

Prior to pipelay Lead Project Engineers.

Anchor pattern drawings and TMS to ensure a minimum required buffer zone is maintained around heritage sites, existing infrastructure and sensitive marine habitats. Minimum anchor exclusion distances will be applied as identified in the Pipelay Operations section of this table.



Pipelay anchor patterns to be approved by Company. Company specification Prior to pipelay Environmental Specialist.

Pipelay anchor pattern locations to be incorporated into TMS on board the Semac-1 and AHTs.



Pipelay anchor pattern drawings to include/identify pipelay corridor boundaries and anchor exclusion zones.

Additional Contractor measure


Pipelay Operations

All vessels will be fitted with GPS equipment and coordinates for all wreck sites and the heritage protection zones identified in Darwin Harbour are to be maintained in TMS and on board each vessel.

Environmental compliance register item H6.1


Vessel Master.

Anchors carried across known wreck sites will be secured on the deck of the AHT before they are moved.

Environmental compliance register item H8.3

During works Vessel Master.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


A precautionary zone will be applied within 200 m of the ConocoPhillips Bayu-Darwin gas pipeline in the nearshore development area, prohibiting dropping or dragging an anchor, or performing an action that could damage the pipeline (according to Section 66(5) of the Energy Pipelines Act (NT)). This zone will be entered in vessel navigation systems and TMS.



Anchors will be placed within the anchor corridor in accordance with the approved anchor pattern at each location. Field adjustment of final anchor position within the anchor corridor made by Semac-1 Master depending on actual site conditions.

Company specification During works Vessel Master.

Adherence to the requirements of heritage protection zones around significant heritage sites, sensitive habitats and existing infrastructure by Semac-1. Procedures and anchoring methodologies designed to achieve compliance are detailed in Appendix H.

Environmental compliance register item H7.5. H13.2


Position of each anchor to be logged after completion of placement. Contractor standard practice


Adherence to the requirements of heritage protection zones around significant heritage sites by all vessels as listed in the NAHMP [Ref A4] and HMP: A&WWII [Ref A3], as detailed in the heritage management Section 8.2.1.

Environmental compliance register item H7.1, H7.2, H7.4, H13.2


Daily weather forecasts will be available on the Semac-1 and incorporated into daily planning activities.



To minimise the risk of anchor drag the anchor will be tested for the required holding capacity upon placement.



Anchor wire tension will be continuously monitored during anchor movement to ensure anchor wire does contact the seabed.




F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Anchor wires passing over anchor exclusion zones will remain clear of these features. Anchor and anchor-wire separation from known wreck sites are as follows (as a minimum):

vertical 20 m for water depths greater than 40 m, and half water depth for water depths less than 40 m from the highest point of the wreck

horizontal (in drag direction) 200 m

horizontal (other than drag direction) 100 m

Horizontal separation buffers are in addition to any existing anchor exclusion zones in place

All exclusion zones will be shown in TMS and on anchor placement drawings.

Further details on how this separation will be achieved is presented in Appendix H (‘Proposed Anchor Handling Procedures near Obstacles’), including mechanisms used to float anchor wires and to avoid failure.

Environmental compliance register item H8.2, H8.4


Master of Semac-1 will have ultimate responsibility for final anchor placement location with due consideration to personnel and vessel safety and maintenance of correct location and pipeline tension.


During works Vessel Master (Semac-1).

Master of Semac-1 will comply with the following requirements before placement of an anchor outside the pipelay anchor corridor.

Inform Company representative on board Semac-1 of requirements to place anchor outside pipelay anchor corridor.

Identify extenuating circumstances that requires placement of anchor outside pipelay anchor corridor.

Confirms that proposed anchor placement location will not impact known heritage protection area, existing infrastructure or sensitive marine habitat areas.

Obtains approval from Company representative on board Semac-1 before proceeding with anchor placement.

Records all details in vessel log and provides a separate report to Company within 24 hours.

Company specification During works Vessel Master (Semac-1).


Inspections of anchor logs to verify compliance with this CEMP Contractor standard practice

Weekly during pipelay activities

HSE Coordinator.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-60 Anchoring management TARP

Responsibility Normal situation Level 1 Level 2 Anchoring within the corridor in

accordance with approved anchor placement patterns

Anchoring outside the corridor without prior approval and not within a sensitive habitat or heritage area

Anchoring outside the corridor without prior approval and within a sensitive habitat or heritage area

Vessel Master Continue with work, maintaining awareness of anchoring management requirements.



Review anchoring management procedures to reduce risk of repeat occurrence.

Anchor to be recovered to non-sensitive location and record previous anchor location (Figure 8-4).


Investigate cause of the incident and review anchoring management measures and procedures accordingly.

Facilitate any internal or external audits or investigations into the incident.

Darwin Site Representative

(Contractor)

Report the incident to Company as part of standard environmental reporting.

Report the incident to Company immediately.

HSE Coordinator (Contractor)

Inspections of vessel track logs to verify avoidance of exclusion areas.

Participate in the incident investigation into the incident and review of anchoring management measures and procedures.

Implement follow-up inspections.

Participate in the incident investigation into the incident and review of anchoring management measures and procedures.

Participate in follow-up inspections.


Participate in any incident investigation into the incident and review of anchoring management measures and procedures.

Implement follow-up inspections.


F281-AH-PLN-10013Rev. 1C Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.3 Protected marine species management

Protected marine species that inhabit or occasionally frequent the NT coastal waters include dolphins, dugongs, sawfish and marine turtles (see Chapter 5). Vessel movements and some construction activities within the harbour may pose a potential risk to these species. It is unlikely that whales will be present within NT coastal waters during the duration of the GEP Project. However, as part of a cautious approach, management measures to reduce potential impacts on whales have been included in this section.

All reasonable efforts to reduce impacts on protected marine species will be implemented as preventative management measures. In the unlikely event that impacts to “matters of national environmental significance” occur, corrective actions will be considered and implemented on a case by case basis in order to adaptively respond and to reduce the risk of re-occurrence.

The management measures detailed in this CEMP are compliant with the Company’s Marine Megafauna Interaction and Observation Procedure [Ref A6].

8.2.3.1 Physical interactions

The following activities may pose a risk of physical interaction with marine fauna:

Vessels movements, primarily cargo barges, support and survey vessels as these vessels have the greatest mobility. The Semac-1 is a relatively immobile vessel and poses a minimal risk of interactions with marine megafauna. The SSDV will be more mobile than the Semac-1, travelling at slow speeds to transport rocks from the rock load out facility (RLOF) to the recently laid pipeline for a period of approximately 5 months.

Rock installation: The possibility of construction equipment or materials (rocks), coming into physical contact with protected species and causing injury or death, cannot be discounted. The likelihood, however, of physical contact occurring during this activity is considered to be very low as the construction activities will take place at a slow speed and in a controlled manner.

Table 8-61 outlines the objectives, targets and performance measures for protected species vessel interaction management. Table 8-62 outlines the management measures to be implemented. Table 8-64 outlines the trigger action response plan to be implemented in response to failure to implement the management measures.

The management measures detailed in Table 8-62 are focussed on reducing the risk of interaction with marine megafauna. However, the management measures will also reduce the risk of vessel interaction with other types of protected marine species such as sawfish.

Table 8-61 Protected species (physical interaction) objectives, targets and indicators


Minimise the risk of vessel interaction (causing injury or death) to protected marine species

No interaction causing injury or death to protected marine species

Number of incidents relating to marine fauna injury or death

All vessel movements undertaken in compliance with CEMP

Number of non-compliances identified during inspections or audits

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of protected species management issues

All vessel personnel (including subcontractors) to complete an induction which will include information on management of protected species


Marine fauna interaction to be included in pre-start meetings at least once a month



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-62 Protected species vessel interaction management measures



Awareness and training on protected species management (including personnel observation and reporting requirements) will be included in vessel Masters and crew inductions.





(Contractor).

Regular reinforcement (such as at toolbox talks) on marine fauna interaction management measures.


Subcontractor HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Vessel controls

Install propeller guards on all vessels with propellers extending below the keel beam



Vessel Master.

Vessels to adhere to DPC speed restrictions. NT Government Marine Safety Guidelines

At all times Vessel Master.

Interaction guidelines

Vessel Masters or delegate to maintain watch for marine megafauna at all times during transit.

Marine Megafauna Interaction and Observation Procedure [Ref A6]


Follow DoE guidelines (see Figure 8-7) as far as reasonably practicable (non-mobile vessels such as the Semac-1 will not be required to follow the interaction guidelines).

Australian National Guidelines for Whale and Dolphin Watching 2005 [Ref D15]



Respond to whale observations in accordance with vessel interaction procedures including the application of 300 m caution zone and 100 m exclusion zone (see Table 8-63 and Figure 8-6).




Respond to dolphins and dugong observations in accordance with vessel interaction procedures including the application of 150 m caution zone and 50 m exclusion zone (see Table 8-63 and Figure 8-6).

NOTE: Bow riding dolphins are not classified as a near miss, providing the vessel master maintains the speed and course of the vessel.






F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Respond to turtle observations in accordance with vessel interaction procedures including the application of 100 m caution zone and 50 m exclusion zone (see Table 8-63).




Respond to sighting in accordance with vessel interaction procedures outlined in Table 8-63 including application of a “no wash” speed for fauna approaching the vessel within the caution zone during operations.




Do not approach, circle or wait in front of wildlife for the purposes of casual viewing.




Observations prior to beginning rock installation

If marine megafauna (any dolphin, whale, shark, crocodile or dugong) is sighted within a 300 m of the activity location, commencement or recommencement of the construction activities must not occur until there have been no marine fauna sightings within the observation zone for the previous10 minutes (or since the last observation) (refer to Figure 8-7). This observation zone is based on the exclusion zone from the interaction procedures (Table 8-63).



If a turtle is sighted within a 150 m of the activity location, commencement or recommencement of the construction activities must not occur until designated crew confirm the departure of the protected fauna (refer to Figure 8-7). This observation zone in based on the exclusion zone from the interaction procedures (Table 8-63).





All stranded, injured, or dead marine fauna will be reported immediately to Company. The vessel master will contact Contractor Darwin Representative and CDR will inform Company. Refer to Chapter 10 for more information.



At all times Darwin Site Representative.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Crew member onboard of SSDV with training in MFO to observe and record marine fauna during rock placement activities.


Prior to and during rock placement activities (reporting weekly)

Subcontractor

Table 8-63 Marine megafauna interaction restrictions

Marine megafauna

No-approach zone Caution zone Avoiding encounters

Dolphins and dugongs

Within 50 m, including area directly in front or behind out to 150 m

Within 150 m, vessels must operate at speeds <6 knots

No more than three vessels within the caution zone

Vessels will not enter the 150 m caution zone of a calf

If an animal shows signs of being disturbed, vessels shall leave the caution zone at a constant speed of less than 6 knots.

Whales Within 100 m, including area directly in front or behind out to 300 m

Within 300 m, vessels must

operate at speeds <6 knots

No more than three vessels within the caution zone

Vessels will not enter the 300 m caution zone of a calf

If in the vicinity of a cetacean, possible actions include steering away from the cetacean at a constant speed, slowing down and/or stopping gradually.

Marine turtles and crocodiles

Within 50 m Within 100 m, vessels must operate at speeds <6 knots

If an animal shows signs of being disturbed, vessels shall leave the caution zone at a constant speed of less than 6 knots.

Note: A calf (for whales and dolphins) is defined under the EPBC Regulations as an animal that is not more than half the length of an adult of the species.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 8-6 Guidelines on approach distances for dolphins, dugongs and whales

Remember - keep a safe distanceCaution Zone

Within 300 m of a whale

Within 150 m of a dolphin or dugong

No more than three vessels are allowed within the caution zone at any one time

Vessels should operate at no wake speeds within this zone.

Exclusion Zone Do not approach closer than:

100 m to any whale

50 m to any dolphin or dugong.

Whales and dolphins sometimes form social groupings and may approach your vessel - if this happens place the engine in neutral and let the animal(s) come to you; or slow down and continue on course; or steer a straight course away from them


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-64 Protected species (physical interaction) management TARP


No physical interaction between GEP Project related vessels and protected marine species

A physical interaction near miss occurs between GEP Project related vessels (or equipment/materials) and protected marine species occurs

NOTE: Bow riding dolphins are not classified as a near miss, providing the vessel master maintains the speed and course of the vessel.

A physical interaction occurs between GEP Project related vessels (or equipment/materials) and protected marine species occurs, resulting in injury or death

Vessel Master Continue to implement management measures and procedures.



Review protected species management measures and procedures to reduce risk of repeat occurrence.

Incident to be immediately reported to Site Representative.


Investigate cause of the incident and review management measures and procedures accordingly.



Incident to be reported to Company as part of standard environmental reporting.

Incident to be immediately reported to Company.

HSE Coordinator (Contractor)

Continue to monitor and inspect vessel activities.

Participate in the incident investigation into the incident and review of management measures and procedures.

Follow-up inspections.




Participate in the incident investigation

into the incident and review of management measures and procedures.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 8-7 Marine megafauna interaction management pre-commencement flow chart

Record sighting and notify vessel

Master

Observation zone: 300 m for a whale, dolphin or dugong 150 m for a turtle

Any fauna sighted

Do not start rock placement activities until there have been no fauna sightings

within the observation zone for 10 minutes

Begin rock placement activities

Yes

No

Prior to beginning nearshore rock installation – Vessel Master or designated crew to monitor for

marine megafauna within observation zone for 10 minutes


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.4 Underwater noise

The following activities will generate underwater sounds that may be audible for marine fauna:

general vessel movements

rock installation

cofferdam (sheet-piling) installation.

The specific range and types of noises generated by these activities are described in the subsections below.

8.2.4.1 Protected species interaction with underwater noise

Coastal dolphins use sound for navigation, feeding and avoiding predators. The ability of dolphins to perform these behaviours can be compromised by sound generated by human activity [Ref F6]. Dolphins may be temporarily displaced from the vicinity of the nearshore construction activities due to the increase in noise levels. Alternatively the dolphins may adapt (dolphins are known to frequent busy harbours such as Singapore).

Local experience indicates the most likely protected marine species to be present in the Middle Arm area are turtles. Turtles can hear sounds largely in the low frequency range (<1000 Hz), although the bandwidth and peak sensitivity varies between species. The use of sound by turtles is little understood. Experimentally, turtles have initially shown avoidance behaviour, then eventually habituating to the noise [Ref F5].

Little information is available on the auditory systems of dugongs and little research has been undertaken to investigate the sensitivity of dugongs to noise. There are only anecdotal reports of dugongs avoiding areas with high boat traffic.

8.2.4.2 General vessel movements and rock installation

The movement of vessels within the harbour will generate underwater noise. GEP Project vessel movements will produce continuous or transient low intensity noise, at levels similar to the vessels listed in Table 8-65. Darwin Harbour already contains an operational port that generates underwater noise of the same type that will arise from the vessel movements as part of the Ichthys Project. Noise generated by rock installation is likely to be broadband low frequency at modest source levels.

Table 8-65 Examples of the range of noises produced by vessel types

Source Periodicity Typical frequency range (Hz) Indicative source level (dB)

Large tankers and bulk carriers

Variable continuous or transient

Low (10–30 Hz) 180–186

Rig supply tenders Variable continuous or transient

Broadband 177

Powerboats with 80-hp outboard motors

Variable continuous or transient

Broadband up to several kHz 156–175

Vessels equipped with variable pitch propellers and/or thrusters can produce “cavitation” noise, where the propeller blades form gas-filled cavities in the very low pressure water generated on their forward faces. The vessels that may produce cavitation noise within the GEP Project operations covered by this CEMP include tugs, supply tenders and dynamically positioned vessels (SSDV). Pleasure craft and other small vessels fitted with outboard motors use high-speed propellers that generate cavitation noise in the spectrum 1000 Hz – 15 000 Hz and at relatively loud source levels (150–180 dB re 1 μPa). These types of vessels are commonly used throughout Darwin Harbour and generate noise that would be audible to dolphins and turtles.

The effects on protected species of the noise associated with the construction activities covered in this CEMP are most likely to be limited to avoidance or habituation. For this reason, noise generated by vessel movements or rock installation are not considered to pose a credible risk of significant impact upon protected species.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.4.3 Cofferdam installation

Intertidal sheet piling activities will be undertaken over approximately eight weeks. As described in Section 3.4.1.2 sheet piling will be undertaken using a vibration hammer as the primary installation tool with. An impact hammer will be available as a contingency in the event that the vibrating hammer is unable to complete sheet pile installation into firmer granular substrate.

A Noise Management Plan [Ref C4] specific to the installation of the cofferdam has been prepared and submitted to Ichthys Project Dredging Expert Panel (IPDEP) and DoE for review and approval of the sheet piling management controls. Relevant information has been extracted from the Noise Management Plan and is provided below.

8.2.4.4 Vibro piling

The use of relatively low noise piling methods, such as vibro piling, instead of impact piling is a standard alternative noise approach for piling operations. Vibro piling methods produce lower noise levels and are not impulsive in character, thus reducing the likelihood of hearing injury to occur within marine fauna.

An evaluation of vibro sheet piling has been undertaken in order to evaluate the potential impacts to marine fauna from vibro piling and to review the suitability of exclusion zones and shutdown zones to manage potential risks to marine fauna. The evaluation concluded that no long term impacts to significant marine fauna are likely, given:

the absence of critical habitats in the vicinity of the cofferdam (within at least 800 m)

the commonality of other strong natural and anthropogenic sounds in Darwin Harbour

the likelihood that noise levels produced by vibro piling will be below the Temporary Threshold Shift (TTS) noise exposure criteria

the brief and temporary nature of the vibro piling.

No adverse impacts to matters of national environmental significance are predicted as a result of vibro piling operations and no specific mitigation measures are required. Therefore, it is not considered necessary to implement an Exclusion Zone and Shutdown for vibratory piling.

8.2.4.5 Impact hammer

Of the activities described in Section 3, impact sheet piling is expected to be the key source of underwater noise associated with the sheet piling operations. The noise emanating from a sheet pile during an impact sheet piling operation is a function of its hammer type, material type, its size, the force applied to it and the characteristics of the substrate into which it is being driven.

It can be expected that most of the energy from impact sheet piling will transfer into the seabed. Once in the seabed, the energy will then propagate outwards as compressional and shear waves. Due to the damping property of the seabed, a small portion of the total wave energy will form on the water/seabed interface. The noise that is generated by an impact hammer hitting the top of the pile is short in duration, lasting up to the order of 90 milliseconds, and is therefore regarded as pulse signal. The estimated source level (SEL) for the impact hammer proposed is approximately 197 dB re 1 Pa2.s at 1 m with the dominant frequency range of 50–500 Hz.

If piles are being installed in dry conditions these activities are not considered a source of underwater noise.

Theoretical zones of noise influence

Potential effects of noise depend on various factors, including overlap in space and time with the organism and sound source, duration, nature and frequency content of the sound, received level (sound level at the animal), and context of exposure (i.e. animals may be more sensitive to sound during critical times, like feeding, breeding/spawning/nesting, or nursing/rearing young) [Ref F10].


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Zones of Audibility and Behavioural Response

The continuous noise produced by impact sheet piling has the potential to startle marine megafauna. Detection of the noise may lead to a number of responses including:

modified behaviour

interruption of normal behaviour such as feeding, breeding, and nursing

adaptive shifting of vocalisation intensity and/or frequency

displacement from area (short or long term).

Hearing Loss, Discomfort and Injury

Very intense pulse noise is known to have the potential to induce a number of physiological effects and injuries:

physiological effects to the auditory system:

- Temporary threshold shift (TTS): is a temporary reduction in hearing sensitivity as a result of exposure to sound. Exposure to high levels of sound over relatively short time periods can cause the same amount of TTS as exposure to lower levels of sound over longer time periods. The duration of the TTS varies depending on the nature of the stimulus.

- Permanent threshold shift (PTS): is a permanent reduction in hearing sensitivity caused by irreversible damage to the sensory hair cells of the ear.

physiological effects to non-auditory systems (damage to non-auditory body tissue, embolism)

Stress-related effects (compromised viability of individuals, suppression of immune system and vulnerability to disease, decrease in reproductive rate).

Given the typical source levels generated by piling it is possible that marine megafauna may suffer from some level of hearing loss when exposed to peak noise levels. Noise exposure criteria have been established to predict TTS and PTS onset in marine mammals and the relevant criteria discussed below.

Noise exposure criteria and underwater noise modelling

In order to evaluate the potential noise impacts associated with impact sheet piling and to develop appropriate mitigation measures it is first necessary to:

establish noise exposure criteria for various impacts (PTS and TTS)

apply these criteria to underwater noise modelling to predict expected noise levels and determine where criteria are exceeded.

The predicted noise levels have been compared against the exposure criteria to assess the likelihood and potential impacts to marine fauna in the Darwin Harbour.

During the initial assessment of underwater noise as part of the EIS [Ref A1 and A2], the Project adopted a number of noise exposure criteria to characterise the impact zones. To account for potential injuries from all aspects of exposure, dual criteria have been adopted using two acoustic metrics: SPL and SEL. SPL represents the instantaneous sound pressure, while the SEL is a measure of the received sound energy and represents the cumulative sound exposure over time. The SEL criteria are specific to a defined rolling time period (e.g. 30 minutes or 12 hours).

For marine mammals (including cetaceans and dugongs), the project adopted the exposure criteria developed by Southall et al. (Ref F11) at which PTS and TTS have been found to occur. There are no established criteria for sound exposure for turtles, and therefore the exposure criteria adopted by the Project were obtained from other comparable projects. For fish, a “no-injury” SEL value for a single sheet piling pulse derived by Hastings


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

and Popper [Ref F12] was adopted. It should be noted that the criteria use frequency-weighted metrics to account for the different hearing sensitivities across the animal groups.

The project has employed underwater modelling capability that can be used to predict the impacts of anthropogenic noise sources on marine fauna. The underwater model software has been developed by the universities of Miami and Monterey in the USA. The software has been validated and is called MMPE (Monterey Miami Parabolic Equation). The acoustic engineering consultants SVT has developed a front end to the MMPE that has provided a more flexible and efficient prediction of underwater noise levels in three dimensions. Predictions can be made for multiple noise sources in both narrowband and broadband.

The two scenarios modelled for impact sheet piling for the construction of the cofferdam are:

1. Highest Astronomical Tide (HAT) – The modelled inputs for this scenario include a water depth of 5 m (tidal height of 7 m) to represent a spring tide. This scenario consists of the impact hammer operating at the deepest location of the cofferdam at a rate of 5 minutes of impact piling every 15 minutes for a period of 2.5 hours.

2. MSL – The modelled inputs for this scenario include a water depth of 1m (tidal height of 3 m) which represents a neap tide. This scenario consists of the impact hammer operating at the deepest location (1 m depth) of the cofferdam at a rate of 5 mins of impact piling every 15 mins for a period of 2.5 hours.

The modelling results for the HAT scenario (water depth 5 m at source) indicates that the maximum distance for PTS and TTS is up to 220 m and 1890 m from impact piling operations respectively. The SEL plot for 2.5 hours of impact sheet piling shows that sound exposure levels at Channel Island are likely to be above the TTS exposure threshold for 2.5 hours of impact sheet piling. Recent aerial and land based surveys show that Channel Island has a relatively high density of turtles compared to other areas of Darwin Harbour [Ref F14] due to the presence of important foraging habitat (Ref F13). Consequently large numbers of turtles are expected to be present around Channel Island during impact piling. Therefore it is not considered practical or appropriate to establish such a large exclusion zone (1890 m) that would encompass the reefs around Channel Island to manage TTS impacts to marine fauna

The modelling results for the MSL scenario (water depth 1 m at source) indicate that the maximum distance for PTS and TTS is up to 160 m and 900 m from impact piling operations respectively. The SEL plot for 2.5 hours of impact piling shows that sound exposure levels at Channel Island will be well below the TTS exposure threshold for 2.5 hours of impact piling. Therefore it is proposed that impact piling be limited to a maximum water depth of 1m (to reflect the modelled MSL scenario) to ensure that significant sound exposure levels do not reach important turtle foraging habitat at Channel Island and to enable the implementation of practical management zones. These management zones are discussed below.

Exclusion Zone (1000 m)

In the Exclusion Zone, the movement of marine mammals will be monitored to determine whether they are approaching or entering the Shutdown Zone. The Exclusion Zone is a 1000 m management zone which must be observed to be free of marine megafauna for a certain period of time prior to the commencement of impact sheet piling activities and must be monitored at all times during impact piling operations. If any marine megafauna is observed within the Exclusion Zone around the piling location, piling will not commence until the animal has been observed to have moved outside the zone or is not sighted for 30 minutes within the zone.

Shut-down Zone (200 m)

When a marine mammal is sighted within or appears to enter the shut-down zone, piling activities will be stopped immediately. Shutdown Zone is a 200 m management zone that will be observed at all times during impact piling. If any marine fauna is observed to enter this zone, impact piling activities will be temporarily suspended. Piling will not recommence until the animal has been observed to have moved outside the Exclusion Zone, or is not sighted for 30 minutes within the Exclusion Zone. This provides adequate time for


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

marine megafauna to move away from the noise source and therefore decreases the likelihood of a hearing injury occurring.

8.2.4.6 Cofferdam underwater noise management

Table 8-66 outlines the objectives, targets and performance measures for underwater noise management associated with the cofferdam installation activities. Table 8-67 outlines the management measures to be implemented. Table 8-68 outlines the trigger action response plan to be implemented in response to a failure to anchor within the pre-approved areas.

Table 8-66 Cofferdam installation noise management objectives, targets and indicators


To avoid potential temporary hearing damage (TTS) to marine fauna during vibratory sheet piling activities.

Type PTC 10PHFV hammer to be used for vibro piling operations (or vibro hammers with similar or smaller characteristics).

Records will be kept to verify the use of the vibro hammers as indicated in this NMP.

During operations consideration will be given to minimising the vibro hammer energy.

A report will produced and kept on file to show that an evaluation of vibro hammer suitability (in terms minimising energy) has been undertaken during operations.

To avoid potential temporary hearing damage (TTS) to marine fauna during Impact sheet piling activities.

Movements of all marine fauna detected within the Exclusion Zone will be observed and recorded during sheet piling activities

MFO records show that marine fauna sightings and movements are recorded and kept on file (Appendix G).

All impact piling takes place in <1 m water depth.

Depth and GPS recordings to show that all impact piling operations are undertaken in <1m of water.

Impact piling in wet conditions is limited to 2 hours of operation per day.

Impact piling commencement and shutdown times recorded to show that impact piling is not undertaken for more than 2 hours per day.

To avoid damage or death in marine fauna during impact piling activities. (PTS)

No marine fauna within the Exclusion Zone at the commencement of an Impact sheet piling session

MFO records show the number of non-compliances/ incidents related to failure to confirm the Exclusion Zone is clear of marine fauna prior to commencement of sheet piling.

No marine fauna within the Shutdown zone during sheet piling operations unless the animal is observed to have moved outside the Exclusion Zone or is not sighted for 30 minutes within the Exclusion Zone

MFO records show the number of incidents related to failure to cease sheet piling when marine fauna approach within the Shutdown Zone.

No deceased, stranded and/or injured marine fauna found near piling activities with subsequent investigation determining the cause of death/injury related to underwater noise related to sheet piling activities

MFO records show the number of incidents of injury or fatality of marine fauna where investigation attributes the cause to underwater sheet piling noise.

To establish and maintain awareness of underwater noise impacts on marine fauna and the management measures put in place to mitigate these impacts

100% of personnel involved in sheet piling and fauna observation activities to attend HSE induction including information on underwater noise impacts and associated management practices. Relevant personnel identified and 100% to attend training on marine fauna identification and reporting.

Number of people completing HSES induction.

Number of people attending training on marine fauna identification and reporting.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-67 Underwater noise – cofferdam installation management measures



Site induction (for all personnel) to include information on protected marine species reporting and management in Darwin Harbour.



(Contractor).

Continual reinforcement (such as toolbox talks) of obligations related to protected marine species.



Subcontractor.


Planning and design

Extensive geotechnical and piling analyses have been undertaken to determine the optimal and minimum hammer energy required to achieve the pile installations.

Work specification At all times during vibro piling

Subcontractor.


Type PTC 10PHFV hammer to be used for vibro piling operations (or vibro hammers with similar or smaller characteristics).

Work specification At all times during vibro piling



Work scheduling

Sheet-pile driving will be conducted on a continuous basis, using the vibro hammer.

Work specification At all times during piling



If sheet-pile driving is required after dark, only the vibro hammer will be used. Work specification At all times during piling

Subcontractor.


If the impact hammer is required (due to soil conditions), it will preferably be used in dry conditions.

Work specification At all times during impact piling




F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


When impact piling is conducted in wet conditions, it will be done for a maximum of 2 hours during day light hours, within any 24 hour period.




Impact piling in wet conditions– management zones

Marine fauna exclusion and shutdown zones to be applied during impact piling activities. The initial exclusion zone radius distance around the piling site will be 1000 m and the initial shutdown zone radius will be 200 m.


Subcontractor.


The presence of marine mammals will be visually monitored within the shutdown zone and exclusion zones by trained MFOs for 30 minutes before the commencement of impact piling operations.


Subcontractor.


If any marine megafauna is observed within the exclusion zone around the piling location, impact piling will not commence until the animal has been observed to have moved outside the zone or is not sighted for 30 minutes within the zone.

Work specification Prior to beginning impact piling



When a marine mammal is sighted within or appears to enter the shut-down zone, piling activities will be stopped immediately.

Piling will not recommence until the animal has been observed to have moved outside the exclusion zone, or is not sighted for 30 minutes within the exclusion zone.


Subcontractor.


Protected species monitoring

MFOs will continuously undertake visual observations in shutdown and exclusion zones during impact piling activities in wet conditions and shutdown periods.

MFO observations will be taken from the water by means of a survey vessel.

Work specification At all times during impact piling in wet conditions

Subcontractor.


Observations will be recorded using a piling and marine fauna observation log in accordance with Noise Management Plan [Ref C4].

Company’s Marine Fauna Interaction and Observation Procedure [Ref A6]

At all times during observations

Subcontractor.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Records

KP locations of impact piling location, plus start / stop time will be recorded to show that impact piling is conducted..




Reporting

All MFO observations and records will be reviewed and summarised into a weekly report for the duration of the piling activity.

Company’s Marine Fauna Interaction and Observation Procedure [Ref A6]

Weekly during piling activities

Subcontractor.


Company will be notified immediately all incidents involving marine megafauna, or any breaches of the controls specified in this CEMP related to impact piling.


As required Subcontractor.


Company will be notified immediately of all stranded, injured, or dead marine fauna observed.


As required Subcontractor. Darwin Site



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-68 Underwater noise - cofferdam installation TARP


No marine fauna are observed within the exclusion zone during piling

Marine fauna are observed within the shutdown zone during piling and shut down operation procedures are not implemented (single occasion)

Marine fauna are observed within the shutdown zone during piling and shut down operation procedures are not implemented, on multiple occasions

Subcontractor Continue to implement best practice operating procedures.



Review underwater noise management measures and procedures to reduce risk of repeat occurrence.

Incident to be immediately reported to Site Representative.


Investigate cause of the incident and review management measures and procedures accordingly.


Darwin site Representative (Contractor)

Continue to monitor and observe subcontractor work practices.









F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.5 Quarantine management

This section of the CEMP deals with the quarantine management associated with the mobilisation of vessels, delivery of linepipe and construction equipment from overseas locations to Darwin. GEP construction, support and rock dumping vessels will principally be mobilised from overseas locations. Linepipe will be supplied via an Indonesian transhipment location. Equipment (e.g. compressors) is also expected to be sourced from overseas locations.

The following key pathways for the introduction of invasive marine species (IMS) have been identified:

vessel wetsides (biofouling)

vessel ballast water.

The following key pathways for the introduction of terrestrial pest species have been identified:

vessel topsides

linepipe cargo transported from Indonesia

equipment, transported to Darwin (or other Australian ports) via commercial shipping.

While the likelihood of the introduction of an IMS is remote, the potential consequence is significant, and therefore the residual risk quarantine management is ‘moderate’.

8.2.5.1 Vessel wetsides

All vessels entering Australian waters will comply with Company Marine Quarantine Guidelines (MQGs) [Ref A6], DAFF Biosecurity, Northern Territory’s Department of Primary Industries and Fisheries (DPIF), and the Darwin Port Corporation (DPC) quarantine requirements.

This includes conducting a vessel risk assessment (VRA) using a vessel risk assessment score sheet (VRASS), conducted by a recognised biofouling specialist. Subject to the outcomes of the VRA vessels may require inspection and/or cleaning prior to departure to Australia.

The VRA will include assessment based on:

voyage history

prior inspection or wetsides cleaning

antifouling status

vessel type

cooling water type and antifouling measures.

As the cargo barges and towing tugs will be making up to multiple return trips between Indonesia and Darwin these vessels will be subject to on-going assessment based on voyage history details.

8.2.5.2 Vessel ballast water

All vessels will comply with DAFF ballast water requirements on entry into Australia waters. This is part of normal vessel operations and compliance with DAFF requirements is considered to provide an appropriate level of risk management.

8.2.5.3 Vessel topsides

All vessels entering Australian waters and requiring local waters clearance will be subject to the Commonwealth’s DAFF Biosecurity Branch requirements on arrival. This is a standard process routinely undertaken by vessels. Contractor and subcontractors will ensure vessels are appropriately prepared prior to arrival in Australia in accordance with DAFF requirements.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.5.4 Linepipe cargo

Linepipe will be cleared by DAFF on arrival in Darwin Harbour before transfer to the Semac-1. It is proposed that, subject to DAFF approval of a Biosecurity Management Plan, once outside Darwin Harbour the linepipe will be transferred directly to Semac-1. This will avoid the towing tugs and cargo barges entering Darwin Harbour. In addition to the construction efficiency obtained, it will also reduce the risk of transfer of pest species to Darwin Harbour.

The Biosecurity Management Plan will include management of:

linepipe storage, cleaning, inspection and loadout in Indonesia

linepipe transfer and receival protocols by Semac-1

cargo barge and towing tug ballast water management

cargo barge and towing tugs wetsides management

cargo barge and towing tugs topsides management

quarantine waste transfer to Darwin (if required).

In the event that some linepipe is required to be unloaded and stored on land this would be subject to normal DAFF clearance requirements.

8.2.5.5 Construction equipment (onshore use)

All equipment imported into Australia via commercial shipping operations will comply with DAFF Biosecurity Branch requirements on arrival in Australia. This is a routine operation and compliance with DAFF requirements is considered to provide an appropriate level of risk management.

8.2.5.6 Environmental management framework

The objectives, targets and indicators for nearshore quarantine management are provided in Table 8-69. The management measures to be implemented to achieve these objectives and targets are outlined in Table 8-70. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, nearshore quarantine management TARP will be initiated (


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-71).

Table 8-69 Nearshore quarantine objective, targets and indicators


Prevent the introduction of terrestrial and marine invasive species

100% compliance with all quarantine requirements set out by Company MQGs, DAFF, DPIF, and the DPC

Number of non-conformances detected during inspections, audits and incident investigations

Zero invasive pests (terrestrial or marine) found on vessels within NT waters (including Darwin Harbour)

Number of invasive pests reported on vessels

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of quarantine management issues

All vessel personnel (including subcontractors) to complete an induction which will include information on quarantine requirements


Quarantine issues to be included in pre-start meetings at least once a month



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-70 Nearshore quarantine management measures


During the contracting process (support vessel provision)

International suppliers and contractors will be provided with relevant quarantine information to assist in the preparation of quarantine goods into a state acceptable to DAFF and Company.

GIIP

DAFF fact sheets:

‘Pratique for overseas vessels’

‘Requirements for vessels

‘Rodents on vessels’

‘Waste on board vessels’.


Subcontractor.

Procurement team (Contractor).


Inductions and Training

Each vessel induction will include the specific components for quarantine management including:

awareness of quarantine risks including general identification of pests and quarantine risk material

quarantine risk exposure pathways for marine cargo and vessels

requirement to adhere to quarantine management requirements.

HSE Induction and Training Procedure Prior to or at commencement of activities.


(Contractor).

Each vessel will provide on-going periodic quarantine awareness training via toolbox talks and pre-start meetings.

HSE Induction and Training Procedure During activities Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Wetsides Management

All vessels will comply with DAFF biofouling management guidelines.

Ref D17

Ref D18

Prior and during activities


(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Implement a Vessel inspection procedure for all vessels to be engaged in GEP construction activities including:

VRA to be carried out by a recognised biofouling specialist prior to entry into Australian waters.

VRA results to be provided to Company.

All vessels classified as high or uncertain risk as determined by the VRASS will undergo inspection and/or cleaning prior to mobilisation.

Vessel Inspections to be carried out by a qualified inspector and endorsed by Company.

Towing tugs and cargo barges will undertake a VRA prior to each arrival in Australian waters.

Commitment register item 8.03

Company Marine Quarantine Guidelines (MQG)



(Contractor).

Should a formal inspection be required, this will be undertaken by a qualified inspector.

Company MQG At all times Subcontractor. Environmental


Antifouling paints containing tributyltin compounds (TBTs) will not be used on any Project vessels or equipment in accordance with the prescriptions of the International Maritime Organization’s International Convention on the Control of Harmful Anti-fouling Systems on Ships and the Protection of the Sea (Harmful Anti-fouling Systems) Act 2006 (Cwlth).


At all times Subcontractor. Environmental


In the event of the detection of an introduced marine pest, Contractor or subcontractor will comply with direction from government authorities and undertake any actions required to manage that detection.

Northern Territory Fisheries Act

Quarantine Act 1908 and Quarantine Regulations 2000

As required during works



Ballast Water

Ballast-water management of vessels and barges engaged in GEP Project activities will be undertaken in accordance with DAFF Biosecurity requirements.

Australian Ballast Water Management Requirements (DAFF)

Prior to mobilisation and during works

Vessel Master.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Topsides Management

Topsides of international vessels will be inspected prior to departure for Australia to ensure that they meet DAFF requirements.

DAFF fact sheets

Prior to commencement of activities


(Contractor).

Linepipe Transport

Contractor will develop a Biosecurity Management Plan for approval by DAFF for the transport of linepipe from Indonesia to NT Waters.

DAFF Biosecurity standards Prior to commencement of activities



Equipment Importation

All equipment and materials shipped to Australia will be in a “clean” state that is acceptable to DAFF Biosecurity; that is, free of quarantine risk material.

Quarantine Act 1908 (Cwlth)

Plant Health Act 2008 (NT)


Prior to arrival in Australia

All personnel.

Vessels using marinas within Darwin Harbour

Vessels entering any marina in Darwin Harbour must contact DPIF Fisheries department and obtain clearance.

Company MQG Prior to initial visit Vessel Master.

Inspections

Vessel operators will facilitate inspections required by DAFF and Company for quarantine purposes as required.

Quarantine Act 1908 and Quarantine Regulations 2000

Vessel Master Vessel Master.

Records

All relevant DAFF Quarantine documentation and inspections will be completed before vessels are cleared to enter Australian waters and commence work in the nearshore development area.

DAFF website

DAFF website and fact sheets

Prior to commencement of activities


(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Relevant GEP Project vessels will maintain records of biofouling management (including a biofouling record book), hull cleaning actions and ballast-water exchange.


National Biofouling Management Guidance for Non-trading Vessels


Vessel operators will ensure that all paperwork and quarantine related documents are maintained on board vessels at all times and provided to Company on request.

Company MQG [Ref A6] Vessel Master Vessel Master.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-71 Nearshore quarantine TARP


Incoming vessels, machinery and equipment receive DAFF Biosecurity clearance certification

Breach of DAFF Biosecurity standards or non-conformance discovered during DAFF Biosecurity Inspection.

After clearance by DAFF Biosecurity, observation of a residual quarantine issue by Project personnel.

Vessel Master - Complies with DAFF Biosecurity inspector.

Informs Darwin Site Representative.

Follows Level 1 requirements.

Collects or securely contains the suspected foreign plant or animal material as soon as possible for formal identification.


- Coordinates any remedial cleaning of the vessel or equipment as directed by DAFF Biosecurity.

Surrender non-conforming materials or goods as directed by DAFF Biosecurity.

Notify the HSE Manager and Company.

Keep records/documentation of the inspection or breach.

Follows Level 1 requirements.

Ensures correct disposal of quarantine risk material in accordance with DAFF direction.

HSE Manager (Contractor)

- Review quarantine management controls.

Perform follow-up inspection or audit of compliance with revise quarantine management controls.

Coordinates internal investigation.

Implements corrective actions.

Informs Company and DAFF of investigation outcomes.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.6 Nearshore waste management

Waste will be generated on board vessels operating under the scope of this CEMP. Hazardous and, non-hazardous wastes are likely to be generated. Table 8-72 shows the different classes of wastes that are expected to result from the pipelay activity and other related construction activities. As a minimum standard, wastes will be separated into these classes for appropriate disposal.

This EMF addresses only solid waste and liquid wastes not being discharged to the environment. Liquid wastes that are discharged into the marine environment are covered in the liquid discharge EMF (Section 8.2.7). The management measures are identified with the aim of avoiding and minimising waste generated as a priority and, where waste is generated, minimising the environmental impact of waste. The framework also provides criteria for disposing, managing, monitoring, minimising or avoiding the generation of different types of waste in line with applicable acts, regulations and international conventions including MARPOL.

The main waste streams produced on board vessels will include:

grey water

sewage (black water)

metal waste (primarily metal shavings generated in the firing line on Semac-1)

galley waste.

Listed wastes are wastes listed under Schedule 2 of the Waste Management and Pollution Control (Administration) Regulations (NT) (WMPC Regulations (NT)). A complete list of anticipated types of waste to be produced on board marine vessels is provided in Table 8-72. All listed wastes will be managed in accordance with the Waste Management and Pollution Control Act 1998 (NT) (WMPC Act (NT)) and WMPC Regulations (NT). As no waste will be disposed of at sea during nearshore operations (except (a) macerated food waste in NT coastal waters, outside of Darwin Harbour and in accordance with MARPOL requirements and; (b) treated wastewater from the Semac-1 which is covered by a WDL issued by NT EPA and therefore is not included in the scope of this CEMP), all waste will need to be stored in appropriate skips, receptacles or tanks on board each vessel for removal and transport to shore for disposal as required.

Wastes will be stored in a manner such that no accidental transfer of waste to the environment can occur. This includes:

secure lids or covers on all waste skips/bins

securing any large waste items such as empty drums or scrap material to the deck so they cannot be lost overboard

careful transfer of skips from vessels to transfer vessels for disposal to ensure waste is not lost overboard

clearly marked skips and bins to ensure correct separation of wastes as required

management of pump out – vessel to vessel and vessel to shore.

The residual risk of environmental impacts from nearshore waste is low. The objectives, targets and indicators for nearshore waste management are provided in Table 8-73. The management measures to be implemented to achieve these objectives and targets are outlined in Table 8-74. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, nearshore waste management TARP will be initiated (Table 8-75).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-72 Anticipated types of waste produced on marine vessels

Potential Recyclable Listed Vessel type

Pipelay Barge Marine Spread

Food waste (& containers) N N

Aluminum cans Y N

Glass Y N

Cardboard cartons/paper Y N

Plastic Y N

Bulbs and tube lights N N P P

Cables N N P P

Concrete Y N

Metals Y N P

Metal containers Y N

Packaging materials N N

Printer toners N N

Plastic containers N N

Plastic wrapping N N

Stationery N N

Vegetation Y N

Wood / Wood packaging Y N P

Batteries N N

Chemical waste N Y P

Chemical containers N Y1

Contaminated soil N Y2

Oily water N Y3

Degreasers N Y4

Grease and oil Y Y

Lime N N

Lubricants Y Y

Raw sewage N Y

Solvents N Y5 P P

Medical wastes N Y P

Notes: ‘P’: Potential waste streams. Y1: Containers that are contaminated with residues of a listed waste Y2: Soils contaminated with a listed waste Y3: Waste mixtures, or waste emulsions, of oil and water or hydrocarbon and water Y4: Degreasers may contain solvents and/or surfactants which are listed Y5: Halogenated organic solvents, Organic solvents excluding halogenated solvents, Waste from the production, formulation and use of organic solvents


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-73 Nearshore waste objectives, targets and indicators


Minimise impact of waste generated from construction activities

Zero environmental incidents associated with waste management

Number of incident reports and severity of incidents resulting from waste discharges

Minimise volumes of waste going to landfill and maximise recycling

Recycle all recyclable domestic and office waste

Waste volumes produced and waste volumes recycled

Waste inspection reports

Establish and maintain awareness of the importance of correct waste management practices

All vessel personnel (including subcontractors) to complete an induction which will include information on waste management


Waste management issues to be included in pre-start meetings at least once a month



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-74 Nearshore waste management measures



Personnel will be required to attend inductions that include information about waste management.




(Contractor).

Waste-generation impacts will be taken into consideration during JSA/SWMS where appropriate.




(Contractor).

Regular reinforcement (such as at toolbox talks and /or pre-start meetings) of waste hierarchy and waste management measures.




Waste hierarchy

All vessels engaged on the GEP Project will operate within a hierarchical waste management framework of:

waste minimisation

waste classification

waste segregation

waste reuse and/or recycling

waste disposal.


At all times Subcontractor. HSE Coordinator

(Contractor).

Procurement

Where possible, required materials and chemicals will be purchased in bulk in order to reduce the amount of packaging waste. For example, chemicals could be supplied in intermediate bulk containers in preference to drums.


Procurement Procurement and contracts personnel.

Chemicals and hazardous substances used during all phases of the GEP Project will be selected and managed to minimise the potential adverse environmental impact associated with their disposal (see Section 8.2.8).


Procurement Subcontractor. Environmental



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Waste storage

Waste will be stored in the designated waste stations and appropriately segregated into hazardous waste and non-hazardous waste, and, where possible, into recyclable or reusable waste.

In the event of the discovery of any unidentified wastes, these will be treated as hazardous waste and stored accordingly.



There will be an adequate supply of suitable receptacles for waste storage and disposal as outlined in the hierarchical waste management framework.



Waste receptacles will be located so as to be readily accessible. GIIP At all times Vessel Master.

Receptacles will be clearly labelled to facilitate correct segregation of wastes. Environmental compliance register item 22.09


All solid-waste receptacles (e.g. skips and bins) will have covers and be fit for purpose and in good condition. This will prevent scavenging animals from gaining access to putrescible wastes.



All liquid wastes will be stored in ships tanks or in leak proof sealed containers within a sealed bunded area.



Bilge and sewage waste will be stored in ships tanks and transferred to supply vessels for disposal at approved onshore facilities1.



Waste disposal

Only approved and licensed waste contractors will be engaged for waste disposal. Environmental compliance register item 22.08

At all times Procurement and contracts personnel.

All hazardous and non-hazardous solid wastes generated in the nearshore development area, including food scraps, will be retained on board vessels and transported to onshore facilities for disposal in accordance with the Marine Pollution Act 1987 (NT).



1 The exception is the discharge of treated wastewater from the Semac-1 that is covered by a WDL issued by NT EPA.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Any waste or spill occurring during vessel refuelling will be treated appropriately in accordance with Section 8.2.8 and any waste generated from clean-up activities stored appropriately and disposed of as hazardous material at shore based disposal facilities.

Section 8.2.8 At all times Vessel Master.

Vessel waste management plans

Vessels utilised for pipelay and associated construction activities shall operate under their own waste management plans.



Individual vessel waste management plans will comply with the requirements of this framework.



Records

Records will be maintained of the quantities of waste generated, the quantities transported and disposed of, and the methods of disposal (e.g. landfill or recycling) for all phases of the GEP Project. Records will include waste manifests and disposal certificates.

WMPC Regulations (NT) At all times Vessel Master. Darwin Site



General and process waste storage facilities will be inspected to assess compliance with this CEMP.

GIIP

WMPC Act (NT)

Weekly Subcontractor. Environmental


Reviews of waste-management procedures and the quantity of regulated wastes generated on vessels will be carried out to aid continual improvement and waste minimisation.

GIIP

WMPC Act (NT)

Quarterly Subcontractor. Environmental



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-75 Nearshore waste targets, action and response plan


All waste stored and disposed of in accordance with CEMP

Waste incorrectly stored or disposed of resulting in release of waste material into marine waters. Does not result in any observable or measurable impact on the environment (i.e., a single minor incident)

Wastes incorrectly stored or disposed of resulting in release of waste material into marine waters. The impact on the environment is observable and measurable)

Vessel Master (or delegate) Continue to implement waste management measures and procedures.



Contain and clean up source of contamination, if possible. In the case of a spill, implement the management measures outlined in Section 8.2.9 (spill response).

Engage specialist waste removal contractors to contain and clean up waste, if required.



Inform Company as part of regular environmental reporting.

Inform Company immediately.

HSE Coordinator (Contractor) Conduct regular inspections to verify vessel compliance with the CEMP.


Conduct follow-up inspection.



Conduct regular audits of waste management.


Conduct follow-up inspection.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.7 Vessel liquid discharge management

The following types of potential liquid discharge have been identified for vessels operating in nearshore waters. These liquid discharges result from routine vessel operations and no liquid discharge will be produced as a result of GEP construction activities.

The routine liquid discharges to be released within Darwin Harbour and NT coastal waters are:

Deck runoff: Good ‘housekeeping’ to keep the vessels decks free of potential contamination sources, such as cleaning up any minor hydrocarbon spills, means that potential contamination of deck runoff is not expected to cause an adverse impact to the environment.

Reverse osmosis (RO) water from fresh water generating systems: Vessel discharges of RO brine concentrate are not expected to have any observable impact on the marine environment due to the relatively minor volumes involved and rapid dispersion after discharge in surface waters.

Engine cooling water: Vessel engine cooling water is typically released at temperatures less than 80°C and will have no observable impact on the marine environment, due to rapid cooling and mixing of the relatively minor volumes of released water.

The routine liquid discharges to be released within NT coastal waters only (outside of the Darwin Port boundary) include oily water:

After passing through the oily water separator, bilge waste containing 15 parts per million or less of oil (as measured by the oil content monitor) may be discharged overboard in NT coastal waters [MARPOL Annex I, IFC EHS Guideline to Ports and IFC Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines for Shipping]. The release of oily water in accordance with MARPOL (Annex I) requirements is not expected to have an observable or significant impact on the surrounding marine environment.

The tables below outline the EMF for managing deck runoff discharges and the release of oily water. The operational wastes, engine cooling water and RO water, are not be included in the EMF as their management is covered by standard vessel operating procedures.

Management of ballast water is covered in Section 8.2.5.

The objectives, targets and indicators that have been established for the liquid discharge management are shown in Table 8-76. The management measures designed to drive achievement of these performance objectives, targets and indicators, are described in Table 8-77. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the vessel liquid discharge TARPs will be initiated (Table 7-78 and Table 7-79). The residual risk level identified for vessel liquid discharge management is low.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-76 Vessel liquid discharge objectives, targets and indicators


All deck areas are kept clean (normal ship practice) such that rain or seawater can be discharged without concern of risk of contamination

No reported incidents that result in contamination of deck wash

Number of incident reports and severity of incidents resulting in contamination of deck runoff

Comply with all regulatory and Project requirements relating to management of oily water

No discharge of oily water within Darwin Harbour

Vessel oil record book

No release of oily liquids not conforming to MARPOL requirements (outside of Darwin Harbour)

Number of incident reports and severity of incidents involving release of oily liquids that exceed the MARPOL requirements (outside of Darwin Harbour)

Establish and maintain awareness of the importance of correct liquid discharge management practices

All vessel personnel (including subcontractors) to complete an induction which will include information on liquid discharge management


Liquid discharge management issues to be included in pre-start meetings at least once a month



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-77 Vessel liquid discharges management measures


Induction and training Awareness training on reporting any incident that may result in deck wash contamination and conducting work activities in accordance with vessel procedures, and reporting incidents which resulted in an uncontrolled release of oily liquids.




(Contractor). HSE Advisor (Pipelay

vessel). Awareness training on the importance of checking and maintaining equipment used to control oily liquid discharges in inductions and pre-start meetings.



Monthly during operations


(Contractor). HSE Advisor (Pipelay

vessel).

Reducing the risk of contamination of deck water All hazardous liquids will be stored within contained or bunded areas.

Any sources of oily water will be directed to the oily water separator for treatment.



Decks will be kept clean of any spills or hazardous liquids and all machinery and drainage systems will be regularly maintained.

Vessel Pollution Control & Waste Management Procedure

Daily checks Maintenance as required

Vessel Master.

Any deck cleaning requiring use of a cleaning chemical will require the approval of the Environmental Specialist prior to use.


Before mobilisation of vessel



Oily water management Operating staff to be appropriately trained in treatment plant operation. Vessel Pollution Control

& Waste Management Procedure

Before mobilisation of vessel


(Contractor).

Automatic shutdown system in place to prevent discharges being released at concentrations higher than 15 parts per million (ppm).

MARPOL Annex I

Vessel Pollution Control & Waste Management Procedure



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


System operating records (critical operating parameters) to be retained and available for inspection.

MARPOL Annex I At all times Vessel Master.

Maintain an accurate oil record book to document the movement and fate of all oil brought on board.

MARPOL Annex I At all times Vessel Master.

Spill prevention and response

Regular inspections and preventative maintenance of storage areas and equipment (including the oil content monitor) will be undertaken to prevent spills through equipment failure.

Pollution Control & Waste Management Procedure

Daily inspections and maintenance as per Vessel maintenance schedule

Subcontractor. HSE Manager. HSE Coordinator

(Pipelay vessel).

Spill response materials and equipment (including personal protective equipment) will be available during all phases and will contain equipment to combat both chemical and hydrocarbon spills.


At all times Subcontractor. HSE Manager. HSE Coordinator

(Pipelay vessel). Monitoring and Inspection

Daily inspections of deck and drainage systems.

Contractor employees to report and malfunction of deck drainage systems to the vessel master.

Contractor will report incidents regarding deck runoff to Company in accordance with the Company Incident Reporting, Recording and Investigation Procedure [Ref A10].


Health , Safety, Security and Environment Reporting Procedure

Daily Subcontractor. HSE Manager. HSE Coordinator

(Pipelay vessel).

Monitoring of the oily water separator discharges will be conducted in accordance with vessel operating procedures. This will include equipment calibration checks as required.

MARPOL Annex I


As required Lead Project Engineer.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-78 Deck containment system TARP


Deck containment systems for hazardous materials are functioning correctly

Deck containment system fails and spill is contained (no contaminated deck runoff is released)

Deck drainage system failure resulting in discharge of contaminated water

Vessel crew Contaminated runoff is diverted to a slops tank for disposal onshore.

All hazardous materials are correctly stored.

Report observed failure for maintenance.

Resolve containment system fault as soon as possible.

Report observed failure for maintenance.

Preventative measures put in place to prevent any further discharge of contaminated deck runoff until system fault has been resolved.

Resolve containment system fault as soon as possible.

Vessel Master Report non-conformance to Contractor as part of regular environmental reporting.

Report incident to Darwin Site Representative.


Report non-conformance to Company as part of regular environmental reporting.



Conduct vessel inspection to confirm compliance with this CEMP.


Conduct follow-up audit or inspection.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-79 Deck runoff TARP


Deck maintained in a clean condition, appropriate chemical cleaners used and chemicals stored appropriately

Untidy deck or contaminants spilled on deck providing a potential for contaminated deck runoff

Contaminated deck runoff resulting from incorrect chemical use or spills

Vessel crew Continue to implement management measures.

Clean any soiled deck area with a potential result in contaminated deck runoff.

Report any spills to supervisor and take immediate action to contain and clean up spills before deck runoff becomes contaminated.

Contain deck runoff immediately and divert to slops tank.

Take action to clean up the source of the contamination.

Vessel Master Review chemical storage and handling procedures to prevent recurrence.

Review chemical storage and handling procedures to prevent recurrence.


Report discharge to Company.


Conduct vessel inspection to assess compliance with this CEMP.

Conduct follow-up audit or inspection.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.8 Hazardous material management

The EMF below outlines the management framework to be implemented to control the risk of an environmental incident involving hazardous goods, including spill prevention procedures and control measures to minimise the likelihood of, and impacts resulting from, the uncontrolled release of such substances.

All Contractor vessels apply a standard concerning the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health [Ref B7]. Depending on the quantity of hazardous substance used or generated and exposure frequency, three types of control approach can be applied, as summarised below and in Table 8 – 80:

Control Approach 1 – Informal Assessment – The user shall read and follow requirements of Safety Data Sheet (SDS). If there is any doubt, the user should request information / assistance from Contractor HSE Department and Supervisor.

Control Approach 2 – Formal Assessment – Supervisor of the activity where the hazardous substance is used or generated, supported by Contractor HSE Department shall analyse SDS, establish necessary control measures and record them within the JSA. If there is any doubt, the Contractor HSE Department should request information / assistance from Contractor Project HSE Team.

Control Approach 3 – Specialist Assessment – Contractor HSE Department shall collect all relevant information (SDS, methods of use, quantity, etc.) and send it to Contractor Project HSE Department for specialist assessment. Any completed specialist assessment shall be retained (electronic copy is acceptable).

Table 8-80 Hazardous material control approach risk assessment

Quantities used / generated

Exposure Frequency

One-off task with duration less than one shift

Periodic for duration of several shifts

Continuous during considerable period of time (GEP Project duration)

Grams / Millilitres Control Approach 1 Control Approach 1 Control Approach 2

Kilograms / Litres Control Approach 1 Control Approach 2 Control Approach 2

Tones / Cubic Meters

Control Approach 2 Control Approach 3 Control Approach 3

Hazardous materials shall be stored and disposed of according to SDS and requirements of the Pollution Control and Waste Management standard [Ref B6].

All hazardous materials delivered to the vessel will be accompanied by a SDS, classified and labelled on site according to the GHS, in accordance with the Work Health and Safety (National Uniform Legislation) Act 2011 and Regulations. Under the GHS, both hazardous substances and dangerous goods are deemed “hazardous chemicals”.

The objectives, targets and indicators that have been established for hazardous material management are shown in Table 8-81.

The main toxic material that vessels will be carrying is fuel. Semac-1 will also carry chemicals required for operation in the firing line: formulated polyol-component and Isocyanate (B-component). These chemicals will be stored in tightly sealed 200 L steel drums within contained areas, in accordance with manufacturer specifications. Further detail on the management measures is provided in Table 8-82.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Where discharge of chemicals is unavoidable, chemicals will be selected on technical, health, safety, environmental and commercial considerations. As chemicals will only be discharged during a wet buckle response (contingency only), the chemical selection process is addressed in Section 8.2.10.

There will be some generation of hazardous waste (such medical waste and oily waste) and the segregation, storage and disposal of these wastes has been considered within the nearshore waste framework in Section 8.2.6.

The residual risk of hazardous material impact on the environment is low.

Table 8-81 Dangerous goods and hazardous materials objectives, targets and indicators

Objective Target KPI Minimise the possible environmental impact from the use, transport and storage of dangerous goods and hazardous materials

No discharge into NT waters (including Darwin Harbour) of hazardous materials which cause or threaten to cause pollution resulting in environmental harm

Number of incident reports and severity of incidents resulting from accidental discharge of hazardous materials

All hydrocarbon and chemical containment to be constructed and used in accordance with legislative, industry requirements and Australian Standards

Number of non-conformances from audits and inspections relating to the storage of hydrocarbons and chemicals

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of the importance of correct hazardous materials practices

All vessel personnel (including subcontractors) to complete an induction which will include information on the management of dangerous goods and hazardous materials


100% attendance of chemicals and hazardous materials training by supervisors and personnel who routinely handle, transport and/or use hazardous materials or wastes

Training presentation material and training records

Hazardous materials to be included in pre-start meetings at least once a month



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-82 Dangerous goods and hazardous materials management measures



All personnel will be trained in the management and identification of dangerous goods and hazardous materials.



• Subcontractor. • HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Personnel who routinely handle hazardous materials or wastes will receive training in handling, transporting and storing hazardous materials or wastes; in reporting and documentation requirements; and in spill clean-up techniques and practices.



• Subcontractor • HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Any plant and equipment used will be operated by an appropriately trained person. HSE Induction and Training Procedure


• Subcontractor • HSE Manager

(Contractor).

Emergency response training and exercises will be completed in accordance with the vessel or site emergency response plan.

Additional awareness training of dangerous goods / hazardous materials specific to the Contractor SOW will be provided in pre-start meetings.

Vessel or site emergency response plan


At least monthly

• Subcontractor. • HSE Manager

(Contractor).


Licensed suppliers will be used for material supply, transfer and transport. Dangerous Goods Act (NT) Prior to mobilisation • Procurement and

contracts personnel.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Every vessel will have either a Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan (SOPEP) procedure or vessel specific oil pollution emergency plan.

Annex I of MARPOL

Contractor Nearshore Bridging OSCP [Ref B15]

Onshore/Nearshore Emergency Response Plan

Prior to mobilisation • Subcontractor

• HSE Manager (Contractor).

SDSs will be available on all vessels (located in close proximity to storage) to aid in the identification of appropriate spill clean-up and disposal methods for any oil product or chemical.


Annex III of MARPOL

IMDG Code (2008)

Prior to mobilisation • Subcontractor.

• HSE Manager (Contractor).

On vessel management

All hazardous materials will be clearly identified and stored in accordance with the IMDG Code and MARPOL Annex III which includes the following measures:

Packages containing harmful substances shall be durably marked with the correct technical name and to indicate the substance is a marine pollutant.

Hazardous materials will be properly stowed and secured to minimise the hazards to the marine environment without impairing the safety of the ship or persons onboard.


MARPOL Annex III

IMDG Code (2008)

At all times • Vessel Master.

Appropriate temporary containment facilities will be utilised for the storage of chemicals, fuel and hazardous waste, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. All hydrocarbons and chemicals will be stored in appropriate contained areas to reduce the risk of spill release to the marine environment.


At all times • Vessel Master.

Refuelling procedures


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


All vessels will have refuelling procedures, including use of sorbent booms, pads as a barrier to drips and leaks, and on board containment features and requirements. Visual monitoring of hoses, couplings and the sea surface will be undertaken during refuelling operations.


Prior to mobilisation and during refuelling

• Vessel Master.

Specific procedures will be developed for refuelling in open water (i.e., bunkering). These procedures include the following management measures:

only refuel during daylight hours

only refuel within DPC specified areas

refuelling operations must comply with the current version of the International Safety Guide for Oil Tankers and Terminals

radio contact must be maintained between vessels during refuelling.


International Safety Guide for Oil Tankers and Terminals

Prior to mobilisation and during refuelling

Lead Project Engineers.

All vessels required to transfer hydrocarbons shall be fitted with dry disconnect couplings. Environmental compliance

register item 5.22 During refuelling

Vessel Master.

Spill response

Spill response materials and equipment (including personal protective equipment) will be available during all phases and will contain equipment to combat both chemical and hydrocarbon spills.



(Contractor).

Disposal of spill clean-up materials will be managed as prescribed in this CEMP in onshore waste management (Section 8.1.17). WMPC Regulations (NT) At all times

All personnel.

All spills will reported to Company as per routine environmental reporting (as a non-conformance).

Company and the appropriate Government authority will be notified immediately of all spills above 1 L that enter the marine environment

Table 11-1


Company Nearshore OSCP [Ref A8]

At all times Vessel Master. HSE Manager

(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320



Records of dangerous goods and hazardous materials received, stored and dispensed will be maintained and reconciled. WMPC Regulations (NT) At all times • Subcontractor.

• HSE Coordinator (Contractor).

Vessel equipment will be subject to regular maintenance and servicing in accordance with the manufacturer’s servicing manual, to prevent spills through equipment failure. This includes maintaining and regularly inspecting hydraulic oil systems, hoses and couplings to minimise the potential for spills.

GIIP Weekly • Subcontractor. • HSE Coordinator

(Contractor).

Dangerous goods and hazardous materials storage areas will be inspected on a weekly basis to verify conformance with this CEMP. GIIP Weekly • Subcontractor.

• HSE Coordinator (Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.9 Hydrocarbon spill response

The uncontrolled release of hydrocarbons or chemicals into the marine environment will result in water contamination and adverse effects to flora or fauna. This management framework focuses on hydrocarbon spill response as this has been identified as the most significant spill risk for the nearshore construction activities. Response management for other hazardous material spills is covered in the Hazardous Materials EMF presented in Section 8.2.8 and specifically in the hazardous materials management procedures that will be created as indicated in that section. The hazardous materials EMF (Section 8.2.8) also provides for spill prevention for all hazardous materials including hydrocarbons.

The overall response aim is to contain hydrocarbon at the source and to protect sensitive resources, in accordance with Contractor Nearshore Bridging OSCP [Ref B15], a bridging document to Company’s Nearshore OSCP [Ref A8]. The overall priority when responding to a hydrocarbon spill incident, in accordance with Contractor and Company Nearshore OSCPs [Ref B15 and Ref A7 respectively] are to:

1. maximise the safety of personnel (highest priority)

2. minimise environmental impact

3. protect shareholder assets

4. protect Company’s reputation.

There are no key construction activities which have an elevated risk of spills occurring, although there is a greater risk during refuelling operations. The majority of refuelling will be undertaken at East Arm Wharf. Refuelling of the Semac-1 will occur within open waters of NT coastal waters (including Darwin Harbour).

Key sensitive receptors in the nearshore environment which may be impacted by spills are:

benthic biota, including corals at Channel Island and Weed Reef

mangroves

marine fauna (primarily filter feeders or sedentary species).

Spill response procedures are provided to minimise the impacts resulting from an uncontrolled release of such substances. Management measures to reduce the risk of a spill occurring are included in Section 8.2.8.

The objectives, targets and indicators that have been established for hydrocarbon spill response are shown in Table 8-83. The management measures designed to drive achievement of these performance objectives, targets and indicators, are described in Table 8-84. Where visual inspection and / or monitoring indicate a deviation from the expected results, the hydrocarbon spill TARP will be initiated (Table 8-85).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-83 Hydrocarbon spill response objectives, targets and indicators


Minimise the environmental impact in the event of a hydrocarbon spill

Zero environmental incidents resulting from hydrocarbon spills or leaks

Number of incident reports and severity of incidents resulting from hydrocarbon spill events

100% compliance with vessel SOPEP and CEMP spill response EMF

Number of non-conformances from audits and inspections relating to spill management

Establish and maintain personnel awareness of effective hydrocarbon spill response practices

Spill response to be included in pre-start meetings at least once a month



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-84 Hydrocarbon spill response management measures



Personnel trained in spill response procedures will be present on board all vessels. Company Nearshore OSCP [Ref A8]



(Contractor). Spill response drills will be conducted in accordance with vessel SOPEPs. Vessel SOPEPs During

operation Subcontractor. HSE Manager

(Contractor). Additional awareness training of risks and spill management specific to the Contractor SOW will be provided in the induction training and pre-start meetings.

HSE Induction and training procedure

Prior to mobilisation and at least monthly thereafter


(Contractor).

Plans and procedures

An emergency response plan and associated procedures has been developed by Contractors and all subcontractors relevant to the SOW.

Emergency Response Plan [Ref B5]

3(2) of the International Convention on Oil Spill Preparedness, Co-operation and Response 1990

Protection of the Sea (Prevention of Pollution from Ships) Act 1983



(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320


Every vessel will have either a SOPEP procedure or vessel specific oil pollution emergency plan.

MARPOL 73/78, Annex I, regulation 26




(Contractor).

Spill response

The health and safety of workers and the public must always be the first priority when responding to a spill.



SDSs will be available on all vessels (located in close proximity to storage) to aid in the identification of appropriate spill clean-up and disposal methods for any hydrocarbon products.

AS 1940-2004: Storage and Handling of Flammable and Combustible Liquids;



Spill response materials and equipment (including personal protective equipment) will be available during all phases and will contain equipment to combat hydrocarbon spills. All personnel undertaking spill response and clean-up must wear the appropriate PPE required in the SDS.

A full list of spill equipment is provided in Appendix I.



Disposal of spill clean-up materials will be managed as prescribed in this CEMP in the waste management (Section 8.2.6).

WMPC Regulations (NT) At all times All personnel.

Upon identification of a hydrocarbon spill, the appropriate spill response will be initiated and the appropriate supervisor and site management will be notified as per the spill response TARP in Table 8-85.



The minimum spill equipment required (specified in Appendix I) must be carried on board vessels.



(Contractor).


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Table 8-85 Hydrocarbon spill response TARP


No spill A spill occurs and is contained before it enters NT waters (including Darwin Harbour)

A spill of hydrocarbons occurs,and is released to NT waters (including Darwin Harbour) and can be managed by Subcontractor / Contractor

A spill of hydrocarbons occurs and is released to NT waters (including Darwin Harbour) and is beyond Subcontractor / Contractor control

Individual who identifies spill (subcontractor or contractor personnel)


Attempts to stop loss, if safe to do so.


Attempts to control loss, if safe to do so.


Attempts to control loss, if safe to do so.

Vessel Master / ERT Leader

Conduct SOPEP drills.

Maintain oil spill response equipment readiness.

Implement SOPEP.

Verify clean-up is adequate.


Implement SOPEP.

Implement Contractor Nearshore OSCP.

Notify the Darwin Port Harbour Master (if in Darwin Harbour) or DoT Marine Safety Branch (if in NT waters outside Darwin Harbour).

Report the spill immediately to the Contractor Darwin Site Representative.

Follow steps in the flowchart provided in Figure 8-9 to determine whether the role of combat agency needs to be transferred.

Implement SOPEP.

Implement Contractor Nearshore OSCP.

Notify the Darwin Port Harbour Master (if in Darwin Harbour) or DoT Marine Safety Branch (if in NT waters outside Darwin Harbour).

Request transfer of combat agency role as per Figure 8-9.

Report the spill immediately to the Contractor Darwin Site Representative.

Support spill response as directed by the combat agency (Darwin Port Harbour Master or DoT Marine Safety Branch) and Company.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320



Report the spill to Company.


Coordinate any logistical support to Vessel Master with Company assistance as required.

Coordinate waste disposal.


Support combat agency, as directed.

Coordinate waste disposal.


Review incident report to ensure corrective actions are adequate.

Provide advice/direction on spill clean-up, impact assessment, monitoring and waste management.



Support spill response as directed by the combat agency (Darwin Port Harbour Master or DoT Marine Safety Branch) and Company.




F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 8-8 Transfer of Combat Agency role


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

8.2.10 Wet buckle response management (contingency only)

A pipeline buckle can occur if the GEP is placed under incorrect loads during pipelay. If the pipeline floods with seawater as a consequence of the buckle event it is termed a ‘wet buckle’. Wet buckle events are rare but could potentially occur at any stage during pipelay.

In the event of a wet buckle it becomes a priority to expel the entrained seawater so as to minimise the potential for corrosion of the inside wall of the pipeline. Project requirements the entrained water to be expelled within 28 days of a wet buckle event. While the dewatering process removes the bulk of the seawater, a thin seawater film will remain on the inside wall of the pipeline.

The remaining thin film of raw seawater naturally contains microorganisms (bacteria) that may cause Microbial Induced Corrosion (MIC). MIC is extremely aggressive, and in its worst form, will lead to pipeline failures within a short period of time. Once established, MIC is extremely difficult to eliminate, and may elevate into a chronic maintenance and operating problem. When a metal surface is exposed to water, the micro-organisms typically resident in the water quickly attach themselves to the surface to form a bio-film, which is a living biological mass composed of bacteria, algae and other micro-organisms. Those microorganisms grow, break free, and distribute throughout the piping system. The pipeline will therefore need to be treated with chemical biocides, to prevent the growth of such micro-organisms in such situations.

As the pipeline is left full of air following dewatering, it is also necessary to protect internal surface of the pipeline from oxygen induced corrosion. For this purpose the pipeline wall will also be treated with a corrosion inhibitor. The corrosion inhibitor forms a thin protective layer on the pipeline wall preventing oxygen induced corrosion during the period of pipeline installation following rectification of a buckle. Usage of oxygen scavengers in this situation would not be efficient as the pipeline is left in an aerobic condition (air filled).

As detailed in Table 3-1 (activities 1.19 and 1.20), approximately 200 m3 of chemically treated freshwater (containing biocide and corrosion inhibitor) is batched between the two pigs and propelled down the pipeline with compressed air to dewater and passivate the pipeline. Summary characteristics of the chemically treated freshwater that would be discharged in the event of a wet buckle are provided in Table 8-86 and the chemical concentrations of wet buckle discharges are discussed further below. Further background information on wet buckle incidents and the chemically treated discharge are provided in Appendix J.

Table 8-86 Wet buckle discharge characteristics

Characteristic Specification at release Comment

Freshwater volume 200 m3 Discharge volume is constant irrespective of the location of the wet buckle.

Discharge rate 1000 to 2000 m3/hr Dependent on speed of the pigs, location and depth of the wet buckle and check valve characteristics.

Discharge period 6 to 12 minutes -

Corrosion Inhibitor

The corrosion inhibitor (propriety blend of polyphosphates) is used to coat the inside wall of the pipeline and eliminate contact between the seawater film and air in the pipeline. The uptake of the chemical on the inside wall of the pipeline occurs in a predictable manner allowing for precise dosing. The dosing rate is dependent on the location of the wet buckle and therefore the length of the pipeline to be dewatered.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

There will be minimal residual corrosion inhibitor present within in the discharge water as the chemical is consumed (adheres to the pipeline wall) during the dewatering process.

The use of polyphosphates (based on sodium pyrophosphate and phosphoric acid derivatives) as a corrosion inhibitor is an industry wide accepted practice that is supported by extensive global experience. There is limited ecotoxilogical information available for the use of polyphosphates as corrosion inhibitors. In general, the main environmental concern regarding use of polyphosphates has been when they are discharged to natural freshwater bodies that are phosphate deficient, as their release changes the chemical composition of the water. As Darwin Harbour is not phosphate deficient [Ref D8] and only residual concentrations of polyphosphate will be released, no measurable impact on Darwin Harbour water quality is expected. The proposed corrosion inhibitor has a pH between 6.5 and 8.5, which is consistent with the Darwin Harbour Water Quality Objectives [Ref D8]. Furthermore, Darwin Harbour is predominantly a seawater system and seawater is buffered strongly at pH 8.2 [Ref D8], so relatively small discharges of slightly lower pH wet buckle water would not significantly change the pH of surrounding harbour water.

Polyphosphates are compatible with other water treatment chemicals and are included in the Oslo/Paris convention (for the Protection of the Marine Environment of the North-East Atlantic) (OSPAR) list of substances used and discharged offshore which are considered to Pose Little Or NO Risk to the Environment (PLONOR). These substances do not normally need to be strongly regulated as, from assessments of their intrinsic properties; the OSPAR Commission considers that they pose little or no risk to the environment.

Biocide

The active component of the biocide will be glutaraldehyde. The ‘predicted no effect concentrations’ (PNEC) values for glutaraldehyde in Darwin Harbour is 112 µg/L for fish species and 9 µg/l for sessile marine species, specifically corals [Ref B8] for exposure durations of 96 hours, allowing sufficient time for uptake. The application of the PNEC derived to marine mammals and turtles is highly conservative as these species are air breathing and have a higher mass relative to the fish species used to inform the threshold (as no data is available on marine mammals or turtles).

The no-effect concentration can be expected to vary with the duration of exposure with higher no-effect concentrations expected for shorter durations of exposure. Therefore, the above thresholds are also conservative due to the short duration of the specified discharge (8 to 12 minutes) and the rapid dilution that is indicated in the liquid dispersion modelling (minutes to 10s of minutes) [Ref B9].

To assess the potential impacts both Near-field and Far-field modelling of the discharge plume was conducted. Near-field modelling results indicate that biocide concentration will be diluted to between approximately 80 and 20 µg/L within 20 to 200m of the discharge outlet. Given the ultra-conservative nature of the PNEC for fish species (112 µg/L) it is concluded that the initial Near-field dilution is adequate to ensure there will be no observed impact on protected marine species. Identified potential impacts are recognised, in the immediate vicinity of the discharge, for small pelagic fish species and on the larvae stage of species such as the oyster [Ref B8].

The Far-field modelling indicates that the threshold of 9 µg/l is only exceeded 5% of the time within a small area 1 km along the tidal axis from the discharge outlet, and exceeded 2% of the time within an area 2 to 3 km along the tidal axes from the discharge site [Ref B10].At the sensitive coral areas within Darwin Harbour of Weed reef and Channel Island, will be exposed to concentrations of glutaraldehyde greater than 9 µg/l for 0% of the time. As the PNEC thresholds were based on exposure for 96 hours, these results indicate that the coral habitats are highly unlikely to be


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

exposed by concentrations of concern [Ref B10]. Further details on modelling results are provided in Appendix J.

Summary of residual risk

The discharge of chemically treated freshwater from a wet buckle event to marine waters along the pipeline route within Darwin Harbour is anticipated to have no measurable acute or chronic impacts on the marine ecosystem or protected species. The relatively low discharge concentrations, small volume and short duration together with the rapid dilution of the biocide are significant mitigation factors.

The objectives, targets and indicators that have been established for the management of a wet buckle discharge are shown in Table 8-87. The management measures designed to drive achievement of these performance objectives, targets and indictors are described in Table 8-88.

No TARP has been developed for wet buckle discharge management as the discharge will be undertaken in response to an unplanned and highly unlikely incident.

Table 8-87 Wet buckle discharge objective, targets and indicators


Comply with wet buckle chemical dosing procedures to minimise the impact on the receiving environment

Zero incidents of chemical dosing of freshwater above predefined limits

Number of incident reports and the severity of the incidents regarding inappropriate levels of chemical dosing during a wet buckle response


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Table 8-88 Wet buckle discharge management measures


Planning and design

Where use of chemicals is unavoidable and discharge to the environment is required, i.e. chemicals to be used in the event of a wet buckle, chemicals will be selected on technical, health, safety, environmental and commercial considerations. From an environmental perspective chemicals will be selected based on ecotoxicity, bioaccumulation potential and biodegradability factors.

Water treatment chemicals will have a minimum rating of ‘silver’ under the UK’s Offshore Chemical Notification Scheme (OCNS) Chemical Hazards and Risk Management (CHARM) hazard assessment model (Refer to Appendix J for more information).

Environmental Compliance Register Item 22.16, 23.05

Appendix J

Prior to beginning works


An environmental impact assessment has been undertaken to review available information and literature, and advice on an applicable screening criteria for Darwin Harbour based on consideration of protected species and sensitive habitats (corals).

GIIP

Appendix J

Prior to beginning works


During wet buckle response

The wet buckle response will be undertaken in a controlled manner and in accordance with a wet buckle response procedure which will define methodology for accurate determination of dosing rates and chemical specifications.

GIIP

Wet buckle response procedure

During a wet buckle response

Work Supervisors (Contractor).

If possible Contractor will manage the timing of the discharge of the chemically treated freshwater to coincide with the mid period of an ebbing tide when dispersion and dilution are most effective (as determined through modelling outputs).

GIIP During a wet buckle response

Lead Project Engineers (Contractor).


Monitoring of chemical insertion at the onshore end to establish compliance with the wet buckle response procedure.

GIIP

Wet buckle response procedure

During a wet buckle response



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

9 MONITORING

9.1 INTRODUCTION

The monitoring activities to be conducted during the installation of the GEP within Darwin Harbour and onshore at Middle Arm peninsula are outlined in Table 9-1, which specifies monitoring parameters, frequency and performance criteria. Monitoring locations along the trench, at the ASS treatment pad and in mangrove locations are displayed in Figure 9-1, Figure 9-2 and Figure 9-3. Monitoring activities specific to the EMFs described in Chapter 8 are also provided in the applicable management measurement tables for each EMF.

Should trigger levels be exceeded, responsive management actions will be implemented, as outlined as part of the TARPs in Chapter 8 and referenced in Table 9-1.

9.2 DATA QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES

To ensure the data collected from the monitoring programs are fit for interpretative use quality assurance (QA) and quality control (QC) procedures will be adopted in accordance with the relevant guidelines to provide evidence that the data obtained is fit for interpretative use. QA/QC protocols will apply to sampling (sample collection, storage and handling), laboratory analyses and field measurements and data management.

The selection of appropriate sample containers, preservation procedures, storage requirements and holding times was in accordance with those recommended within Australian Standards (such as AS/NZS 5667.1:1998) as appropriate. All relevant QA/QC data obtained during the works was reviewed for compliance with QA/QC principles and methodologies.

9.3 MONITORING DATA COLLECTION AND ANALYSIS

Monitoring data will be obtained through a combination of techniques, including visual assessment, in-situ testing and laboratory analysis. The nature and frequency of monitoring detailed in the preliminary program presented in Table 9-1 is considered to be sufficient to meet the relevant objectives and is based on the available information and potentially sensitive receptors in the vicinity of the construction activities.

The preliminary monitoring programs are designed to provide a statistically robust data set against which potentially unacceptable impacts resulting from the construction works can be measured and are consistent with the minimum requirements set out within the EIS.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Table 9-1 Monitoring programme

Purpose Monitoring type Parameters measured

Method Frequency Trigger level Reference for further details on response management

Erosion and sediment control monitoring – maintaining sediment control devices

To maintain rock filter dams to ensure operating effectively.

Visual observation of rock filter dams

Sediment volume Visual observation Daily during wet season and weekly during dry season (or after major storm event)

Sediment level is greater than 1/3 of the capacity of the rock filter dam

Rock filter dam sediment control TARP (Table 8-14)

Integrity of rock filter dam structure

Visual observation Daily inspections during wet season.


Visible damage to structure of rock filter dam

Perform maintenance, as specified in Table 8-12 (Erosion and sediment management measures)

To minimise the likelihood of the retention basin overflowing in the next rainfall event.

Visual observations of the sediment level within retention basin

Sediment level against sediment level marker



Sediment level is greater than 50%

Retention basin sediment control TARP (Table 8-19)


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320



Visual observations of the water level of the retention basin

Water level relative against water level indicator



Water level is greater than 2/3 capacity of basin

ASS management – excavated soil

To determine if excavated soils are PASS or ASS

One composite sample of excavated material comprising of 6 sub samples per 500 m3

Field pHF/pHFOX In situ measurements with calibrated pH meters

As required during excavation (one sample per 500 m2)

Visible Reaction

Difference pH Fox and pH F greater than 1.

pH Fox < 3

Flowchart of excavated material treatment Figure 8-2).

ASS treatment and storage TARP (Table 8-21)

To verify all treated soils have been neutralised

One composite sample of treated ASS (comprising of 6 sub samples) per 500 m3


As required during storage of treated material (one sample per 500 m2)

Visible Reaction

Difference pH Fox and pH F greater than 1.

pH Fox < 3

Flowchart of excavated material treatment (Figure 8-2).


Sample treated ASS for quantitative laboratory analysis to corroborate the results of field testing (above)

pH and Net Acidity

Laboratory analysis by a NATA accredited laboratory

25% of field samples (QA/QC submitted at 10% of all samples)

S% <0.05%, or equivalent net acid generation potential (TPA/TAA in mol H+/ton)


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320



Acid sulfate soils management – treatment pad and stockpile area

To identify any ASS affected seepage from stockpiles

Visual observations of stockpiles and drainage systems

Visual indicators including colour, texture and odour

Observation of visual indicators

Daily during soil treatment

Any signs of ASS affected seepage from the soil stockpile


Field pH testing of any seepage water - conducted with visual checks (above)

pH In situ measurements with calibrated pH meters

As required (when seepage is present)

pH: less than 6.0 or greater than 8.5


To identify if groundwater has become contaminated with acid released from the ASS treatment pad and stockpile area

Groundwater upstream and downstream of the treatment pad and stockpile area.

Refer to Figure 9-2 for locations. The piezometers will be installed at approximately the same depth as the trench bottom, to provide a homogeneous water quality sample.

pH

In situ piezometers - measurements with calibrated pH meters

Weekly during ASS treatment and storage works

pH at downstream monitoring location decreases to below the 20th percentile of measured concentrations at the upstream monitoring location or a decrease of 0.5 units


Water quality of controlled discharges from retention basin

To assess water quality of retention basin water prior to release

Water samples collected from retention basin

Record:

pH

Turbidity

Visual evidence of oil & grease, iron floc/scum, floating matter/litter

In situ measurements with calibrated hand held water quality meter

Visual observations

Daily pH: less than 6.0 or greater than 8.5

Turbidity: > 75 NTU

Visual evidence of oil & grease, scum or floating matter

See Table 9-2

Retention basin water quality TARP (Table 8-19)


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320



ASS management – trench seawater discharges

To determine if tidal seawater that exits the trench is acidified (Tier 1) and, if so, if heavy metals have been mobilised (Tier 2).

If dissolved heavy metals have been released, determine heavy metal sediment concentrations & bioavailability in the receiving environment (Tier 3)

Tier 1

Water samples collected from trench during an ebbing tide

pH In situ measurements with calibrated water quality meters

Every 3 days on an ebbing high tide

pH: less than 6.0

(If pH is greater than 8.5, an investigation would be undertaken and remedial actions implemented)

Trench seawater discharge TARP (Table 8-20)

Tier 2

Water samples collected from trench during an ebbing tide

Dissolved heavy metal concentrations (refer to Table 9-3 for metals to be tested for)

NATA accredited laboratory for analysis

Every 3 days on an ebbing high tide when triggered by Tier 1 monitoring

An exceedance of trigger values specified in Table 9-3

Tier 3

A. Subtidal sediment samples

Heavy metal concentrations (refer to Table 9-4 for metals to be tested for)


Monthly when triggered by Tier 2 monitoring


Tier 3

B. Intertidal mollusc samples

Heavy metal concentrations (refer to Table 9-5 for metals to be tested for)





F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320



ASS management – groundwater adjacent to the trench

To determine if trenching activities have resulted in a release of acid into groundwater adjacent to the trench (Tier 1) and, if so, whether heavy metals have been mobilised (Tier 2).

Tier 1

Groundwater samples from piezometers adjacent to trench. Refer to Figure 9-1 for the piezometer locations. The piezometers will be installed at approximately the same depth as the trench bottom, to provide a homogeneous water quality sample.

Four piezometers installed along the future trench route

pH

Conductivity

In situ measurements with calibrated water quality meter

Once prior to commencement of trenching and weekly during trenching activities

pH is below the 20th percentile of measured control locations or a decrease of 0.5 units

(Conductivity will provide supporting data for an investigation following exceedance of pH trigger values)

Groundwater adjacent to the trench TARP (Table 8-22)

Tier 2

Groundwater samples from piezometers adjacent to trench. Refer to Figure 9-1 for the piezometer locations

Dissolved heavy metal concentrations in groundwater (refer to Table 9-3 for metals to be tested for)


Weekly when triggered by Tier 2 monitoring

Metal concentrations are above the 80th percentile of measured concentrations at control locations


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320



To determine if trenching activities have resulted in a decrease in groundwater level adjacent to the trench (Tier 1) and, if so, whether the soil above the water level has become acidified (Tier 2)

Tier 1

Groundwater samples from piezometers adjacent to trench. Refer to Figure 9-1 for the piezometer locations

Groundwater level

In situ measurements with calibrated meter

Once prior to commencement of trenching and weekly during trenching activities

Groundwater level decreases below the 20th percentile of measured control locations or a decrease of 0.5 m

Tier 2

Soil samples taken from above existing groundwater level in area adjacent to the trench



Visible Reaction Difference pH Fox and pH F greater than 1. pH Fox < 3

Mangrove health monitoring

To determine if shore approach activities (trenching) have resulted in impacts upon mangrove health

Mangrove community health at total of 8 sites (4 each side of the trench) and four control sites

Refer to Figure 9-3

Canopy density (using a forest densiometer)

Tree condition (tree condition index)

Sedimentation using sediment markers

In situ measurements and photo monitoring

Once before excavation, once during (half way through) and once following removal of the temporary intertidal work road

Mangrove health is below the 20th percentile of measured control locations or parameters change by more than 20%.

Sediment level increases by more than 5cm

Mangrove Health TARP (Table 8-23)


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320



Weed monitoring

To determine if there are any existent weed populations on site

Baseline weed survey - Visual inspections of the whole site

Weed locations will be captured by DGPS and weed types recorded in weed inventory

Visual inspection Once prior to mobilisation

N/A N/A

To determine if there are any new weed populations or an increase in size of existent weed populations within or adjacent to the site

Visual inspections of the site and immediately adjacent areas

Weed locations will be captured by DGPS and newly identified weed locations will be incorporated into the weed inventory.

Visual inspection Quarterly N/A Weed management TARP (Table 8-39)


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Figure 9-1 Baseline groundwater monitoring locations along trench

Figure Note: The top image shows monitor bore locations prior to excavation, the bottom image shows locations during excavation.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Figure 9-2 Groundwater monitoring locations at the ASS treatment pad


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Figure 9-3 Mangrove Monitoring Locations


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

9.4 WATER QUALITY OBJECTIVES

As part of the Darwin Harbour Water Quality Protection Plan development process, the Northern Territory Government has prepared the Water Quality Objectives for the Darwin Harbour Region—Background Document (NRETAS 2010) [Ref D8]. This document prescribes water quality objectives for a range of parameters in various systems of Darwin Harbour. The objectives for the Upper Estuary have been used to establish water quality criteria for the GEP project as presented in this chapter. Where water quality objectives for a parameter are not listed within the Water Quality Objectives, the ANZECC (2000) Australian and New Zealand guidelines for fresh and marine water quality have been used [Ref D10].

Water discharged from the controlled retention basin will be treated and must comply with the water quality criteria shown in Table 9-2 before discharge. Discharge water quality shall be determined by monitoring prior to each discharge. Failure to achieve these criteria will trigger the responses described in the TARP in Table 8-19. Monitoring will be conducted using visual assessment and hand-held instrumentation for in situ measurements.

Table 9-2 Water quality criteria for controlled discharges from the retention basin

Parameter Detection method Discharge criteria Reference

Tier 1

pH Calibrated field equipment

Between 6 to 8.5 Water quality objectives for the Darwin Harbour region—background document [Ref D8].

Turbidity Calibrated field equipment

Not greater than 75 NTU up to design (major) storm event.

The guidelines in Best practice erosion and sediment control (IECA 2008) specify a discharge criteria of 50mg/L Total Suspended Solids (TSS). Given the need for a real-time measurement of suspended sediment, and in the absence of a known site-specific correlation between TSS and turbidity, a figure of 75 NTU has been used.

Oil and grease Visual No visible sheen

No detectable odour

GIIP

Iron floc and scum

Visual None visible

GIIP

Floating matter or litter

Visual None visible

GIIP

Monitoring of heavy metal concentrations in trench discharge water will be initiated should the pH criteria be exceeded (refer to Table 9-1). The trigger criteria for dissolved heavy metals are taken from the ANZECC guidelines [Ref D10], as shown in Table 9-3


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2

of 320

Table 9-3 Trench discharge –water quality criteria for heavy metals

Parameter Detection method Trigger criteria ug/L-1 Reference

Cadmium Laboratory >5.5 A, B Australian and New

Zealand guidelines for

fresh and marine water

quality, 2000 [Ref D10]

Chromium (III) >27.4

Chromium (VI) >4.4

Copper >1.3

Lead >4.4

Mercury (inorganic) >0.4 B

Nickel >70 B

Silver >1.4

Zinc >15 B

A = Chemicals for which possible bioaccumulation and secondary poisoning effects should be considered B = Figure may not protect key test species from chronic toxicity (this refers to experimental chronic figures or geometric mean for species)

9.5 SEDIMENT QUALITY AND BIOINDICATOR QUALITY (TIER 3)

Tier 3 monitoring for trench seawater discharges analyses sediment quality and bio indicator quality (Table 9-1). The trigger criteria for sediment quality are provided in Table 9-4. The bio-accumulation of metals within the food chain has the potential to impact upon the health and vitality of ecosystems and humans. Metals concentrations within bio-indicators (molluscs) will therefore be analysed and assessed for negative temporal trends and compared to the food standards listed in Table 9-5.

Table 9-4 Sediment quality parameters and trigger criteria

Parameter Detection method Trigger criteria mg/kg dry weight

Reference

Antimony Laboratory >25.0 Australian and New Zealand guidelines for fresh and marine water quality, 2000 [Ref D10]

Arsenic >70.0

Cadmium >10.0

Chromium >370.0

Copper >270.0

Lead >220.0

Mercury >1.0

Nickel >52.0

Silver >3.7

Zinc >410.0

Table 9-5 Bio-indicator quality parameters and trigger criteria

Parameter Detection method Trigger criteria mg/kg dry weight

Reference

Arsenic Laboratory >1 Food Standards Australia New Zealand (2011) [Ref D16] Cadmium >2

Lead >2

Mercury Mean of >0.5


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

10 MANAGEMENT OF SOCIAL ISSUES

As noted by NRETAS in Assessment Report 65: Environmental assessment and recommendations, direct economic benefits and the flow-on impacts to the NT and Australia associated with the Ichthys Project are expected to be substantial over the economic life of the Project but there may be negative social aspects that require careful management.

The potential negative socio-economic impacts associated with the GEP Project temporary construction workforce will be relatively small, as most of the personnel will be accommodated on the vessels for the duration of their rosters. Therefore there will be limited opportunities for interaction with the local community.

This smaller-scale and specialised workforce also affords a reduced level of opportunity for training, employment or business opportunities for individuals and/or local businesses. Nevertheless, the Company and the Contractor are committed to seeking opportunities for local employment and training and/or local procurement of supplies wherever possible.

10.1 SOCIAL IMPACT MANAGEMENT PLAN

Company is currently working in collaboration with the NT Government to develop a Social Impact Management Plan (SIMP) framework to cover the preliminary and main construction period activities (and later the Ichthys Project’s operations phase). A range of social issues associated with the Ichthys Project activities have been identified, and management actions to reduce and manage potential impacts are already being implemented and will continue to be developed. Contractor is committed to implementing the actions within the Draft Principal SIMP that relate to the construction phase of the GEP Project even before the plan is approved.

10.2 COMMUNITY ENGAGEMENT

Company is responsible for engagement with government and external stakeholders, with input from Contractor as requested. Company has produced a comprehensive Community Engagement Plan to manage community relations, including community engagement, for the construction phase of the GEP Project. Contractor may engage directly with external stakeholders only with the prior approval of Company External Affairs in conjunction with Company Darwin General Manager and in accordance with agreed communication plans and protocols.

All public feedback received by Contractor employees shall be directed to Company’s External Affairs General Manager for immediate action, as per the Stakeholder Engagement Plan [Ref A9].


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

11 AUDITING, REPORTING AND COMMUNICATION

11.1 INSPECTIONS

Contractor and subcontractors shall establish a program of inspections to verify the SOW activities are carried out in an environmentally acceptable manner and in accordance with applicable management plans and procedures. Inspections are the primary tool used to monitor Contractor and subcontractor activities.

Regular work site and vessel inspections will be undertaken by appropriately trained and experienced personnel from Company, Contractor and subcontractors. Where practical, inspections by Company, Contractor and subcontractors will be combined.

Inspections may be formal, i.e. conducted by site personnel in accordance with a set schedule and specified guidelines, such as daily and weekly housekeeping inspections. Some inspections may be ad hoc, i.e. management inspections conducted regularly but not specifically in accordance with a set schedule.

Inspection reports will be created for each inspection conducted, kept at the work site and made available for Company or regulator review on request.

The Darwin Site Representative and/or Vessel Master will be responsible for implementing any corrective actions identified as a consequence of the inspections.

11.2 AUDITING

Regular environmental management audits will be conducted during the construction phase to validate compliance with legal, the HSE Management System and management plan requirements, and to provide an opportunity to identify and correct any non-compliance. This will include internal and external, by regulators, auditing. Any non-conformances will be tracked using a tracking register with actions tracked to closure and verified that actions have been implemented.

Company and Contractor propose to develop and implement a joint HSE audit programme appropriate to cover Contractor’s SOW. This is a practical consideration that reflects the operating conditions influencing Contractor’s SOW but does not preclude Company or Contractor conducting individual audits of SOW activities. Contractor/subcontractor will facilitate and participate in any audits by Company. The audit programme will be developed to recognise that Contractor’s various (and discrete) activities occur over relatively short time frames.

Proposed audits will include but not be limited to:

Pre-mobilisation audits – Auditing Contractor and subcontractor documentation (GEP Project and vessel related) for personnel/crew training and awareness, equipment suitability and preparedness, waste management, oil spill response preparedness, quarantine records etc.

Post site establishment audit – Auditing of the onshore construction site to determine layout and set-up has occurred in accordance with plans and all CEMP requirements have been met.

Operational audits – Auditing of the implementation of the CEMP, plans and procedures, personnel/crew awareness, inspections, incident report (participation, adequacy, corrective action close-out), reporting and records (i.e. waste, chemicals management) during nearshore and onshore activities.

Ad hoc – As appropriate as a consequence of incidents, change in work scope/methodology. Requirement may be determined by Company or Contractor.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

11.3 REPORTING

GEP Project reporting will include reporting by subcontractors to Contractor, Contractor to Company, and Company to Stakeholders. Reporting requirements are summarised in Table 11-1.

Table 11-1 Summary of reporting requirements

Report type Responsibility Content Frequency Report recipient

Weekly Progress Performance Reporting

Contractor Summary of incidents/ near misses

Personnel work hours

Weekly Company

HSE Monthly Progress Report

Contractor Summary of Incidents / Near Misses

Environmental performance

HSE positive indicators, including summaries of HSE audits and inspections, HSE training and awareness, emergency drills and any HSE alerts raised and communicated

HSE performance summary

Monthly Company

Weekly Progress Performance Reporting

Subcontractors Summary of Incidents / Near Misses

Personnel work hours

Weekly Contractor

Incident notification and reporting

Subcontractors All environmental incidents in accordance the Health , Safety, Security and Environment Reporting Procedure [Ref B11] and in accordance with the relevant TARP in Chapter 8

Within 12 hours Contractor

Incident notification – non-conformance

Contractor Should Contractor become aware of a non-conformance with this CEMP (through inspections and auditing), Company will be notified in accordance with the relevant TARP in Chapter 8

Within 12 hours Company

Incident reporting - complaints

Contractor On receipt of 3 or more complaints in any 24 hour period the complaints are to be recorded in a Complaints Register and Company notified


Incident reporting – environmental harm

Contractor Should one become aware that environmental harm is occurring or likely to occur, under the Waste Management and Pollution Control Act


Incident reporting – injury or death

Contractor Incident resulting in the unintentional injury or death of a listed species

Immediately Company

Incident notification – nearshore spills

Contractor Should a spill of more than 1 L enter the marine environment,

Immediately Company

Should a spill of more than 1 L enter Darwin Harbour waters

Immediately Darwin Port Harbour Master


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Report type Responsibility Content Frequency Report recipient

(in accordance with the spill response TARPs in Chapter 8)

Should a spill enter NT waters (outside of Darwin Harbour)

Immediately DoT Marine Safety Branch,

Incident notification

Company Environmental incident causing or threatening to cause pollution resulting in material environmental harm or serious environmental harm

Within 24 hours (or as required)

Regulator (NT EPA)

11.4 AWARENESS AND COMMUNICATION

Effective communication between Company, Contractor and subcontractors will be vital to the successful delivery of the GEP Project. All communication to Company will be performed by Contractor. Contractor will perform all day-to-day site management communications with the subcontractors. A range of communication tools are utilised by Contractor to inform site personnel of environmental requirements and emerging issues. Such tools include, but are not limited to:

induction and training programs

pre-start meetings and toolbox talks

environmental meeting

JSA/SWMS

incident, accident, near-miss statistics

distribution of work instruction relating to environment

bulletins

notice boards

environmental signs and posters.

11.5 DOCUMENT CONTROL AND RECORD MANAGEMENT

11.5.1 Document control

A GEP Project Master Documentation Register (MDR) and Contractor Document and Drawing List (CDDL) have been developed and implemented. The MDR and CDDL include identification, recording and tracking of all controlled GEP Project documents. All controlled documents are specified for development, approval, issue, revision, distribution, maintenance, use, storage, security, obsolescence or disposal within the MDR or CDDL. Authorised personnel are identified during this process to approve select documents.

All Contractor documents are numbered in accordance with the GEP Project specifications. The nominated Document Controller for the GEP Project maintains an up-to-date document register detailing current revision, issue status and document holders.

11.5.2 Control of records

Control of records defines the necessary controls for the identification, storage, protection, retrieval, retention period and disposition of all GEP Project documents and records. All GEP Project documents and records are retained as objective evidence to demonstrate conformance to contractual requirements, statutory and regulatory requirements. All documents and records retained by Contractor will be archived for a minimum period of five years unless otherwise specified.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

12 CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTATIVE ACTION

This section discusses the principles of adaptive management and gives an overview of the response to non-conformances and how corrective and preventative actions are implemented. Incident management and reporting is also covered in the event that a non-compliance results in an incident occurring.

12.1 ADAPTIVE MANAGEMENT

Adaptive management is a systematic process for continually improving management practices by monitoring current practices and instigating change where required. The underlying principle is that management actions should be developed and implemented using the best available information at the time, and the outcomes be monitored and evaluated to derive ‘lessons learned’ that will improve the management response.

Contractor is committed to the principles of adaptive management in this CEMP. An environmental monitoring program (Chapter 9) has been established, which is linked to clearly defined objectives, targets and criteria (Chapter 8) for a range of environmental aspects. Where visual inspections and/or monitoring indicate there is a deviation from expected results, a TARP will be initiated. This is structured as a table with escalating trigger levels: Level 1 (potential environmental impact identified); Level 2 (environmental impact identified); and Level 3 (serious environmental impact identified). These tables are presented in Chapter 8 for each aspect, where applicable.

The TARPs provide a clear mechanism by which Contractor can implement changes to site management in response to modified site conditions, so that the Project continues to meet the established environmental objectives and targets.

The implementation of the TARPs is further supported by conducting reviews and updates of the CEMP with the intention to meet best environmental management practices. Identification of opportunities for improvement through auditing and reporting are detailed in Chapter 11 of this CEMP. The principle of adaptive management is also applied through the implementation and review of corrective and preventive actions to provide recommendations in the management system, as detailed further in Section 12.2.

12.2 NON-CONFORMANCE CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTATIVE ACTION

All non-conformance, corrective and preventative actions are managed as per Contractor procedures. Non-conformities are treated in a similar way to incidents in that they are investigated to determine the root cause and then evaluated to determine the need for preventative and corrective action. It is the responsibility of the designated individual or department to implement timely corrective actions to eliminate the possibility of a re-occurrence. Overdue actions are elevated for senior management consideration.

Any corrective and preventative action(s) initiated are reviewed to determine effectiveness. All reports or recommendations for improvement arising as a result of audits, process analysis or production failure reports are recorded in a register and annually reviewed to identify recurrent problems or system deficiency.

All proposed corrective and preventative actions are reviewed through the risk assessment process prior to implementation, particularly where the corrective or preventative action identifies new hazards.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Corrective actions could include but are not limited to:

Provision of additional training on management practices

Increased frequency of inspections

Audit of operating system records.

12.3 INCIDENT MANAGEMENT AND REPORTING

Contractor manages environmental and safety-related incidents and near misses as per Contractor Accident / Incident Report Procedure [Ref B12]. All incidents / near misses are investigated to evaluate the immediate and contributory root causes. Investigations are specifically formulated to avoid apportioning blame. The extent of the investigation and composition of the investigation team are determined according to the nature and severity of the incident.

Contractor incident investigations systems cover the following, as a minimum:

determines underlying environmental (and OHS where relevant) deficiencies and other factors that might cause or contribute to the occurrence of accident/ incidents

identifies the need for corrective actions to avoid future re-occurrence

identifies opportunities for preventative actions to eliminate any undesirable event

identifies opportunities for continual improvements to ensure effective environmental (and OHS where relevant) management at work site

communicates the results of investigations.

12.4 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS AND RESPONSE

12.4.1 Incident Management System

Contractor’s Incident Management System identifies three levels of emergency response organisation:

ERT – Emergency Response Team (vessel /barge /worksite)

EMT – Emergency Management Team (Onshore GEP Project Management)

CMT – Crisis Management Team (Onshore GEP Project Management, Senior Management Corporate Management).

Contractor has developed an Onshore / Nearshore Emergency Response Plan [Ref B5] as part of its commitment to emergency preparedness and response. Specific emergency planning, preparedness and response procedures are under development to detail the response to all reasonably foreseeable emergencies relevant to onshore and nearshore activities.

12.4.1.1 Emergency Response Team

Each vessel, barge or work site will have a designated Emergency Response Team (ERT). The ERT includes a Team Leader and suitably experienced team members. The ERT Leader is responsible for notifying Emergency Management Team (EMT) leader of any incident. The ERT Leader shall also notify the Contractor Site Representative (based in Darwin).

The role of the ERT is the on-site coordination and provision of resources to bring the emergency under control as soon as possible and limit injury or loss. If the emergency cannot be controlled and evacuation is necessary, the ERT will coordinate evacuation from the vessel/barge/worksite.

The ERT will also be responsible for notifying the onshore GEP Project Management at the Emergency Response Centre. Contractor will immediately notify Company of any incident.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

12.4.1.2 Emergency Management Team

The EMT will consist of key personnel from Contractor’s GEP Project Management Team and Company personnel. Contractor will provide a suitably equipped room at its Perth office to serve as the Emergency Response Centre (ERC). Upon receiving advice of an emergency from a vessel, barge or work site, the GEP Project Manager Onshore/Nearshore shall notify members of the EMT to proceed to the ERC. The EMT shall provide resources to the ERT, and coordinate external assistance. The EMT shall also coordinate communication to interested third parties such as next of kin. If the emergency cannot be controlled with the resources available to the EMT, they will notify the Crisis Management Team for additional support.

12.4.1.3 Crisis Management Team

The Crisis Management Team (CMT) will consist of Contractor Senior Management and Company personnel. The CMT will provide corporate level support in the event of a major emergency that cannot be controlled by the EMT. The CMT is also responsible for managing high level internal and external communication, managing business reputation and business continuity risks, and providing strategic advice to the EMT. The CMT members may join the EMT at the Emergency Response Centre.

12.4.2 Marine vessels

All vessels (including those provided by subcontractors) will have established emergency response procedures within their own vessel management systems. Vessels in the construction marine spread will notify the ERT leader on board Contractor’s primary construction vessel / barge of any emergency that occurs on board the marine spread vessel. Semac-1 will provide assistance as required, and will coordinate notification to, and assistance from the EMT. Contractor will immediately notify Company of any emergency on board a marine spread vessel.

Contractor will review the emergency response procedures of each vessel within the marine spread prior to the commencement of work, to ensure that the provisions are consistent with the requirements of Contractor and Company.

12.4.3 Worksite Emergency Response Plan

Emergencies will be managed in accordance with Contractor procedures, and site management will notify Contractor’s EMT. Contractor will immediately notify Company of any emergency at a worksite.

Where sites are controlled by a subcontractor, then the subcontractor will develop a site-specific Emergency Response Plan which will be reviewed and approved by Contractor. Emergencies will be managed in accordance with subcontractor procedures, and subcontractor management will notify Contractor’s Site Representative. Contractor will immediately notify Company of any emergency at a subcontractor controlled office or logistics base.

12.4.4 Emergency reporting to authorities

Contractor shall notify Company and relevant authorities of any emergency in accordance with the requirements of the Accident / Incident Report Procedure [Ref B12], Health, Safety, Security and Environment Reporting Procedure [Ref B11] and as outlined in the reporting requirements of Table 11-1. No Contractor personnel shall make any contact or comment to media. Any media enquiries shall be directed to Company.

12.4.5 Critical weather event

The Contractor Critical Weather Event Plan [Ref B13] details the response to weather-related emergencies such as a cyclone. Regular weather forecasts and weather alerts will be ascertained


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

from a reputable weather forecast service provider. These forecasts will be transmitted directly to the vessel / work site management team.

12.4.6 Emergency response training and drills

Contractor Emergency Response Plans will identify the requirement to establish a schedule of Emergency Response Drills for each vessel / barge / site. Emergency drills will be conducted, assessed and recorded in accordance with the requirements of Contractor Emergency Response Plan [Ref B5]

Contractor will require subcontractors to develop a schedule of emergency drills for all vessels/ sites under subcontractor control. The schedule of emergency drills will be reviewed and approved by Contractor prior to the commencement of works at the site / vessel, and verified during Contractor audits.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

13 RESPONSIBILITIES, TRAINING AND AWARENESS

13.1 CONTRACTOR ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Contractor’s primary responsibility is to ensure appropriate implementation and monitoring of the requirements of this CEMP across its work sites and including subcontractor activities.

Contractor will work with Company in monitoring the implementation of and compliance with the CEMP. Contractor’s HSE organisation chart for the GEP Project is provided in Figure 13-1. Contractor’s roles and responsibilities include, but are not limited to:

Project Director (Perth)

Reports to Contractor’s Head office

Responsibility

Demonstrating effective leadership to all personnel with respect to matters concerning the environment.

Ensuring GEP Project Environmental Policy and EMS are fully implemented within the Project.

Monitoring overall GEP Project performance and ensure adequate resourcing is provided for effective implementation of CEMP requirements.

Review and approve the GEP Project Environmental Policy at appropriate intervals.

Project Manager Onshore / Nearshore (Perth)

Reports to Project Director

Responsibility

Ensuring all work is carried out in accordance with the Project Environmental Policy, Plans and Procedures, is consistent with Company’s Ichthys Project requirements and local legislations and regulations.

Ensuring there is full implementation of environmental requirements at each work location through assignment of roles and responsibilities.

Monitoring environmental performance of work activities and ensure appropriate responses to identified issues are implemented in a timely manner.

Conducting management inspections of work sites.

Contractor Site Representative (Darwin Based)

Reports to Project Manager Onshore / Nearshore (Perth)

Responsibility

Monitoring, through inspections, subcontractor HSE performance.

Reporting subcontractor environmental incidents to Contractor management and Company (Darwin) representative.

Facilitating Contractor waste management logistical requirements.

Ensuring appropriate management of any dangerous goods and hazardous materials required for GEP Project activities.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Project HSE Manager (Perth / Darwin)

Reports to Corporate HSES Manager, Perth

Responsibility

Promoting effective communication of environmental requirements to all personnel including subcontractors.

Planning and implementing GEP Project HSE audit schedule.

Ensuring the on-going effectiveness of the HSEMS through audits and reviews.

Monitoring and reporting environmental performance to GEP Project Management.

Coordinating significant incident investigations.

Environmental Specialist (Perth / Darwin)

Reports to Project HSES Manager

Responsibility

Providing environmental management advice to all levels of Contractor organisation.

Ensuring development and on-going maintenance of environmental plans and procedures to address GEP Project requirements.

Supporting Contractor and subcontractor personnel in implementing processes to address environmental plans and procedure requirements.

Monitoring and reporting environmental performance of activities against KPIs to Contractor Management.

Performing audits to monitor performance against environmental commitments.

Liaising with Company environmental representatives on GEP Project environmental-related issues.

Contributing to development of environmental training material for Contractor personnel.

Vessel Master

Reports to Project Manager (onshore/nearshore)

Responsibility Implementing GEP Project environmental management requirements on vessel.

Communicating GEP Project environmental requirements to all crew.

Reporting all environmental non-conformances’ or incidents to the Darwin Site Representative.

HSE Coordinator (nearshore / offshore activities i.e. pipelay vessel)

Reports to Project HSE Manager (Perth / Darwin)

Responsibility Contributing to the development of environmental plans and procedures.

Participating in the environmental risk assessment process.

Supporting work site implementation of environmental controls.

Monitoring, through inspections, Contractor and subcontractor HSE performance at site.

Preparing Contractor corporate and Contract environmental performance reports.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

HSE Coordinator (onshore activities, Perth / Darwin)

Reports to Project HSE Manager (Perth / Darwin)

Responsibility Contributing to the development of environmental plans and procedures.

Participating in the environmental risk assessment process.

Supporting work site implementation of environmental controls.

Monitoring, through inspections, Contractor and subcontractor HSE performance at site.

Preparing Contractor corporate and Contract environmental performance reports.

Lead Project Engineers (Vessel / Perth /Site)

Reports to Project Manager (onshore)

Responsibility Contributing the development of environmental controls (specifications, procedures, plans etc) to meet GEP Project environmental requirements.

Contributing to environmental risk assessment process for relevant activities.

Implementing relevant environmental controls from plans and procedures during the execution phase of the work.

Ensuring timely reporting of all environmental incidents in accordance with GEP Project requirements.

Contributing to any incident investigations.

Work supervisors (Vessel)

Reports to Vessel Master

Responsibility Understanding and implementing work activity controls in accordance with procedures.

Promoting on-going awareness of environmental management issues through JSAs, pre-start and pre-start meetings.


Undertaking/organising routine housekeeping inspections of work areas.

Procurement and Contracts Team

Reports to Procurement Manager

Responsibility Implementing purchasing procedures that incorporate environmental management related controls.

Incorporating appropriate environmental management requirement information into tender and contract documentation.

Project personnel (Contractor)

Responsibility Complying with all environmental controls associated with work activities.



F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Figure 13-1 Contractor’s HSE Organisation Chart


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

13.2 SHORE APPROACH SUBCONTRACTOR ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

The shore approach subcontractor will be undertaking the shore approach activities on behalf of Contractor.

Subcontractor’s roles and responsibilities include, but are not limited to:

Project Manager

Reports to Managing Director

Responsibility

Ensures compliance with this CEMP.

Performs periodic management Inspections.

Project SHE-Q Manager

Reports to Project Manager / National SHE-Q Manager

Responsibility

Provides technical support to the Project Manager in respect to project related Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) and Environmental requirements.

Performs internal compliance.

Environmental Engineer / Advisor

Reports to Project Manager / SHE-Q Manager

Responsibility

Provides technical support and assistance to the Project Manager in respect to project related environmental requirements.

Implements CEMP requirements for shore approach activities.

Performs scheduled and random compliance inspections.

Investigates and reports incidents in accordance with Contractor and CEMP requirements.

Provides day-to-day coordination with the Superintendent(s) / Construction Supervisors / Works Manager for the implementation of the CEMP related to the shore approach work.

HSES Superintendent

Reports to Project Manager / National SHE-Q Manager

Responsibility

Provides support and assistance to the project management team, in respect to project related HSE requirements.

Provides guidance and support (in conjunction with the Environmental Advisor) to the HSES personnel on the project in respect to the requirements in the CEMP.

Project HSES Advisors

Reports to HSES Superintendent

Responsibility

Verifies required pre-starts, toolboxes are held and mitigation measures are taken as planned in regard to OHS and environmental issues.

Performs periodic compliance inspections.

Undertakes HSES inductions for all personnel and visitors to the shore approach site.

Performs other project HSES training and attends toolbox meetings.

Superintendent(s) / Construction Supervisors / Works Manager


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Project HSES Advisors

Reports to Project Manager

Responsibility

Ensures the construction activities related to the shore approach executed in a manner consistent with the requirements of this CEMP.

Performs periodic site compliance inspections with SHE-Q personnel.

Creating an atmosphere where employees are encouraged to work safely and in an environmentally responsibly.

Construction Personnel

Reports to Superintendent(s) / Construction Supervisors / Works Manager

Responsibility

Conduct all work in accordance with the project SHE-Q requirements and this CEMP.

Actively participate in start work meetings / JHA’s with the ultimate aim of working safely and environmentally responsible.

Immediately report all (potential) SHE-Q hazards and incidents to their direct supervisor.

13.3 COMPANY ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Company will oversee Contractor GEP activities in implementing the requirements of this CEMP. Company roles and responsibilities for the GEP shore crossing works under the CEMP include, but are not limited to:

Gas Export Pipeline (GEP) Manager

Reports to Head Office

Responsibility Overall compliance with this CEMP.

Liaises with Contractor Project Manager on CEMP related matters.

GEP Engineering and Construction Manager

Reports to GEP Manager

Responsibility Ensures Contractor complies with legal and contractual requirements regarding environmental matters.

Ensures that environmental commitments are understood and adhered to by the workforce.

GEP HSE Manager

Reports to GEP Manager

Responsibility Ensures Contractor complies with legal and contractual requirements regarding HSE matters.

Liaises with GEP Manager and GEP Engineering and Construction Manager in the event of an HSE non-conformance or incident.

Monitors Contractor and subcontractor HSE performance.

Ensures that environmental commitments are understood and adhered to by the workforce.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

Environmental Adviser - GEP

Reports to GEP HSE Manager

Responsibility Assists site personnel with environmental incident reporting and investigation.

Reports Contractor and subcontractor environmental non-conformances to external parties as required.

Ensures commitments made in this plan are understood and implemented by Company representatives and Contractor personnel.

Reviews Contractor and Subcontractor environmental management plans and procedures as necessary.

Conducts inspection/ audits site to assess Contractor and subcontractor compliance with this CEMP.

Reviews monitoring results with Contractor and subcontractor representatives to identify and discuss implications for shore approach activities.

Promotes and supports continuous improvement activities within the Project.

Company Representative – GEP Darwin Construction

Reports to Lead Installation and Construction Engineer

Responsibility Checks Contractor and subcontractor daily and weekly reports on.

Liaises with the Company’s external affairs department on shore crossing related matters.

Reports environmental and quarantine incidents and non-conformances to GEP HSE Manager and Environmental Advisor – GEP.

Assists with environmental incident reporting and investigation.

Attends pre-starts and toolboxes to discuss HSE topics.

Promotes and supporting continuous improvement activities within the Project.

Company Representative – GEP Shore crossing

Reports to Lead Installation and Construction Engineer

Responsibility Overseeing shore crossing / operations compliance in the field.

Checking Contractor and Subcontractor daily and weekly reports.

Reports environmental and quarantine incidents and non-conformances to GEP HSE Manager and Environmental Advisor – GEP.

Assists with Contractor and subcontractor environmental incident reporting and investigation.

Inspects work site to assess Contractor and Subcontractor compliance with this CEMP.

Attends pre-starts and toolboxes to discuss HSE topics.

Promotes and supporting continuous improvement activities within the Project.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

13.4 COMPETENCY, TRAINING AND AWARENESS

All Contractor and subcontractor personnel are to receive appropriate training and support to be assessed as competent for not only their work but also understanding and managing all environmental aspects and obligations associated with their work.

Training is tailored to the different needs of various levels or function in the GEP Project. Training is completed both for technical work and for general awareness on the part of all personnel. However, training is just one element used to establish competency, which is typically based on a combination of education, training, and experience.

13.4.1 Inductions

All Contractor and subcontractor personnel will have completed a GEP Project-specific induction prior to mobilisation. The inductions will cover the relevant environmental aspects and obligations, and highlight where EMS documentation can be accessed. The main environmental risks and management measures (as outlined in Chapter 8) will be discussed before commencement of work. Attendance is compulsory and will be formally recorded.

Crew will receive additional induction and familiarisation to ensure that they are familiar with the requirements for the vessel upon which they are working, including vessel-specific procedures with regard to protected marine species management, waste management and other vessel-specific environmental management plans / procedures.

A more detailed description of Contractor’s induction requirements will be given in Contractor HSE Induction and Training Procedure [Ref B14].

13.4.2 Training and competency

Contractor maintains a Training Matrix for the purpose of documenting and scheduling HSE training and competence requirements for each worksite, commensurate to specific roles, responsibilities and accountabilities. The HSE Training Matrix is used to identify gaps in individual’s training and competency assessment requirements and forms the basis of ongoing training programs.

Major subcontractors will be required to provide and maintain comparable training and an adequate training management system. Contractor will monitor subcontractor training management systems.

The Training Matrix will address the following:

key employee/responsibility groups

site activities and associated potential risks

job task–specific inductions

relevant environmental procedures outlined in this CEMP.

Contractor maintains HSE training records and documents the HSE training and competency assessments of all personnel. Records are maintained in accordance with the applicable records management process.


F281-AH-PLN-10013 Rev. 2 of 320

APPENDIX A CONSTRUCTION VESSEL SPECIFICATIONS